Nokia 3230 User Manual
User Guide for N okia 3230 9234625 Issu e 1 EN
DECLARATIO N OF CONFORMITY We, NO KIA CORPO RATI ON dec la re und er ou r so le re spons ibi li ty that th e pr oduct R M-51 is i n con for mit y with the prov isi on s of the fo ll owin g Counc il Dir ect ive :199 9/5/ EC. A copy of the Decl ar ati on of Con for mit y can be foun d at ht tp:/ /w ww. nok ia. com /ph on es/ decl ar atio n_ of_ con for mit y/ Copy right é 20 05 No kia. Al l righ ts rese rved. Reprodu cti on, tr ansf er, d ist rib uti on or stor age of par t or all o f th e co nten ts i n thi s d ocume nt in any for m without the prior written permission of Nokia is prohibited. Nokia, Nokia Conne cting People, Pop-Port and Xpress-o n are regi stered tr ademarks of Noki a Corporation. Other produ ct and c ompa ny nam es me ntio ned h ere in may be t ra demar ks or tr aden ames of th eir res pe cti ve ow ner s . Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. This produc t in clud es softw are lic ens ed from Sym bian S oftwa re L td. é 199 8-20 05. Symb ian an d Symbi an O S a re tr adema rk s of S ymb ian Ltd. Java⢠and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademark s of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Stac î, LZS î, é19 96, Sta c, Inc ., é1994 -199 6 Mic rosoft Corp oration . Inclu des o ne or mo re U.S . Pate nts: No . 47017 45, 5 01600 9, 5 12673 9, 5 14622 1, and 5 414 425. O ther p atent s pen ding. Hi/fn î, LZS î,é198 8- 98, H i/fn. In clud es on e or m ore U. S. Paten ts: N o. 4701 74 5, 5016 009, 5126 739, 51 462 21, a nd 54 14425 . Other patent s pen ding .Par t of the s oftwar e i n this prod uct is é Copyr ight A NT Lt d. 199 8. All rig hts reserved.m-Router Connectivity Components é 2000-2002 Intuwav e Limited. A ll rights reserved. (www.intuwave.com) US Patent No 58184 37 and oth er pend ing pat ents . T9 text inpu t softw are Copy righ t (C) 1997-2 004. Te gic Comm unications, Inc. All rights reserved. Bluet ooth is a r egi ster ed t rade mark o f B luet ooth SIG, I nc.
Nokia oper ate s a po licy of conti n uous devel opm ent. Noki a r eser ves th e r ig ht to make ch an ges an d impro veme nts t o a ny of the pr oduc ts desc ribe d in this doc ument with out prio r not ice . Un der n o circ umsta nce s sh all N oki a be re spo nsibl e for an y los s of d ata or inc ome or a ny sp ecial, inci den tal, c on seque nti al or in dir ect da mage s how soev er c ause d. T h e c o n t e n t s o f t h i s d o c u m e n t a r e p r ov i d e d â a s i s â . E x c e p t a s r e q u i r e d b y a p p l i c a b l e l a w , n o w a r r a n ti e s o f an y kin d, e ithe r exp res s or i mpli ed, inclu din g, bu t no t li mite d to, th e imp lie d warra nt ies of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpos e, are made in relation to the accuracy, reliability or contents of this document. Nokia reserves the right to revise this document or withdraw it at any time without prior notice. The av aila bili ty of par tic ular prod uc ts ma y vary by re gion . Ch eck w ith th e Nok ia d eale r nea rest to you . Issu e 1 EN , 92 34625
4 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Content For your safety ..................................................... ............................................. 14 General information ............... .............................. ............................................. 18 Sticke rs in the sales packag e .......................... ................................. ................ ....................... ......... ..... 18 Acce ss codes ........ ................................ ................ ................................. .......................... ...................... ..... 18 PIN co de ............................. ................................ ................. ................................ ......... ....... ..................... 18 PIN2 code .......... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ........... ..................... ..... 18 Lock code ........... ................................ ................................. ................ .......................... ...... ................ ..... 19 PUK a nd PU K2 code s ...... ................................ ................. ................................ ...................... ............... 19 1. Getting started ............................................................................... ............... 20 Inserti ng a SIM card and a MultiMedi aCard ............................................... ................................ ..... 2 0 Removi ng the Multime dia card during phon e operation......... ................................ ................ ..... 23 Chargi ng the b attery ......... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ . .................... 23 Switc hing th e phone on and off .................... ................. ................................ ............................ ......... 24 2. Your phone........................................................ .............................. ............... 26 Keys and parts ..................................... ................ ................................. ........................... ..................... ..... 26 Esse ntial indica tors ............................................ ................................. ................ .............. .................. ..... 29 Keyp ad lock (Keyguard) .... ................................ ................. ................................ .................... ................. 30 Me nu ..................... ................................ ................................. ................ .................... ............ ................ ..... 30 Acti ons commo n to all app lications ............. ................................. ................................ ............... . ..... 32 Volum e control .................... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ..................... 34 Help ........................ ................................ ................................. ................ .................. .............. ................ ..... 35
5 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 3. Call functions ................................................... .............................. ............... 36 Making a voic e cal l ............ ................................ ................................. ................ ............... ................. ..... 36 Speed dialling a phone num ber .................. ................. ................................ ............................... ...... 37 Making a confer ence call (network service) ............................. ................ ................................ ..... 37 Answe ring or rejecting a call .......................... ................. ................................ ....................... ......... ..... 38 Call waiting (net work service) ..... ................................. ................................ ................ ........... .......... 38 Options during a call ...... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ... .................. 39 Push to talk .......... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ........ ........................ ..... 39 Settin gs for push to talk ............... ................................. ................................ ................ ..................... 40 Connecti ng to th e pus h to t alk service ..... ................................. ................................ ................ ... .. 41 Making a pus h to talk call ............ ................................. ................................ ........................ ........ ..... 42 Rece iving a p ush to talk ca ll .... ................ ................................. ................................ ............. ... ..... 43 Callback reques ts ............ ................................ ................................. ................ ................. ............... ..... 43 Sendi ng a callback reques t ....................... ................................. ................ ................................ ..... 43 Saving the ca llback request sen der ........ ................................. ................................ ................ .... . 44 Using group s ..................... ................ ................................. ................................ ............. ... ................ ..... 44 Addi ng a group ............. ................................ ................. ................................ ................... .................. 45 Joining an ex isting group .......... ................ ................................. ................................ ........... ..... ..... 45 Rece iving an i nvitation .............................. ................................. ................ ......................... ............ 46 Call regi ster and general log ........................... ................................. ................ ...................... ............... 47 Recent calls regis ter ....................... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ..... 47 Call d uration ..... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ............ .................... ..... 48 Viewing the gene ral log ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ....... .............. 48 GPRS d ata cou nter.......... ................................ ................. ................................ ................... ............. ..... 50 4. Writing text ........................ ............................................................ ............... 51 Using tradition al text input ............. ................................. ................ ................................ ..... ................ 51 Using predicti ve text i nput .............. ................ ................................. ................................ ..... ........... ..... 52 Tips for wri ting text ........................... ................................. ................................ .............. .. ..................... 53 Copy ing text to the clipbo ard ......................... ................................. ................ ........................ ............. 54
6 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 5. Personal information........................................ .............................. ............... 56 Cont acts ................................ ................................ ................................. ................ ...... .......... ..................... 56 Managi ng contacts ......................... ................................. ................................ ................ ..................... 56 Adding a ring ing ton e .................... ................................. ................................ ................ ..... ................ 57 Voice d ialling .... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ............ .................... ..... 58 Addi ng a voice tag to a phone number . ................................. ................................ ................ ..... 58 Making a ca ll by s aying a voice t ag ........................ ................................ ................................ .... . 59 Assigni ng speed-dialling keys ..... ................................. ................................ ................ ............ ......... 59 Prese nce ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ...... ......... ................. ..... 60 Changing y our availability in formation .... ................................. ................................ ................ .... . 61 Changing wh o can view your Presence information ............................. ................................ ..... 61 Publi c viewe rs ............... ................................ ................. ................................ ................. ............... ..... 62 Privat e viewe rs ............................. ................................. ................................ ................ .. ................... 63 Blocke d viewers............ ................ ................................. ................................ ................... .................. 64 Upda ting your Presenc e informa tion ........ ................................. ................................ .................... . 64 Presence set tings ............ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ..................... 65 Positi oning ............................ ................ ................................. ................................ ....... ......... ..................... 66 Calen dar ................................ ................................ ................................. ...................... .......... ..................... 66 Creating c alendar entries ............................. ................................. ................................ ................ ..... 67 Calendar views . ................................ ................ ................................. ............................... . ................ ..... 68 To-do ...... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................... ............. ..................... 69 Impo rting data from compat ible phones ...................... ................ ................................ .................... . 70 6. Media .................................. .............................. ............................................. 71 Galle ry.................... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ... ............................. ..... 71 Openin g files..... ................................ ................ ................................. ............................ .................... ..... 72 Other default folders ...................... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ..... 72 Picture m essages folder ............. ................................. ................................ ................ .......... ........... 72 Wallp apers folde r ........ ................................ ................. ................................ ..................... ........... ..... 73
7 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Prese nce log os folder.................. ................................. ................ ................................ ....... .............. 73 Downlo ading files ........... ................................ ................................. ................ .................. .............. ..... 73 Upload ing ima ges to a n ima ge server ....... ................. ................................ ................................ .... . 74 Came ra................................... ................................ ................................. ................ ..... ........................... ..... 74 Taking a picture or record ing a video cl ip ................ ................................ ................ ..................... 75 Nig ht mode.... ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ..................... 76 Self timer ....... ................................ ................................. ................................ ................ ..................... 76 Camera s ettings ............................... ................................. ................ ................................ ..................... 76 Viewing image s ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ................ ..... 78 Zoo ming on a saved imag e ....... ................................. ................................ ................ ............... ...... 79 Shortcut s du ring zoomi ng......................... ................................. ................ ............................. ... ..... 79 Visual R adio.......................... ................................ ................. ................................ ........ ........ ..................... 79 Turning o n the radio....... ................ ................................. ................................ ................... .................. 81 Tuning and savi ng a radio channel ............................. ................................ ................................ . .... 82 Using the radio ................................................ ................................. ............................... ................ . ..... 82 Using the chan nel list .................... ................................. ................ ................................ ................ ..... 83 Chann el setu p ............................... ................................. ................ ................................ .. ................... 84 View Vis ual Cont ent ....... ................................ ................. ................................ .................... ............ ..... 85 Visual R adio settings ...... ................................ ................. ................................ ................... .................. 86 Channel Direc tory ........... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ..................... 86 Acce ss to Channel Directory throug h Visual Radio button ............................. ................ ..... 87 Acce ss to C hannel D irectory through o ptions List ............ ................................ ..................... 87 Rea lPlayer⢠.......................... ................................ ................................. ................ ......... ....................... ..... 88 Playing media files .......................... ................................. ................ ................................ . ............... ..... 89 Shortcut s du ring play ................................. ................................. ................ ........................ ........ ..... 90 Changing t he settings.... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ..................... 90 Movie Director ..... ................................ ................................. ................ ........................... ..... ..................... 91 Settin gs .............. ................................ ................ ................................. ........................ ........................ ..... 93
8 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 7. Messaging ........................... ............................................................ ............... 94 Writi ng and sending m essages ....................... ................................. ................ ........................... .......... 96 Settin gs for multimedia ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ..................... 98 Settin gs for e-mail.......... ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ..... 98 Inbox - re ceivin g messages ............................. ................................. ................................ ....... ......... .. 100 Viewing m ultimedia ob jects ........ ................................. ................ ................................ .................. 100 Receivi ng smart messages ............................ ................. ................................ .......................... ........ 101 Receivi ng service messages .......................... ................. ................................ .......................... ...... .. 102 My fo lders ............ ................................ ................................. ................ ....................... ......... .................. 102 Mailbo x.. ................................ ................................ ................. ................................ ..... ........................... .. 103 Retrievin g e-mail messages from th e mailbox ........................ ................ ................................ .. 104 Deleting e-mail m essage s............. ................................. ................................ ......................... ......... 105 Outbo x ... ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ..... ........... .................. 106 Viewing mess ages on a SIM c ard.................................... ................ ................................ ............. ..... 107 Cell broad cast ...... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ .......... ...................... .. 107 Service command editor ................... ................................. ................ ................................ ..... ............. 108 Me ssaging s ettings ............................ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ .. 108 Text messages .. ................................ ................ ................................. ............................... ................... 108 Multim edia messages .................... ................................. ................................ ................ ....... ........... 109 E-mail messages .............................. ................................. ................ ................................ . ............... .. 111 Settings for M ailboxe s ............... ................ ................................. ................................ ......... ....... .. 111 Service messa ges ............................. ................ ................................. ................................ . ............... .. 113 Cell br oadcast .................................. ................ ................................. .............................. .................... 114 Settin gs for the Other folder ....................... ................................. ................................ ................ .. 114 Chat ........................................ ................ ................................. ................................ .. .............. .................. 115 Connecti ng to a chat server ......................... ................................. ................ .......................... ...... .. 115 Modify ing your c hat se ttings ...... ................................. ................ ................................ ............ ...... 116 Joining and le aving a chat gro up ............... ................. ................................ ............................... ... 116 Searc hing for ch at gr oups and users ......... ................. ................................ ................................ .. 117
9 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Chatting in a c hat g roup ............................................... ................................ ................ ........ .......... 118 Record ing mes sages.................... ................ ................................. ................................ ........ ........ .. 119 Blocki ng me ssages ...................... ................................. ................................ ................ ....... ........... 119 Starting and viewing i ndividu al conv ersation s ....... ................................ ................................ .. 119 Chat contac ts ................... ................ ................................. ................................ .............. .. .................. 120 Creating a new c hat group ........................................... ................................ ................ .................. 121 Editi ng chat group setting s ...................... ................................. ................ ................................ .. 122 Restric ting access to a chat group .......................................... ................................ ................ .. 122 Chat and Prese nce servers ............ ................ ................................. ................................ ......... ....... .. 123 8. Tools ...... ............................................................ ........................................... 124 Appl ications ......... ................................ ................................. ................ ......................... ....... ................ .. 124 Downlo ading an applicat ion ........................ ................................. ................................ ............ .... .. 125 Installing an applicatio n ............... ................................. ................................ ...................... ............ 126 Instal ling a J avaâ¢appli cation ... ................................. ................................ ................ .............. .... 127 Launching a n application ............. ................................. ................................ ......................... ....... .. 128 Othe r options available for an application or applic ation set ......................... .................. 128 Memory status fo r applica tions .................. ................................. ................................ .............. .. .. 129 Removin g an application .............. ................................. ................................ ................ ......... ......... 129 File manager ........ ................................ ................................. ................ .......................... ...... ................ .. 129 Receivi ng files via Infrared ........................... ................................. ................................ ....... ......... .. 130 Viewing m emory consumpti on.... ................................. ................................ ................ ................ .. 130 Voic e commands ................. ................................ ................................. ................ ............... ................. .. 131 Adding a vo ice com mand to an a pplication ............................. ................ ................................ .. 132 Starting an application using a voic e command .... ................ ................................ .................. 133 Replayi ng, erasing, or chang ing a voice comman d ................ ................ ................................ .. 133 Dev ice manage r................................... ................ ................................. ............................. ................... .. 134
10 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 9. Personalising your phone ................................. ........................................... 136 Profil es ... ................................ ................................ ................................. ................ ... ............................. .. 136 Themes ... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ..................... ........... .................. 137 Settings ................................. ................ ................................. ................................ ..... ........... .................. 139 Changing ge neral setting s ............................ ................................. ................ ......................... ......... 139 Phone settings ................. ................................ ................................. ................ ............... . .................. 139 Call s ettings ...... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ........... ..................... .. 141 Connecti on settings ....................................... ................................. ................ ................................ .. 143 Acce ss point s ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................. .............. . .. 143 GPRS ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ .......... ..... ................. .. 146 Data c all ......................................... ................................. ................ ............................ .... ................ .. 147 Date a nd time .................. ................................ ................................. ................ ............... ................... 148 Security .............. ................................ ................................. ................................ ........ ........ .................. 149 Phon e and SIM ............................................. ................. ................................ .................... .............. 149 Certi ficate manageme nt............ ................ ................................. ................................ ............ .... .. 150 Call b arring ....................... ................................ ................................. ................ ........... ..................... .. 152 Network ............. ................ ................................ ................................. .......................... ...................... .. 153 Enhanc ement .................. ................ ................................. ................................ ................ .................. 153 Go to....................... ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ .. 154 10.Extras ............................................................... ........................................... 156 Not es ...... ................ ................................ ................................. ................................ ... ............. .................. 156 Calc ulator ............................. ................ ................................. ................................ ....... ......... ................ .. 156 Conv erter .............................. ................ ................................. ................................ ....... ......... .................. 158 Converti ng units .............. ................................ ................. ................................ ................ .................. 158 Settin g a base currency and ex change ra tes ........................... ................ ................................ .. 159 Record er ................................................ ................ ................................. ...................... .......... .................. 160 Clock ....... ................................ ................................ ................. ................................ .. .............. .................. 160 Changing c lock settings ................ ................................. ................................ ................ .................. 160
11 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Settin g an ala rm .............................. ................................. ................ ................................ ................ .. 161 Person alising the alarm tone ................... ................. ................................ ............................... ... 161 Memo ry card ........ ................................ ................ ................................. ........................... ..... ................ .. 162 Formatting the me mory c ard....... ................ ................................. ................................ ............. ... .. 163 Backing up and restoring informa tion ....................... ................................ ................ .................. 1 63 Locking the me mory c ard ............. ................................. ................ ................................ .......... ........ 163 Unlock ing a memory card ......... ................................. ................................ .............................. .. .. 164 Checkin g memory consumpt ion . ................ ................................. ................................ .................. 164 Wallet ................... ................................ ................................. ................ .................... ............ ................ .. 164 Entering the w allet code ............................... ................. ................................ ....................... ........... 165 Storing persona l card details ....... ................................. ................................ ................ .......... ........ 166 Creating pe rsonal notes ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ .. 167 Creating a wa llet profile ............................... ................. ................................ ...................... ............ 167 Retrievin g information from the wal let to your browser ..... ................................ .................. 168 Viewing ticke t details .................... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ .. 169 Wallet settin gs . ................................ ................................. ................ .............................. .. ................ .. 169 Resetting the w allet an d walle t code ........................ ................ ................................ .................. 170 11.Services and Applications............................... .............................. ............. 171 Web (Mob ile brows er) ....................... ................ ................................. ................................ ... ............. .. 171 Basic ste ps for a ccessing .............. ................................. ................................ ................ ....... ........... 171 Settin g up th e phone for the brows er servic e ......................................... ................................ .. 172 Rece iving setti ngs in a smart message . ................................. ................................ ................ .. 172 Enterin g the settings manuall y ............... ................................. ................ ................................ . . 172 Making a connec tion ..... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ .................. 172 Viewing boo kmarks ......................... ................................. ................................ ................ .................. 173 Addi ng bookm arks manually ..................................... ................................ ................ ................. . 174 Browsi ng ............................ ................................ ................. ................................ .......... ...... .................. 174 Keys and commands used in browsing................... ................ ................................ .................. 174
12 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Saving bookm arks........ ................................ ................................. ................ ...................... .......... .. 175 Viewing saved page s................... ................................. ................................ ................ ........ .......... 175 Downlo ading .... ................................ ................................. ................ ............................... . .................. 176 Purcha sing an item ..................... ................................. ................ ................................ ....... ........... 177 Checki ng an item before dow nloading . ................................. ................................ ................ .. 177 Ending a conn ection ...... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ .................. 178 Browse r settings .............. ................ ................................. ................................ ................ .................. 178 Games .... ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ..... ........... .................. 179 12.Connectivity .................................................................................. ............. 180 PC S uite . ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ..... ........... .................. 180 Bluet ooth connecti on........ ................................ ................. ................................ .................. ................ 181 Bluetoot h conne ction se ttings .................... ................. ................................ ............................. ..... 182 Sendin g data via Blu etooth te chnolo gy .................................... ................................ ................ .. 182 Paired d evices vi ew ........ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ... ............... 184 Receivi ng da ta via B luetooth wireless techno logy ................. ................................ ................ .. 185 Disconne cting Bluetoo th connection ......................................... ................................ ................ .. 1 85 Infrared connec tion ........... ................................ ................. ................................ ................ ................ .. 186 Conne ction ma nager ......... ................................ ................. ................................ ................... ............... 187 Viewing conne ction details ........................................... ................ ................................ ................ .. 188 Ending conn ections ........ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ .................. 189 Conne cting yo ur phone to a c ompa tible com puter... ................................ ................................ .. 189 Using your ph one a s a m odem ....................... ................. ................................ ............................ .... .. 189 Remote synchron isation ... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ..... ............. 190 Creating a new sync hronisation profile..................... ................ ................................ .................. 1 90 Synch ronising da ta ......................................... ................................. ................ ................... ............... 191 13.Troubleshooting ................ .............................. ........................................... 193 Q&A ........................ ................................ ................ ................................. ................... ............. ................ .. 194
13 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 14.Battery information .......... .............................. ........................................... 199 Chargi ng and Disch arging ................................ ................................. ................................ ...... .......... .. 199 Nokia battery authent ication gui delines ..... ................................. ................................ ................ .. 200 Care and Maintenance ......................................... ........................................... 203 Additional safety information ............................. ........................................... 205
14 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . For yo ur s afe t y Read thes e simple guid elin es. Not fo llowing th em may be dang erous or il legal . Read the complete use r guide for further informat ion. SWITC H ON SAFELY Do not swit ch the phone on wh en wi reless ph one use is pro hibit ed or w hen i t may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all lo cal law s. Always ke ep your ha nds free to operat e the vehicl e while driving . Your fi rst consi deration while dri ving should be road saf ety. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWIT CH OF F IN HOS PITALS Follow any res trictio ns. Swit ch the phone of f near medica l equipm ent. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRA FT Follow any restri ctions. Wirel ess device s can cause inter ference in ai rcraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELLING Do not use th e phone at a re fuelling point. Do n ot use near fu el or ch emicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BL ASTING Follow any res trictio ns. Do not us e the phon e where bla sting is in progress .
15 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . USE SEN SI BLY Use on ly i n t he no r ma l po si tio n as ex pl ai ned i n t he p r odu ct do c ume nta t io n. Do not t ouch the ant enna unn ecessarily . QUALIF IED SE RVICE Only qual ified pers onnel ma y install or repair this product. ENHA NCEM ENTS AND BATTE RIES Use only a pproved enhancemen ts and batt erie s. Do not conne ct incompat ible produc ts. WATER-RESISTA NCE Your phone is not water- resistant. Keep it dry. BACK-UP COP IES Remember to make back-up copi es or keep a w ritten rec ord of all imp ortant information s tored in your phone. CONNECTIN G TO OTHER DEVICES When connecti ng to any other device, read its user guid e for detaile d safety instru ctions. Do not connect incompa tible products. EMER GENC Y CALL S Ensur e the phone i s swit ched on and in se rvice. Pr ess th e end key as many ti mes as needed to clear the dis play and return to the start screen. Enter th e emerge ncy number, then pre ss the send key. Give your locatio n. Do not end the call un til given permis sion to do so .
16 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Abou t you r dev ice The wireless device describe d in th is guid e is approv ed for us e on the EGS M 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 1 900 netw orks. Cont act your servi ce provide r for more informat ion abou t ne two rk s . Wh en usi ng t he fe ature s in this de vice, obey all la ws an d re spect pr ivacy and l egit imate righ ts of o th er s. War ni ng: To us e any features in th is device, other than the al arm clock, th e device must be swi tched on. Do not s witch the devi ce on when wireless de vice use may cause inte rfer ence or da nger. â Networ k Servic es To use the phone yo u must have service f rom a wireles s service provid er. Many of the feat ures in this device d epend on features in the wirele ss network to functi on. These Network Service s may not be availa ble on al l networks or you ma y have to make specif ic arrangements with your se rvice pr ovider befo re you can ut ilize Network S ervice s. Your service p rovider ma y need to give you addit iona l instru ctions fo r their use a nd expla in what charges will apply. Some networks may have limita tions tha t affect how you can use Network Service s. For in stance, some n etworks ma y not support a ll language-d epende nt ch ara cters an d ser vic es. Your ser vice pro vid er m ay have reque sted that cert ain fe ature s be d isab led or not activ ated in your devi ce. If s o, they w ill not a ppear on yo ur device me nu. Con tact yo ur servi ce provi der for more info rmation. This devi ce sup ports WAP 2.0 pro tocol s (HTT P and SSL) t hat run on T CP/IP proto cols. S ome fea tures of this de vic e requi re netw ork s upport for thes e techno logi es.
17 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Sha red me mor y The foll owing featu res in thi s devic e may share memo ry: con tacts, tex t messa ges, and multimedia message s, images and ringing to nes, video recorde r, RealOne P layer TM , calendar, to -do notes , visu al rad io, and d own load ed appli cati ons. Us e of one or m ore of th ese features may reduce the memo ry ava ilable f or the remain ing feat ures s haring memory. For exa mple, saving many i mages may use all o f the avai lable memory . Your devi ce may displ ay a message that the memor y is full when you tr y to use a shared me mory featu re. In th is case, delete some of the informatio n or entrie s store d in the s hared memo ry feature s before continuin g. Some of the featu res may hav e a certain amount of memo ry speci ally all otted to them in addition to th e memory shared with other feat ures. â Enh anc emen ts, batte ries , and ch arge rs Ch eck the mode l numbe r of any c harger befor e use with t his p hone. Th is ph one is i ntende d for use when supplied wi th power from ACP-7 . War ni ng: U se only batte ries , charge rs, and enhancemen ts ap proved by Nokia for use wi th this p articular mod el. The use of an y other t ypes may invalida te any appro val or wa rranty , and may b e dan gerous . For availabili ty of approve d enhancements , please che ck with your dealer. When you dis co nne c t th e po w er c ord of any e nha nce m ent , gr a sp and pul l the plu g , no t th e c or d. Your p hone and its enha ncements may cont ain small pa rts. Keep th em out of reach of small children .
18 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Gene ral information â Stic kers in the sa les packa ge The s tickers included o n the war ranty card, in the s ales packa ge, contain important inf ormation for service and customer support purposes. T he sales package also includes instructions on how to use t he sticker s. â Acc ess c odes PIN co de The PIN (Per sonal Identification Number, 4 to 8 digit s) code he lps to protect your SIM card agains t unauthorised use. T he PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM card . After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the PIN code is blocked. If the PIN co de is block ed, you need to unbloc k it w ith the PUK code before you can use the SIM card again. PIN2 c ode The PIN 2 code (4 to 8 digit s), supplied wit h some SIM ca rds, is required to a ccess some functions .
19 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Lock code The loc k code (5 digit s) can be used to lock the phone a nd keypad to avoid unauthorised use. The factor y setting for the lock code is 12345. To avoid unauthorised us e of your phone, change the lock code. Keep the new c ode secret and in a safe plac e separate fr om your phone. PUK and PUK2 codes The PUK (Per sonal Unblocking Ke y, 8 digits) code is require d to change a blocked PIN co de. The PUK2 code is required to change a blocked PIN 2 code. If t he codes are not supplied with t he SIM card, contact the operator whose SIM card is in your phone for the codes.
20 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 1. Gett ing starte d Note : Before removing the cover, always switch off the power and disconnect the char ger an d any other d evic e. Av oid tou ching e lectro nic compo nents w hile changing the covers. Always store a nd use the device wi th the covers attached . â Ins erting a S IM c ard and a Mult iMedi aCard 1. To open the phone slide t he phone cover tow ards the bottom of the phone.
21 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 2. Open the memory card holder by pulling it up gently. Insert t he SIM card int o the lower slot. Make sure that th e bevelled cor ner on the SIM card is facing towards the top of the phone and th at the golden contact area on t he card is facing downwards. 3. To remove the SIM card, open the memory car d holder and us e the slider to slide the SIM car d out of th e card holder.
22 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 4. Insert the MultiMediaCard (MMC) into the holderâÂÂs slot. Make sure that the bevelled corner and golde n contact ar ea of the MMC are facing downwards. 5. Close the me mory card holde r by pressing it downwards until locked. 6. Align the golden contacts of t he battery with the corresponding connectors on the phone, and push the oppos ite end of the battery unt il it snaps into place. 7. Close the phone cover by sliding it toward s the top of the phone. Kee p all SIM ca rds out of the rea ch of small children . For avai lability and information on using SIM car d services, co ntact your SI M card vendor. This may be the se rvice pro vide r, networ k ope rato r, or ot her ven dor. Use only compati ble Mul timedia card s (MMC) with thi s device. Th e compatib le MMC for your device is Redu ced Size Dual Voltage Mu ltiM ediaCard. Other memory cards , such as Secure Digital (SD ) cards, do not fit in the MMC card slot and are n ot compatib le with this device. Using an incompa tible mem ory card may dam age the memory card as well as the device, and data store d on the incompatib le card may be corrupted.
23 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Remo ving the Mu lt imed ia card du r ing ph on e oper at ion You can remov e or replac e the Multimedia card during phone operation w ithout switching the phone off. 1. Open the phone cover. 2. Select Menu â Extras â Me mory c ard . an d sel ect Options â Remo ve mem. card or press the dip switch right to Multimedia card holder. The phone displays the message: Remo ving memory card will close all open applic ations. Remove anyway? 3. Press Ye s and turn the phone. 4. Open the Multimedia card holder, remove or re place the Multimedia card and close the card holde r. 5. Turn the phone and press Ok . 6. Close the phone cove r. â Ch arging th e bat tery 1. C on nec t th e po wer cord to the cha rg er. 2. Connect the other end of the power cord from the c harger to the base of the phone.
24 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 3. Connect the charger to an AC wall out let. The bat tery indicator bar on the display sta rts scrolling. Note that you can use the phone while charging. When the battery is fully charged, the bar stops scrolling. Disconnect the charger first from the phone and the from the AC outlet. See âÂÂBattery informationâ on page 199. â Swi tc hi ng t he ph o ne on a nd o f f To switch the phone on and off, press and hol d the power button on the top of the phone. War ni ng: Do not switch the pho ne on when wire less phone u se is prohib ited or when it may cause i nterferen ce or dan ger. You r dev ic e has an int ern al an tenn a. Note : As with any other radio- transmit ting devi ce, do not touch the antenn a unnece ssarily when t he pho ne i s switch ed on . Conta ct with t he a ntenna affects c all quality and may cause the phone to opera te at a hi gher power level than oth erwis e needed . Avoidi ng contact with the ante nna area w hen operatin g the ph one optimis es the antenna performance and the battery life. NORMAL POSITION : H old the phone as shown in the picture above.
25 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . If the phone requests a PIN code: The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM c ard. ⢠Enter the code (di splayed as * ***) and press the left selection ke y. If the phone requests a lock code: ⢠Enter the lock code (displa yed as ***** ) and pres s the left selection ke y. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345. send key
26 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 2. Y o ur p hone â Keys and pa rts Fr on t vie w 1. Earpiece 2. Pus h to ta lk (P TT) key To ac tiva te Pu sh t o ta lk . See âÂÂPush to talkâ on page 39. 3. Joyst ic k Enables scrolling through names, phone numbers, menus or settings. The joy stick is a lso used to mov e the cursor up and down, right and left when writ ing text, us ing the cale ndar, and in s ome game applica tions. Pressing the joystick briefly selec ts the function. 4. Menu key opens the main menu. 5. Call key dials a phone number and answers a call. In standby mode it shows the list of most recently called numbers. 6. â e nter numbers and characters.
27 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . and are used for various purposes in different functions. 7. End key ends an active c all. Exits from any function. 8. Edit key opens a list of commands when you are edit ing a text such as Copy , Cut and Pa s t e . 9. Clear ke y clears an e ntry or deletes an item and exits from different functions. 10. Se lection keys The funct ions of the key s depend on th e guiding text shown on the dis play above t he keys . To displa y the main menu, pr ess . 11. Pow er key Switches the phone on a nd off. When the keypad is locked, pressing the pow er key turns the phoneâÂÂs display lights on for approximately 15 seconds.
28 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Back, top and side view 1. Power key and L oudspeaker 2. Eyelet for w rist s trap 3. Camera lens 4. Infrared (IR) port Connectors view 1. Charg er conne ctor 2. Pop-Port TM connector used, for example, fo r headsets and t he data cable. 3. Microphone
29 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Ess entia l indica tors - The p hone is being used in a GSM network. - You hav e received one or several mes sages to the Inbox folder in Messaging. - There a re messages waiting to be sent in Outbox. See âÂÂM essagingâ on page 94. and - You hav e missed calls. See âÂÂRec ent calls registerâ on page 47. - Shown if Ringing type is set to Silent and Message alert tone , Chat alert tone , and E-mail alert tone ar e set to Off . See âÂÂProfilesâ on page 136. . - The p hone keypad is locked. Se e âÂÂKeypad l ock (Keyguard)â on page 30. . - You hav e an active alarm. See âÂÂClockâ on page 160. - All call s to the phone are diverted to another number. - A memory card is being read or wr itten to. - A headset is connected to the phone. - A loopset is connected to the phone. - The connection to a Bluetooth headset has been lost. - A dat a call is active. - A pac ket data (GPRS) connect ion is active. - Shown when the pac ket data connect ion is on hold. These icons are shown instead of t he signal st rength indicator (shown in the top lef t corner in t he standby mode ). See âÂÂGPRSâ on page 146.
30 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . - Bluetooth is active. - An infrared connection is ac tive. - Data is being transmitted us ing Bluetooth. See âÂÂBluetooth connectionâ on page 181. - US B connection is active . â Key pad lock (K ey guard) Use t he keypad loc k to prev ent the keys from being accidentally pressed. To lock : In standby mode pres s the left s election key and then th e * key. W hen the keys are locked, is sh own on the d isplay. To unlock : Press the left s election key an d then * key . When the keypad lock is on, calls still may be possible to t he official emergency number programmed int o your device. Enter the eme rgency number and press th e cal l key. â Menu Press to display the main menu. In the menu you can acces s all the applications in your phone. Options in the Menu: Open , A pp. downloads , List view / Grid view , Mov e , Mo ve to folder , Ne w folder , Memory details , Help and Exit .
31 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Grid view or List view of the Menu â¢S e l e c t Options â List vie w or Gr id view to change be tween a list or an ordered grid of the available applications. Note : The order of the applic ations can be c hanged by th e user and may therefor e differ fro m the standard or der described in this Us erâÂÂs Guide . Moving in the Menu ⢠Move the joyst ick up, down left and right to navigate in the menu. Opening applications or folders ⢠Scrol l to an applicat ion or a folder and press t he joystick to open it. Closing applications â¢P r e s s Back or Exit as many times a s needed to return t o standby mode or s elect Options â Exit . Displaying and switching between open applications ⢠Press and hold to switch from one open application t o another. The application s witching window opens showing a lis t of applications that are currently open. Scroll to an application and press the joystick to go to it. ⢠Numerous open applications may increase the dema nd on batt ery power and reduce th e battery life. Exit from unused applications. Shortcuts in idle mode ⢠To open Camera , move the joystick up. ⢠To open Co nt ac ts , move the joystick dow n or press t he joystick.
32 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠To open Calendar , move the joystick t o the right or press th e left s election key. ⢠To wr ite an new t ext messa ge, move t he joystick to the left or press the right selection ke y. ⢠To cha nge the pr ofile, press the power key and s elect a pr ofile. ⢠To open the last dialled numbers list, press the call key . ⢠To us e voice co mmands, press and hold the right selection key . ⢠To s tart push to talk, pres s the PTT key. ⢠To s tart a connect ion to Web, p ress and hold the 0 key. â Acti ons co mm on to a ll app lic at io ns ⢠Opening items for v iewing - Scr oll to an item and press the joystick , or select Options â Op en . ⢠Editing items - Open the item for viewing and select Options â Edit . Use th e joystick to scroll through all fields of t he item. ⢠Removing, deleting items - Scroll to t he item a nd select Options â De le te or press the clear key. To delete many items at a t ime, you f irst need to mark them. ⢠Marking an item - There are sev eral ways to se lect items whe n you are in a list. ⢠To s elect one ite m at a time, scroll to the item and s elect Options â Mark / Unmark â Mark or press t he edit k ey and move the joys tick at t he same time. A check mark is placed n ext to the marked item. ⢠To s elect all ite ms in the list, select Options â Mark/U nmark â Mark all .
33 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠To mark multiple items, pr ess and hold t he edit k ey and t hen move the joystick down or up. As the selec tion moves, a check mar k is placed nex t to the items. To end the selection, stop the scrolling with the joystick and then release the edit key. After you have s elected all the items that y ou want, you can move or delete them by selecting Opt ions â Move to folder or Dele te . ⢠Unmarking an item - Scroll to t he item a nd select Options â Ma rk / Unmark âÂÂUnmark or press the edit k ey and the joys tick at t he same time. ⢠Creating f olders - Sele ct Options â New folder . You are asked to give a name to the folder (max. 35 let ters). ⢠Moving items to a folder - Select Options â Move to folder (not shown if there a re no folders available). W hen you selec t M ove to folder , a list of available folders opens and you can als o see the r oot level of the application (for moving an item out of a folder). Select the location that you want the item to be moved to and pr ess OK . ⢠Sending items - Scroll t o the item a nd select Options â Sen d . Select the method, the choices a re Via multimedia , Via bl uetooth , Via e-mail , Via fax and Via infrared . ⢠If y ou choose to s end the item in an e-mail or a multimedia messa ge, an editor ope ns. Press the joys tick to s elect the rec ipient(s) from the Contacts directory or write the phone number or e-mail address of the reci pient in the To - field. Add text or sound and selec t Options â Send . See âÂÂWriting and se nding messagesâ on page 96. ⢠Via Bluetoo th. See âÂÂSending data via Bluetoot h technologyâ on page 182.
34 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Co pyright prot ections may preven t some ima ges, ri ngin g tones , and o ther conte nt from bei ng c opi ed, mo di fie d, tr ans fe rr ed or fo rwa r de d. â Vo l u m e c o n t r o l Voice volume icons : - for earpiece mode, - for loudspeaker mode. When you have an a ctive call or ar e listening to a sound, pre ss the joystic k to the left or t o the right or the volume c ontrol side k eys to incr ease or dec rease the volume lev el, respect ively. The loudspeaker allows you to spe ak and listen to the phone fr om a short distance without hav ing to hold the phone to your ea r, for example, having it on a table nearby. T he loudspeaker c an be used during a ca ll, with sound and video applications, and when view ing multimedia mes sages. Sound and v ideo applicat ions use th e loudspeaker by default. Using the loudspeaker makes it easier to use ot her applications during a call. To s tart using the loudsp eaker during a n already active call, sel ect O ptions â A ctivate loudsp. . A tone is played, is shown in the navigation bar, and t he volume indic ator changes. The louds peaker cannot be activat ed during a call w hen you have connected a heads et to th e pho ne. War ni ng: Do not hold the de vice near your ear wh en the loudspeake r is in use, because th e volume may be extr emely lo ud.
35 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . To tu rn off the loudspeaker when you have an active call, s elect Options â A ctivate handset . â Help Select Menu â Hel p . Help pr ovides usage information for many applications on the phone. Move the joystick t o the left or to the right to toggle between the he lp category list or a list of keywords . Select a category or a keyword by scrolling or use the text input field, to jump to t he desired c ategory or key word. Press the joystick t o display the related helpt ext.
36 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 3. Ca ll funct ion s â Ma king a voic e call 1. In the standby mode, e nter the phone number, including t he area code. To remove a number press the clear key. For international calls, press the * key twice for the charact er (replaces the international ac cess c ode), and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading ze ro if necessa ry), and phone number. 2. Press the call key to call the number. 3. Press the end key to end the call (or to ca ncel the call at tempt). Pressing the end key will a lways end a call, eve n if anot her application is act i v e. Tip: To incr ease or de crease th e volume during a c all, move t he joystick to the lef t or to th e rig ht. Making a call from the Contacts application - Press and select Contacts . Scroll to the desired name; or enter the f irst letters of the name to t he Search field. Matc hing contacts ar e listed. Press the cal l key to call. Calling your voice mailbox (network service) - To call your voice mailbox, press and hold k ey 1 in the st andby mode. Tip: To change the phone number of your voice mailbox, pr ess and sele ct T ools â Voice mailbox and select Options â Change number . E nter the number (obtained f rom your service provider) and press OK .
37 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Calling a recently dialled number - In the s tandby mode, pr ess the ca ll ke y to acces s a list of the 20 last numbers you called or attempted to call. Scroll to the number you wa nt, and pres s the call key to call the number. Speed diallin g a phon e number To as sign a phone numbe r to one of t he speed dialling keys ( 2 - 9 ), press and sel ect Tools â Speed dial . Key 1 is reserved for the voice mailbox . To ca ll: In standby mode, press the r elated key and then the call key or pres s and hold the related ke y. Making a conference call (network ser vice) 1. Make a call to the f irst participant. 2. To mak e a call t o another part icipant, select O ptions â N ew call . T he first call is automat ically put on hold. 3. When the new call is answered, join the first participant in the conference call. Select Options â Conference . ⢠To add a new person t o the call, repeat step 2, and select Options â Conference â Add to conference . The phone supports conference calls between a maximum of six par ticipants, including yourself. ⢠To have a priv ate conversation with one of the par ticipants, select Options â Conference â Pr ivate . Selec t a participant and press Private . The c onference call is put on hold on your phone. The ot her participant s can still cont inue the confe rence call. Once you have f inished the privat e
38 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . conversation, selec t O ptions â A dd t o con f er en ce to retur n to the con f er en ce ca l l. ⢠To drop a participant, select Options â Conference â Drop participant , scroll to t he participant, and press Drop . 4. To end the active conference call, press the end key. â An swer ing or rejec ting a call ⢠To ans wer the c all, press the cal l key. ⢠To mut e the ringing tone when a call comes in, pr ess Silence . Ti p: If a compatible headset is connect ed to the phone, pres s the heads et key to a nswer a nd end a call. ⢠If you do not want to answer a call, press the end key t o reject it. The caller w ill hear a line bus y ton e. If y ou have activ ated the Call divert â If busy function to di vert calls, r ejecting an incoming call w ill also divert the call. Ca ll wa iti ng (net wo rk se rv ic e) You can a nswer a call while you have another call in progress if you have activat ed the Call wait ing function in Settings â Call settings â C all waiting . ⢠To ans wer the wa iting call, press the call key. The fir st call is put on hold. ⢠To s witch between the two calls, press Swap . Select Options â Tr a n s fe r to connect an incoming c all or a call on hold wit h an act ive call a nd to dis connect yourself f rom the ca lls. To end the active call, pre ss the end key. T o end both calls, select Options â End all c alls .
39 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Opt ion s durin g a call Many of t he options that y ou can use during a cal l are network services. Select Options during a call for some of the following options: Mut e or Unmu te , Answer , Reject , Swap , Hold or Unhold , Activate handset , Act ivate loudsp. , or A cti vate handsfree (if a compat ible Bluetooth headset is attached), End act ive call or End all calls , New call , Con f er en ce , and Tr a n sf e r . Select: ⢠Replace - t o end an act ive call and replace it by answering t he wait ing call. ⢠Send DTMF - to send DTMF tone strings , for example , a passwor d. Enter the DTMF string o r searc h for it in Co ntacts . To ente r a wait char acter ( w ) or a pause charact er ( p ), press * repeated ly. Press OK to send th e tone . Tip: You can add DTMF tones to the Phone number or DTM F fields in a contact car d. â Pus h to t al k Select Menu â Push to talk . Push to t alk over cellular is a two-way r adio service (network service) available over a G SM/GPRS cellular network. Pu sh to talk provides dir ect voice communication connec ted with pr essing the P us h to ta l k key. You can us e push to t alk to have a conve rsation with one person or with a group of people having compatible devices. When your call is connected, the person or group you ar e calling doe s not have to ans wer the phone. Besides the GPRS counters, t he phone register s only one-to- one calls in the recent ca lls lists in Log . The part icipants should c onfirm the re ception of any communications where
40 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . appropriate a s there is no other confirmation of w hether the recipient(s) has(have) heard t he call. To che ck availability and costs , and to subs cribe to th e service , contact y our network operator or service provider. Note that roaming services may be more limited than for normal calls. Before y ou can use the push to talk service, you must define t he required push t o talk se rvice settings. While c onnected to the pus h to talk se rvice, you can us e the other f unctions of the phone. The push to talk s ervice is not c onnected to t raditional voice communication, and therefore ma ny of the s ervices av ailable for tr aditional voice calls (for example, voice mailbox) are not available for push to t alk communications. Sett ing s fo r push t o ta lk Select Options â S etting s . For push to talk se rvice settings, c ontact your net work operator or service provider. You may receiv e the set tings over the air. ⢠Notif icat io n tone - A tone for inc oming push to talk cal ls. ⢠Default nickname - Your nickname s hown to other u sers. ⢠Show my PTT addres s - Selec t No if you want to hide your pus h to talk a ddress from the r eceivers of your push to talk group or one-to-one calls. ⢠Domain - The default domain name. ⢠Access point name - The acc ess point name for the push to talk service.
41 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Server address - The push to t alk server a ddress. ⢠User name - Your user name used t o enter the push t o talk service. ⢠PTT password - Your pas swo rd u sed to ente r the push to tal k serv ice . ⢠Realm - The name of t he domain used for group user auth entication. After modifying t he settings, r estart the pus h to talk ap plication. Conne ctin g to the pus h to talk ser vic e Select Me nu â P ush to ta lk . Alternatively, press and hold the Pu sh t o ta lk key for a few sec onds to c onnect to the servi ce. The push to talk application automatic ally attempts to connect to the push to talk service . If the login is successful, the push to talk sessions view opens. indicates the push t o talk connection. If you have added group(s) to the phone, you are automatically joined to the active groups, and t he name of t he default group is dis played in standby mode. indicat es that the service is t emporarily unava ilable. The phone automatically tries to reconnect to the service until you disconnect from the push to talk se rvice. If the login fails, you get an error note such as Unable to switch Pus h to talk on . Select Options â Switch PTT on to try to log in again, Se ttings to open the settings vi ew, or Exit to clos e the err or note. To dis connect from t he push to t alk service , select Options â De acti va te . Options in the sessions view are: Deactivate loudsp. / Ac ti va te l o udsp . , Active members , PTT contact s , PTT log , Settings , Hel p , Deac tiv ate , and Exi t .
42 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Making a push to talk call Select Options â Deactivate loudsp. / Activate loudsp. to us e either louds peaker or earpiece f or push t o talk communicat ion. When the e arpiece is selected, you can use the phone normally to your ear. War ni ng: Do not hold the de vice near your ear wh en the loudspeake r is in use, because th e volume may be extr emely lo ud. To make a push to talk call 1. Select Options â PTT co ntacts and search for a cont act person or a group. To open the Push to talk groups view, press the joystick to the right. 2. Press the Push t o talk key or the ca ll k ey. This starts a pus h to talk call immediately. OR Select Options â Send callback req. . This sends a callback request to the selected push to talk contact or group. A tone sounds indicating that the access is granted, and the phone displays your nickname and group na me. 3. To r equest a sp eech turn, pres s the Push to talk key. The phone sends your request. W ait until your phone receives a speech t urn signal. Wh en the phone displays Talk , you have 30 s econds to talk on your speech turn. Press and hold the Push t o talk key the entire time you ar e talking, and hold the phone in front of you so that you can see t he display . When you have finished, r elease the key. Talk ing is allowed on a firs t-come, firs t-served basis. When someone stops talking, the first pers on to press the Push to talk k ey can talk next .
43 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 4. T o s witc h bet ween sev er al act ive se ssio ns, selec t Swap . 5. To end the active session, select Deact iv. . If you have other act ive sessions , the phone moves to the nex t session. If there a re no other sessions, the phone displays a not e stating that there are no a ctiv e s ess io ns. 6. To exi t the push to talk application, selec t Option s â Exit . Receiv in g a pus h to tal k call A short tone notifies you of an inc oming group or a one-to-one call. Press Accept to receive the call or Sil ence to reject it. When receiving a group call , the gr oup name and the nic kname of the caller a re displaye d. When receiving a one-to-one call f rom a person whose information you have s aved in Contacts , the save d name is displaye d if identif ied; otherwise, only the nickname of the caller is displaye d. Callback requests Select Options â PTT contacts or PTT log . Sending a cal lback req uest If you make a one-t o-one call and do not get a response, you can s end a request for th e person to cal l you back. You can send a ca llback request in different ways: ⢠To s end a callback request from t he contacts lis t in the Push to talk menu, sel ect Options â PTT contacts . Scroll t o a cont act and select Options â Send callback req. .
44 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠To s end a callback request from the Contacts , move the joystick down in standby mode , and scroll t o the desired c ontact. Press Detai ls , scroll to th e push to t alk address and s elect Options â Send callback req. . ⢠To s end a callback request from t he group list in t he Push to talk menu, select Options â PTT contacts and move the joystick to the r ight. Scroll to the desired group and select Options â Send callback req. . ⢠To s end a callback request from the callback request l ist in the P us h to ta l k menu, s elect Options â PTT log . Select Received callbac k reqs. and s elect Options â Op en . Scroll to a co ntact an d select Options â Send callbac k req. . Saving t he call ba ck reque st send er When you receive a callback reques t from someone who is not in y our contact s list, you can save the name to your contacts. 1. To open the request, select Options â PT T log â Received c allback reqs. . 2. Scroll to the a c ontact and select Opt ions â Add to Contacts . Usi ng gr oups Select Options â PTT contacts . When you call a group, all membe rs joined to the group hear the c all simultaneously. Each member in the groups is identified by a user name given by t he service provider. G roup members can choose a nick name for wit hin each group, whic h is shown a s a caller identification.
45 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Groups are registered with a URL addres s. One user registers the group U RL in the network by joining the group session the f irst time. Adding a gr oup 1. Select Options â PTT co ntacts and then move the joystick to the right. This opens the Push to t alk groups view. 2. Select Options â A dd group â Create new . 3. Ent e r a Group name , and press OK . 4. Select a Group privacy leve l. 5. Enter your own nic kname in Nickname in group . 6. To add a thumbnail image to the group, s elect Options â A dd thumbnail . 7. Press Do ne . To add members and to s end an invitati on to the group, pr ess Ye s when t he phone requests for Send group invit ation to all members now? . This opens a view where you ca n select members for the group. The membe rs you invit e to the ope n groups can also invit e more member s to the group. Jo inin g a n ex ist in g gr ou p For gr oup detail informatio n, contact yo ur network operator or service provide r. You may receive the details over the air. 1. Press Me nu â Push to talk â PTT contacts and then move the joys tick to t he right. Th is opens the Push to talk groups view. 2. Select Options â A dd group â Join existing .
46 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 3. Enter the Group address , Group name , and Nickname in group . You can als o add a Gr oup thumbnail . 4. Press Do ne . Receiv in g an in vitat ion When you receive a text message inv itation to a group, you get following information: ⢠Fro m - View the c ontact information of the per son who sent the invitation. ⢠Nickname - View the nickname of the person who sent the invitation. ⢠Group name - View the name of the group if the gr oup is not a s ecured group. ⢠Group address - View the group addr ess if the group is not a secured group. Select Options â Save group to add t he group t o your phone. After the group is save d, the phone asks whether you want to c onnect to t he saved g roup. To rejec t the invit ation, press Back and Ye s .
47 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Call re gist er and ge nera l log Select Menu â Log . In the log, you can monitor phone calls, t ext me ssages, packet data connections, and fax and dat a calls registered by the phone. You can filt er the log to vi ew just one t ype of eve nt and creat e new contact cards based on the log information. Connections to your remote mailbox, multimedia messaging c entre, or br owser pages are shown as dat a calls or p acket data connections in the general communications log. Recent calls regi ster Select Menu â Log â Recent calls . The phone registers the phone numbers of miss ed, received, and dialled ca lls, and the approximate duration of your calls. The phone registers missed and re ceived calls only if the network supports these f unctions, and th e phone is sw itched on and is within the net workâÂÂs s ervice area. Options in the Missed, Receive d, and Dialle d views: Call , Create message , Use number , Del ete , Clear list , A dd to Contacts , Help , and Exit . Miss ed calls and rece ived calls To vie w a list of t he last 20 phone numbers from whic h somebody has tr ied to ca ll you with out success (networ k service) , go to Log â Recent callsâ Missed calls . To vie w a list of t he 20 numbers or name s from whic h you have most recently accept ed calls ( network se rvice), g o to Log â Recent calls â Receiv ed calls .
48 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Dialled numbers To view the 20 phone numbers that you have most re cently called or attempted t o call, go to Log â Recent calls â Dialled nos. . Erasing recent call lists ⢠To cle ar all rec ent call lists, select Options â Clear recent calls in the Recent calls main view. ⢠To c lear one of the c all registers, op en the r egister you want to er ase a nd select Options â Clear list . ⢠To cle ar an individual ev ent, open a register, scroll t o the event, and press the cle ar key . Ca ll du rati on Select Menu â Lo g â Call duration . Allows you t o view the dur ation of your inc oming and outgoing calls. Note : The actual time invoiced for calls by your s ervice prov ider may vary , dependi ng on netwo rk features , roundin g off for billi ng, and so forth. Erasing call duration timers - Selec t Options â Cle ar timers . For this, you need the lock code. See âÂÂSecurityâ on page 149. Viewing the general log Select Menu â Lo g and move the joystick to the r ight.
49 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . In the general log, f or each communicat ion event, you can see t he sender or recipient name, phone number, na me of the s ervice pro vider, or acces s point. Sub-events, such as a t ext messa ge sent in more t han one part and packet dat a connections, are logged as one communication event. Filtering t he log 1. Select Options â Filter . A list of filters opens . 2. Scroll t o a filter and pr ess Select . Erasing the contents of the log ⢠To er ase all the log contents, Recent calls register, and Messaging delivery reports permanently , select Options â Clear log . Confirm by pressing Ye s . Packet data counter and connection timer ⢠To vie w how much dat a, measured in kilobytes, ha s been transfer red and the approximate length of a certain GPRS connect ion, scroll to an Incoming or Outgoing ev ent with the access point icon and s elect Options â View details . Log set tings â¢S e l e c t Options â Settings . The list of settings opens. ⢠Log durat ion - The log events remain in the phone memory for a s et number of days after which they are automatically erased to free memory. ⢠If you select No log , all t he log contents , Recent calls register, and Messaging delive ry reports ar e permanently deleted. ⢠Show call duration . See âÂÂCall durationâ on page 48.
50 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . GPR S data co unte r Select Menu â Lo g â GPRS count er . The GPRS dat a counter a llows you to che ck the amount of data se nt and receiv ed during packet data (GPRS) connections.
51 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 4. Wr iting tex t You can e nter text, for example, when writing message s, using tradit ional or predictiv e text input. â Us ing tra ditio nal t ext inpu t The indicator is shown on the top right of the display when you are writing text us ing traditional t ext input. ⢠Press a number ke y ( 1 - 9 ), repeatedly until the desired charact er appears. Note that t here are more character s available for a number k ey than a re printed on the key. ⢠To ins ert a number, pres s and hold the numbe r key. To switc h between let ter and number mode, press and hold the # key. ⢠If th e next let ter is locate d on the same key as the pre sent one, wait unt il the cursor appear s (or move the joystic k to the right to end the time-out per iod), and then e nter th e le tter . ⢠To insert a space, pres s the ke y 0 . To move the cursor to th e next line, pre ss the key 0 three times . ⢠To s witch between upper and lower case, p ress the # key .
52 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Us ing pre dictiv e text input You can e nter any let ter with a single keypr ess using predic tive text input . To acti vate predictive text input, press the edit key and select Dictionar y on . This activat es predictive text input for all e ditors in the phone. The indicator is shown at the top of the display. 1. Write t he desired wor d by pressi ng the keys 2 - 9 . Pr ess each ke y only once for on e le tt er . T he wo rd c h an ge s a fte r e v er y k ey p re s s. 2. When you have fini shed the word, c heck that it is cor rect. ⢠If the w ord is correct, you c an confirm it by moving the joy stick to the right or by pr essing the key 0 to insert a space. The underlining dis appears and you can begin to w rite a new word. ⢠If the word is not corr ect, you have the following options: â¢P r e s s t h e * key repeate dly to v iew the matching words the dictionary has found o ne by one. â¢P r e s s t h e edit key an d s e le ct Dictionary â Matches to view a list of matching wor ds. Scroll to t he word you want to use a nd press t he joyst ick to select it. â¢I f t h e ? character is shown after the word, the word you intended to write is not in the dictionary. T o add a wor d to the dictionary, pres s Spell , ente r th e word (max. 32 letters) using t raditional text input, and pres s OK . The word is adde d to the dict ionary. When the dictionar y becomes full , a new wor d replaces the oldest added word.
53 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠To r emove the ? and c lear charac ters one by one from the w ord, press the cle ar key. â Tips for wri ting te xt ⢠To cha nge between the different c haracter cas es Abc , abc , and ABC , press t he # key. N ote that if you press t he # key twice quickly the pr edictive text input is turned off. ⢠To ins ert a number in l etter mode, pr ess and hold th e desired number k ey, or press the edit k ey and se lect number mode, enter the number s you want, and press OK . ⢠The mos t common punctuation mar ks are available under t he key 1 . Pr ess key 1 repeatedly to reach the desired punctuation mark. Press the * key to open a list of special characters. Use the joystick to scroll through the lis t and pres s Select to select a charact er, or press th e edit key and sel ect Insert sy mbol . The predic tive text input tries to gues s which c ommonly used punctuation mark ( .,?!â ) is neede d. The order and av ailability of t he punctua tion marks depend on th e language of t he dictionary . When a w ord has been entered with pr edictive text on, you c an press the ed it key, sel ect Dictionary and select: ⢠Matches - To view a list of w ords that cor respond to your key presses. Scroll to the desired word and press the joystick.
54 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Insert wor d - To add a word (max. 32 le tters) to th e dictionary by using traditional t ext input. W hen the dictionary becomes fu ll, a new word replace s the oldest added word. ⢠Edit word - To open a vie w where you c an edit the wor d, availabl e only if the word is active (underlined). ⢠Off - To turn off pre dictive text input for all editors in the p hone Writing compound words ⢠Write the first half of a compound w ord and confirm it by moving the joystick to the right. Write the last part of t he compound word and complete the compound word by pressing the k ey 0 to add a space. â Cop ying t ext to the c lipbo ard To copy text to the clipboard, the following a re the eas iest methods: 1. To s elect letters a nd words, pr ess and hold t he edit key. At the same t ime, move the joystick to left or to t he right. As the selection moves, text is highlighted. To s elect lines of t ext, pres s and hold the edit key. At the s ame time move t he joystick up or down. 2. To end the select ion, release pres sing the joystick while still holding the edi t key. 3. To copy the text to the cl ipboard, while still holding the edit k ey, pre ss Copy . Or, r elease the edit key and then pr ess it once to open a list of editing commands, f or example, Copy or Cut .
55 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . If you want to remov e the select ed text fr om the document, press the cle ar key. 4. To insert the text into a document, press and hold the edit ke y and press Pa s t e . Or, pres s the edit ke y once and select Pa st e .
56 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 5. P erso na l info rm ati on â Cont acts Select Menu â Conta cts . In Contacts, you can store and manage contact information, such as names, phone numbers, and addresses. You can a lso add a pe rsonal ringing tone, voice ta g, or a thumbnail image to a contact card. You can c reate contact groups, which allow you t o send text messages or e-mail to many re cipients at the same time. Contact infor mation can only be sent t o or received from compatibl e devices. Options in the Contact s directory: Op en , Call , Create message , Ne w contact , Open con ver sa tion , Edit , Delete , Duplicate , Mark/U nmark , Copy t o SIM direct. , Send , Contacts info , SIM dir ectory , Settings , Help , an d Ex it . Managing cont acts Options when editing a contact: A dd thumbnail / Remove thumbnail , Add detail , Delete detail , Edit label , Hel p , and Exit . 1. Press the joystick in s tandby mode or go to Menu â Contacts . 2. Select Options â New contact . 3. Fill in the fields you want and press Don e . ⢠To edi t a co nt ac t, open i t and th en select Options â Edit .
57 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠To delete a contact , open it and select Options â De lete . ⢠To at tach a small thumbnail image t o a contact, open the contact card, selec t Options â Edit and then select Options â Add thumbnail . ⢠To as sign default numbers and a ddresses to a contact, open the contact card and se lect Options â Defa ult s . A pop-up window ope ns, listing the dif ferent options. ⢠To copy names and numbers from a SIM card to your phone , s el e ct Options â SIM directory , scroll to the name (s) you want to copy and s elect Options â Copy to Contacts . ⢠To copy a phone, fax, or pager number from Contacts to your SIM card , scroll to t he contact card you want to copy and select Options â Copy to SIM direct. Add i ng a ri ngi ng tone You can set a r inging tone for each contact card and group. When that contact or group member calls y ou, the phone plays the chos en ringing tone (if t he callerâÂÂs telephone number is sent with the call and your phone recognis es it). 1. Press the joystic k to open a cont act card or go to the G roups list and select a contact group. 2. Select Options â R in g in g t o ne . A list of ri nging tones opens. 3. Use the joystick to select the ringing tone you wis h to use f or the contact or group and press Select . ⢠To r emove the r inging tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones.
58 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Voice dialling Select Men u â Contacts . You can ma ke a phone c all by say ing a voic e tag that has been added to a contact card. Any s poken word(s) c an be a voic e tag. Before using voi ce tags, no te that: ⢠V oice tag s are not la ngua ge-depen dent. T hey are depe ndent on the speak er's voice. ⢠Y ou must say the n ame exactly as you said it when you recorded it. ⢠V oice tags a re sensiti ve to backgroun d noise. Record vo ice tags and us e them in a quiet environme nt. ⢠V ery sho rt names are n ot accepted . Use lon g names and avo id similar n ames for differen t num be rs . Note : Usin g voice tag s may be difficult in a noisy en vironmen t or during an emerge ncy, so you shoul d not rely solely u pon voice di alling in al l circumstance s. Adding a vo ice ta g to a phone number Voice tags c an only be added to phone numbe rs stored in the phoneâ s memory. See âÂÂManaging contactsâ on page 56. 1. In the Cont ac ts main view, scroll to the contact tha t you want to add a v oice tag to, and press th e joystick to open the c ontact car d. 2. Scrol l to the number t hat you want to add the v oice tag to, and select Options â A dd voice tag . 3. Press St a r t to rec ord a voic e tag. After t he starting t one, clear ly pronounce the word(s ) you want to recor d as a voice tag.
59 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 4. After r ecording, the phone plays the recor ded tag and t he note Playing voice tag is displayed. 5. When the voice tag has been succe ssfully saved, the note V oice tag saved is displaye d and a beep sounds. A symbol can be seen ne xt to the number in the conta ct card. Makin g a call by s aying a v oic e tag 1. In standby mode, press a nd hold the ri ght selection key. A short tone is played and the n ote Speak now is displayed. 2. To mak e a call by using a vo ice tag, hold the phone at a short dista nce away from your mouth and face and pronounce the voice tag clearly. 3. The phone plays the original voice tag, displays the name and number, and after a few seconds dials the number of the rec ognised voice tag. ⢠If th e phone plays an incorrect voice tag, or you want t o retry voic e dialling, press Retr y . Voice dialling cannot be used when a data call or a GPRS connection is active. Assignin g sp eed-dia lling k eys Speed dialling is a quick way to call f requently used numbers. You can assign speed-dialling k eys to eight phone numbers. T he number 1 is reserv ed for the voice mailbox. 1. Open the contact card for whic h you want a speed-dialling ke y and select Options â A ssign speed dial .
60 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 2. Scroll t o a number and pr ess As sign . When y ou retu rn to the cont act information vie w, you can see the speed-dial icon next to the number. ⢠To ca ll the contact by speed-dialling, go to standby mode and press t he speed- dialling ke y and the cal l key . â Pre sen ce Select Men u â Presence . Options in the Pr esence view: Open , My availability , Viewers , Update prese nce , Login , L ogout , Settings , Hel p , and Exit . Use Pr esence (network service) to inf orm others about your a vailability, that is, when, w here and how you w ant to be c ontacted. Presenc e allows you to view and create a dy namic profile of your cont act details, vis ible to other users of the service , to shar e information or control ser vices. P resence informa tion can include your availab ility, whether you pr efer people to c all or send me ssages, where y ou are and what you are doing. Before you can use Presence, you need to find a se rvice that you want to use and then save the s ettings of tha t service. You ma y receive t he settings in a special text me ssage, called a smart mes sage, from t he service provi der tha t offers the Presence servic e. See âÂÂReceiving smart mes sagesâ on page 101. For more information, c ontact your servic e provider. The Pres ence applicat ion allows you t o change your own published information and manage who is aut horised to see your prese nce. To vie w the pres ence information of others, you mus t use Contacts . See âÂÂContactsâ on page 56.
61 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Changing your avai lability infor matio n Select Options â My availability and select: ⢠A vailable - You are available for people to call or send you mes sages. For example, when you have chosen this option f or your general profile. Se e âÂÂProfilesâ on page 136. ⢠Busy - You may be available f or people to call or send you mes sages, for example, when your phone is in meeting profile. ⢠Not available - You ar e not available for people t o call or send you messages, for ex ample, when your phone is in s ilent profile. Changing who can view your P resence information Select Options â Viewers and select: ⢠Public pr es. - Displays limit ed information, fo r managing ways for people to contact you. This is available to anyone you have not blocked. ⢠My availability - Select A vailable , Busy , or Not available . ⢠Viewers - Op e ns th e Current view ers view of your Public pres. . See âÂÂPublic viewersâ on page 62. ⢠Update pr esence - Updates y our presence infor mation to the pre sence serve r. ⢠Login/ Logout - C onnect to or disconnect from t he presence server. See âÂÂChat and Presence serversâ on page 123. ⢠Settings - Manage the publis hing of your pres ence information.
62 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Private pres . - Displays private information, so you can share more personal information. T his is only available to t hose that y ou have authorised t o view your pr ivate information. You can select the following op tions: ⢠My availability - Select A vailable , Busy , or Not available . ⢠Private me ssage - Write a text me ssage of up to 40 character s to describe your current availability. ⢠My presence logo - Add a logo to your availability inf ormation. Logo files are stored in the Gallery. See âÂÂGaller yâ on page 71. ⢠Viewers - Op e ns th e Private list v iew of your Privat e pres. . See âÂÂPrivate viewersâ on page 63. ⢠Update pr esence - Updates y our presence infor mation on the prese nce serve r. ⢠Login/ Logout - C onnect to or disconnect from t he presence server. See âÂÂChat and Presence serversâ on page 123. ⢠Settings - Manage the publis hing of your pres ence. ⢠Blocked pres . - Displays a s creen containing no personal details. See â Blocked viewersâ on page 64. Public viewer s Select Public pres. and s elect Options â Viewers â Current vi ewers to see the names, phone numbers, or us er IDs of the v iewers whom y ou do not all ow to vie w your pr ivate presen ce messages, but who are currently viewi ng your public presence. You can sc roll to a v iewer, press Options , a nd select:
63 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Add to private list - Allows the v iewer to als o see y our private pr esence. ⢠Block - Prevents the viewer from seeing your presence information. ⢠Add to contacts - Adds t he viewer t o your Contacts direct ory. ⢠Reload lists - Connect to t he presence server to update the viewer lists. This option i s only available whe n you are offline. Priva te viewe rs Select Private pres . and select Opti ons â Viewe rs â Private list to se e the name s, phone numbers, or user IDs of the vie wers who you allow to view y our privat e presence messages. T o prevent a viewe r from seeing your private pr esence messages, scroll to the viewer and press the cl ear key. You can scroll to a vi ewer, press Option s , an d select: ⢠Add new - Adds a new viewer manually or f rom your Contacts direct ory. You can only select a c ontact who has a user ID in t he conta ct card. ⢠Block - Prevents the viewer from seeing your presence information. ⢠Add to contacts - Adds t he viewer t o your Contacts direct ory. ⢠Remove from list - Removes t he viewer from the pr ivate list . The option is available also when there are marked items selected. If the list is empty, the option i s not available. ⢠View details - Shows t he user ID inf ormation of the viewer. ⢠Reload lists - Connect to t he presence server to update the viewer lists. This option i s only available whe n you are offline.
64 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Blocke d viewer s Select Options â Viewers â Blocked pr es. to s ee the viewers you prevented fr om seeing your public and pr ivate pres ence messages . To allow a viewer t o see your presence information, scr oll to a viewer and pr ess the clear key. You can s croll to a viewer , press Options , and select: ⢠Add to private list - Allows the v iewer to als o see y our private pr esence. ⢠Add new - Add a new vie wer manually or from your Contacts direc tory. You can only select a c ontact who has a user ID in t he conta ct card. ⢠Add to contacts - Adds t he viewer t o your Contacts direct ory. ⢠View details - Shows t he user ID inf ormation of the viewer. ⢠Reload lists - Connect to t he presence server to update the viewer lists. This option i s only available whe n you are offline. Updating yo ur Presence informat ion Select Men u â Presence . Once the connection has been esta blished: 1. Enter y our user ID and password and pre ss the joystick t o login. You obtain t he user ID and pas sword from your service provider. 2. Select O ptions â Update presence . The opt ion is available when y ou are logged into the server a nd have changed your presence inf ormation in either the Private pres . or Public pr es. view and not updated it. 3. To log out, select Options â Logout .
65 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Presence set tings Select Options â Settings . See âÂÂChat and Presence serversâ on page 123. ⢠Show presence to - Select : ⢠Private & public - Both public and privat e presence is published. ⢠Private v iewers - Only pr ivate vie wers can see y our presence inf ormation. ⢠Public view ers - Both public a nd private vi ewers see your public presence information. ⢠No on e - Your pres ence information is not published. ⢠New v iewer status - Specif ies what leve l of prese nce new view ers a re allowed to s ee. ⢠Sync. w ith Profiles - Defines whic h Presence att ributes are ch anged when you change y our profile. Selec t: ⢠Off - The presence attributes are not changed, even if you change your profile. ⢠On - B oth My availability and Private message are changed when you change y our profile. ⢠A vailability only - Private mes sage is not changed when you change your profile. ⢠Private msg. only - My availability is not changed whe n you change y our profile.
66 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â P osition ing Select Men u â P ositioning . Positioning (net work service) allows the net work to detect the approximate position of your phone. By enabling or disabling positioning, you choose when your position infor mation is provided t o the network. To enable positioning in your phone, select Settings â P os itioning â On . When you receiv e a P osition request , a me ssage is displayed s howing the service that is making the request. Press Ac cept to allow your position information t o be sent, or pr ess Re je ct to d eny the re qu est . Position request messages are logged in t he Recv . requests list. To vie w them, selec t Menu â Positioning â Recv . requests . T he icon beside each request indicat es whether the reques t is new, rejected, or ac cepted. To see de tails of a r equest, s croll to the request and press the joy stick. To clear the Recv . requests list, s elect Options â Clear list . â Calenda r Select Men u â Calendar . In the Calendar, you can keep track of your ap pointments, meetings, birthdays, anniv ersaries, and other events. You can also set a calendar alarm to remind you of upcoming eve nts. The Calendar f unction uses shared memory. See âÂÂShared memoryâ on page 17.
67 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Creati ng ca lendar e ntries 1. Select Options â New entr y and select: ⢠Meeting - Reminds you of an appoint ment that has a specific da te and time. ⢠Memo - Write a ge neral entry for a day. ⢠Anniversary - Reminds you of birthdays or special dates. Anniversary ent ries are repeated ev ery ye ar. 2. Fill in the fields. Use the joystick to move between fields. ⢠Subject/ Occa sion - Write a description of the event. ⢠Locat ion - The place of a meeting, optional. ⢠Start time , End time , Start date , and End date . ⢠Alarm - Press t he joystick to acti vate the fi elds for Alar m time and Alarm date . ⢠Repeat - Press the joystick to change the entry to be repeated . Shown with in the Day view. ⢠Repeat until - Set an ending date for the repea ted entry, for example, th e last dat e of a week ly course you ar e taking. This option is show n only if you have selected to repeat the event. ⢠Synchronisation - Private - After synchronisation the calendar entry can be seen only by you a nd it will not be shown to ot hers even if th ey have online acces s to view the calendar. Public - The calendar entry is s hown to others
68 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . who have access t o view your c alendar online. No ne - T he calendar entry will not be copied w hen you synchronise y our calendar. 3. To save the entry, press Do ne . To edit or delete a r epeated ent ry, choose how you w ant the changes to take ef fe ct: All occurr ences - all repeated e ntries are changed T his entry only - only the current ent ry is c hanged. Calend ar views Options in the different calendar views: Open , New e ntry , W eek view / Month view , Delete , G o to date , Send , Settings , Help , and Exit . Press the # k ey in the Month, Week, or Day views to a utomatically highlight todayâÂÂs date. To writ e a calendar entry, press any number key ( 1 - 0 ) in any calendar view. A Meeting entry is opened and t he characters you keyed in are added t o the Subject field. ⢠To go to a cert ain date, select Options â Go to da te . Write the dat e and press OK . ⢠Icons in Day and Week views: - Memo and - Anniv ersary . ⢠Synchronisation icons in Month view: - Private , - P ublic , - None , and - the day ha s more than one ent ry .
69 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â To-do Select Men u â To -d o . In To- do, you can keep a list of t asks that you need to do. The To- do list uses shared memory. Se e âÂÂShared memoryâ on page 17. 1. To s tart to writ e a to-do not e, press any number key ( 1 - 0 ). T he editor opens and t he cursor blinks after the letters you have keyed in. 2. Write the tas k in the Subject field. Press the * key to a dd special c haracters. ⢠To s et the due date for the task , scroll to t he Due date field and enter a date. ⢠To s et a priority f or the to-do note, scroll to the Priority field and pres s the joyst ick. 3. To s ave the to-do note, pres s Done . If you remove all characters and press Done , the note is deleted, even if you edit a previously saved note. ⢠To open a to-do note , s croll to it and press the joystick. ⢠To delete a to-do note , s croll to it and select Options â Del ete or press t he cle ar key. ⢠To mark a to-do note as completed , s croll to it and select Options â Mar k as done . ⢠To restore a to-do note , select Options â Mark as not done.
70 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Impo rting d ata from co mpatible phone s You can mov e calendar, co ntacts, and to-do data f rom compatible Nokia phones to your phone using the N okia PC Suite Cont ent Copier applicat ion on a compatible PC.
71 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 6. Me dia â Galle ry Select Menu â Gallery . Use t he Gallery to s tore and organis e your images, sound clips, playlists , video clips, s treaming links and RAM files. The Galler y uses sha red memory. See âÂÂShar ed memoryâ on page 17. Open the Gallery to se e a list of the folders in the phone memory. Move t he joystick to the right to see the folders on the memory card, if you use one. Select a folder Images , Sound clips , or Video clips (or other folder that you have created) and press the joystick t o open it. In the open folder you can see: ⢠an icon depicting t he type of each file in t he folder, or in the cas e of an image, a sma ll thumbnail pictur e which is a pr eview of t he image ⢠the name of the file ⢠the date and time a file wa s saved or t he size of the file ⢠subfolder s, if pr esent. Options: Open (folder or item), Gallery downloads , Send , Delete , Create new , Move to folder , New fol d er , Mark/Unmark , Rename , Image uploader , Rece ive via infrared , View details , Add to 'Go to' , Settings , Help , and Exit .
72 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . You can browse, open, and creat e folders, as well as mark, co py and move items to folders. See âÂÂActions common to all applicationsâ on page 32. Co pyright prot ections may preven t some ima ges, ri ngin g tones , and o ther conte nt from bei ng c opi ed, mo di fie d, tr ans fe rr ed or fo rwa r de d. Opening f iles Select any file and press the joystick to open it. Each file opens in it s corresponding application as follows: ⢠Ima ges - open in t he Image viewe r. See âÂÂViewing imagesâ on page 78. ⢠Sound clips - open and play in the RealPlayer application. See âÂÂRealPlayerâ¢â on page 88. ⢠Video clips , RAM files, and s treaming links - Open and play in t he RealPlayer applicat ion. See âÂÂRe alPlayerâ¢â on page 88. ⢠Subfolders - open to dis play contents. Oth er defau lt fol der s Pictur e mes sages folder Use t his folder to store pictures sent to you in pict ure message s. ⢠Sel ect the folder Images â Picture msgs. . Options in the Pic ture messages folder: Open , Send , Delete , Mark/Unmark , Rename , View detail s , Help , and Exit .
73 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . To s ave a pictu re that you ha ve rece ived in a pic ture mess age, go to Messaging â Inbox , open the message, and select Options â Save picture . Wa ll pa p er s fol d e r Use t his folder to store pictures that you want to use as background images for multimedia messages. ⢠Sel ect the folder Images â Wallpapers . Presen ce logos fol der Use this folder to store logos for Presence. See âÂÂPresenceâ on page 60. ⢠Sel ect the folder Images â Presence logos . D own lo ad i ng f i les Select Options â Gallery do wnloads . Choose from Graphic downloads , Video do wnloads , o r T one downloads . T he browser opens and you ca n choose a bookmark for t he site t o download from. See âÂÂViewing bookmarksâ on page 173. To downloa d files, you must first configur e your default a ccess point. See âÂÂAcces s pointsâ on page 143. For more information on downloadi ng, See âÂÂDownloadingâ on page 176. . Once items have be en downloaded, t he browser clos es and the phone returns to Gallery view.
74 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Uploading images t o an ima ge server Select Options â Image uploader . You can s end your pict ures to an image server to a llow others to s hare your pictures online (n etwork service). Before y ou can upload image s, you must enter the settings for the ima ge server. You can ge t these set tings from your s ervice provider . Setting up the image server 1. Select Settings â Image servers and press the lef t selection ke y. Fill in the details for each field. S ee âÂÂAcce ss pointsâ on page 143. 2. Press the right se lection key . Uploading images 1. To begin an upload, mar k the images and select Upload . 2. Enter t he name of t he folder on the image s erver that t he images are stored in and pr ess the left selection key. â Camera Select Menu â Ca mera . You can t ake photos a nd record vid eo clips with th e phoneâÂÂs built- in Camera applicat ion. The ima ges are aut omatically saved in the Gallery applicat ion, where you c an rename and or ganise them in folder s. See âÂÂGalleryâ on page 71. The phone memory or memory card is used t o store the ima ge or vid eo, depending on the Memory in use setti ng. See âÂÂCamera sett ingsâ on page 76.
75 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . You can a lso send images in a multimedia message, as an e-mail atta chment, or via Bluetoot h technology or infrared connect ion. The came ra produces images in JPEG and video clips in 3GP file format. Taki ng a picture or record ing a video clip Options availabl e before taki ng a pictur e / a video clip: Capture / Record , New , Activate night mode , Sel f-timer / Mute , Go to Ga ller y , Settings , Help , an d Exi t . 1. Move t he joystick t o left to s elect the still image mode or to the right to activat e the vide o mode . 2. Move t he joystick up to zoom i n on your subject before or while taking the picture or recording a v ideo clip. Move the joystic k down to zoom out. The zoom indicator on the dis play shows the zoom level. 3. To t ake a pict ure, p ress the joys tick ( Capture ). When you are taking a picture, do not move the p hone before the Camer a application star ts to save t he image. The camera s hows the image and sav es it automatically in Galler y. To return to the v iewfinder, press Ba ck . To take a nother picture, pr ess the joys tick ( Capture ) aga in . 4. To s tart recording a video clip, make sur e you have f irst selected the video mode. T hen press th e joystick ( Reco rd ) quickly to start recording. To pause recording at any t ime, press Pa us e . To resume recording, press Continue . When recording, you can see t he recording counter, whic h shows the rec orded time. 5. To s top recording, pres s Stop .
76 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . The c amera goes int o battery sa ving mode if the re has been no key pr esses within a minut e. To continue t aking pictures, pr ess the joystick. You can insert an image into a contact card. See âÂÂManaging contact sâ on page 56. Night mode If the lighting is dim and t he camera need s a longer exposure time f or the pic ture to be of good quality use the option A ctivate night mode . No te that, in dim conditions, a ny movement while taking a pic ture may ca use it to be blurred. Self ti mer To tr igger the camera in image mode automatically after a cer tain time selec t Options â Self-timer and select a trigger time of 10, 20 or 30 seconds. To start the Self-timer press Activ ate . A beep is played once in a second and during the last t hree seconds bef ore trigger twi ce a second. Camer a setti ngs Select Options â S etting s . In the Ca mera application settings, y ou can adjust t he Image a n d Video settings. Image settings ⢠Show captured image : Select No to be able to make pict ures with a short repetition r ate. The ca ptured image is not displayed. ⢠Image quality - High , N ormal , and Basic . The better the image quality , the more memor y the ima ge consumes.
77 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Default image name - By default, the came ra names images in the format âÂÂImage.jpgâÂÂ. Default image name allow s you to se t a name for the images stor ed. ⢠Memory in use - Select whether you want to stor e your images in the phone memory or on t he memory car d, if you us e one. Video set tings ⢠Leng th - With Maximum t he length of the record ed video is only restricted by the available memory. With Short the r ecording time is opt imized for MMS- sending. ⢠Video resolution - Select be tween two v ideo resolutions: - 128x96 for s tandard resolution - 176x144 for high resolution ⢠Default video name - By default, th e camera names video clips in the format âÂÂVideo.3gpâÂÂ. Default video name allows y ou to set a name for the video clips stor ed. ⢠Memory in use - Select whether y ou want to stor e your video c lips in the phone memory or on t he memory car d, if you us e one.
78 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Viewing i mages Select Menu â Gallery . Pictures taken with the Camera application are stored as images in the Gallery. See âÂÂGalleryâ on page 71. Images can be sent to you in a multimedia or picture message, a s an e- mail attachment, or via a Bluetooth connection. After r eceiving an image in the Inbox, you need t o save it in the phone memory or on a memory card. You can s ave graphics sent to you in picture message s to the Picture messages folder. See âÂÂPicture messages folderâ on page 72. Options when viewing a n image: Send , Set as wallpaper , R ota te , Zoom in , Zoom out , Full screen , Dele te , Rename , View details , Add to 'Go to' , He lp , and Exit . Select an image from t he list of images in the Images folder in the Ga llery to start the image viewer and display th e image. When viewing an image, moving the joystick to right or t o the left takes you to the next or previous image in the current folder. In the images thumbnail view: 1. Move t he joystick r ight or left to move bet ween the phone and memory ca rd. 2. To brows e the list of images, move the joyst ick up and down. 3. Press the joystic k to open an image. When t he image is open, you can see the name of t he image. You can v iew animate d GIF files in t he same w ay as other images .
79 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Zooming on a saved i mage 1. Select Options â Zoom in or Zoom out . You can s ee the zooming r atio at the top of the display. See âÂÂShortcut s during zoomingâ on page 79. 2. Press Ba c k to r eturn to the initial view. T he zooming ratio is not stored permanently. When you select Options â Full screen , the panes around th e image are removed so that you can s ee more of the image. Press the right selection key to return to the initial view. When you are zooming in on an image, us e the joy stick to move the focus to the left, right , up, or down, so that y ou can take a closer look at one part of the image, for ex ample, its upper right corner . Shortcu ts d uri ng z ooming â¢P r e s s k e y 1 to rot ate by 90ð anticlockwise, press key 3 to ro tate by 90ð clockw ise. The rotation status is n ot stored permanently. â¢P r e s s k e y 5 to zoom in and key 0 to zoom out, press and hold key 0 to retur n to normal view. â¢P r e s s t h e * key to c hange betwee n full screen and normal view. â Visual Radio You can use t he Visual Radio TM application as a traditional FM radio with automatic tuning and pr eset channels , or with pa rallel visual information r elated to the radio program on t he display, if you tune in to st ations that offer Visual Radio service. T he Visual Radio ser vice uses GPRS
80 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . (network service). You can lis ten to the FM r adio while using ot her device applications. To use t he Visual Radio s ervice, the following conditions are required: ⢠The s tation you listen to and the network operator you use must support this servi ce. ⢠The dev ice must be s witched on. ⢠The dev ice must have a valid SIM ca rd fitted. ⢠Your Inter net access point must be def ined for ac cess to the operatorâÂÂs vis ual radio server. ⢠The pres et radio channe l must have the c orrect Visual Radio service ID def ined and have Visual Radio se rvice enabled. See â Visual Radio settings â on page 86. for details . If you do not have acces s to the Visual Radio service, t he opera tors and radio stations in y our area may not support Visual Radio. The Visual Radio service may not be avail able in all areas and c ountries. Note : The radio uses th e wire of the hea dset as an ante nna. A compat ible head set needs to be attached to the devi ce for the ra dio to funct ion prop erly. You can li sten to FM radio on your phone by the built- in loudspeaker or a compatible heads et. When us ing the loudspeaker, keep the headset plugged into the phone. The lead of the heads et functions as t he antenna of the radio, s o let it hang freely. War ni ng: L isten to music at a moder ate level. Conti nuous expo sure to high volume may damage your h earing.
81 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . You can normally make a c all or answer an incoming c all while listening to the radio. The radio is turned off when there is an active call. When the call is finished, you may need to tur n the radio ba ck o n manually. Note, t hat the qualit y of the radio broadcast depends on the r adio stationâÂÂs coverage in that particular area. Tur nin g on th e ra dio Select Menu â Vis. Radio . The phone displays: ⢠Channel location number a nd the name of the radio channe l. ⢠Frequency of the last used radio channel. ⢠Six gr aphic buttons: - and . Select to s croll to the next or previous saved channel. The buttons are inactive if there are no s aved channels. - and . Select to s tart automatic tuning upwards or downwards. - Starts Visual Radio content feed if the Vis ual Service ID is defined or asks f or Visual Radio ID if the Visual Service ID is not defined. See â Access to Channel Directory through Visual Radio buttonâ on page 87. If you have previousl y saved ra dio channels, scroll t o the ch annel you want t o listen t o, or selec t the memory loca tion of a channe l by pressing the corresponding k ey 1 to 9 . When using a compatible headset, press the headset key t o scroll to t he desired save d radio channel.
82 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Adjust the volume by pus hing the joyst ick to the right or to t he left. To turn the radio off, pr ess Exit . Tunin g and sa ving a radio c hanne l To s tart the cha nnel search when the radio is on, select or . Searching stops w hen a channel is found. To s ave the channel, select Options â Save channel . Select a location for the channel with the joystick and press Select . Enter the name of the c hannel and press OK . Usi ng the r adi o When the r adio is on, select Options and se lect from the following options: ⢠Start visual service - Launch v iewing of visual c ontent. See âÂÂVie w Visual Contentâ on page 85. . ⢠Save channel - Save the radio channel you have found. See âÂÂTuning and saving a radio cha nnelâ on page 82. Up to 20 radio channels can be saved. ⢠Channels - Open th e channel list. See âÂÂUsing the c hannel listâ on page 83. ⢠Manual tuning - Set the cha nnel fr equency manually. To move th e channel sea rch 0.05 MHz upwards or downwards, press briefly the joystick up or down.
83 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . To sear ch quickly upw ards or downwards for a channel press and hold the joystick up or down. If you know the frequency of the radio channel you would like t o listen to (between 87.5 MH z and 108.0 MHz), enter it and press OK . ⢠Activate loudsp. - Listen to t he radio using the int egrated handsfree (IHF). The integrated hands free allows you to speak and listen to radio or audio files without having to hold the phone to the ear. When the integrat ed handsfree is activa ted, the h eadse t is mute d. ⢠De ac tiv ate l o udsp . - Listen to t he radio using th e headset. ⢠Settings - to control Visual Radio settings. See â Visual Radio settings â on page 86. . ⢠Help - Open the c ontext-sensitive help. ⢠Exi t - Turn off the radio. Using the ch annel list When the radio is on, select Options â Channels . The c hannel list is used f or managing the saved radio channels. The list c ontains 20 channels . When you open the lis t, the currently active cha nnel is highlighted if it i s saved. Otherwis e, the first saved channel is highlighted. Select Options and select fr om the following options: ⢠Channel â Liste n - L ist en to th e sele cte d chan nel .
84 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Channel â Edit - Views the s ettings of the highlight ed channel. See âÂÂChannel setupâ on page 84. ⢠Channel â Move - Moves a channe l to another posit ion within the channel list: Highli ght the channel t o be moved, press Mov e and then highlight t he position where the selected channel is to be moved. Press OK to move the channel. ⢠Channel â Delete - Delete the hig hlighted channel from the channel lis t. ⢠Channel directory - Act ivates C hannel dir ectory (n etwork ser vice) to seek available Visual Radio Stations f rom network and save them for later use. See âÂÂChannel Directoryâ on page 86. . ⢠Activate loudsp. - Listen to t he radio using the int egrated handsfree (IHF). ⢠De ac tiv ate l o udsp . - Listen to t he radio using th e headset. ⢠Help - Open the c ontext-sensitive help. ⢠Exi t - Turn off the radio. Channel set up Highlight a channel in the c hannel list, s elect Options â Edit to change following channel paramet ers: ⢠Name - Select Options â Change to ed it the name of the chan nel . ⢠Locat ion - Select Options â Change to edit the loc ation of the r adio station. ⢠Frequency - Sel ect Options â Change to edit the frequency of the channel. ⢠Visual s ervice ID - Select Options â Change to edit the Visual Servi ce ID.
85 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Enable vis ual service - Select O ptions â Change to allow ( Yes ) or prevent ( No ) the viewing of visua l content of the current radio channel. Press Bac k to return t o the ch anne l list. View Visual Content Visual Content can be vie wed if the relating channel is s aved in t he channel list and Visual Service is enabled for this channel. See âÂÂUsing the channel listâ on page 83. . To che ck availability and costs , and to subs cribe to th e service , contact y our network operator or service provider. To view Visual Cont ent of the current channel select the Visual Radio but ton or select O ptions â St art visual service . If the Visual Service ID was not saved in the c hannel list, you are asked fo r the Visual Se rvice ID. E nter the Visual Se rvice ID a nd press OK . If you do not have the Vis ual Service ID, pr ess Retrieve to ac ces s the Chan nel Directory (network servic e). See âÂÂChannel Directoryâ on page 86. . When the connection t o the Visual Ser vice is es tablished, the display shows the current Vis ual Content and t he GPRS signal icon . T he Visual Cont ent can consist of images, text , buttons and entry fields and is designed by the content provider. To nav igate through the displayed content, pus h the joyst ick up or down. The focus wi ll jump from it em to item.
86 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . If no valid Visual Content is available from the service the radio station logo or the Visual Radio background is dis played. Options in the Visual Content view: Activate loudsp. , Deactivate loudsp. , Display settings , Help , and Exit . To terminate the Visual Content fee d but not the FM r adio press Close . To terminate bot h select Options â Exit . To s et the mode of lights and the screensaver timeout select Options â Display settings . Visu al Radi o sett in gs When the r adio is on, selec t Options â Settings to c ontrol following Visual Radio settings: ⢠Auto-sta rt se rvice - Select Options â Change to enable ( Ye s ) or disable ( No ) the automatic start of Visual content. ⢠Access point - Select Options â C hange to edit the acces s point address. Channel Dir ecto ry With the Channel Directory (networ k service) you can select Visual Radio enabled or tradit ional radio stations fr om a list, grouped in several folder s. A folder may represent geographical locations, for example continents, countries, regions or cities a nd can contain ot her folders or da ta of radio stat ions. To che ck availability and costs , and to subs cribe to th e service , contact y our network operator or service provider.
87 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . To ac cess the Channel Directory select th e button and pre ss the joystic k or sel ect Options in the channe l list (see Using the channe l list, 83 ) and select Channel directory . Access to Channel Direc tory th roug h Visual Rad io butt on To fe tch the V is ual se rvi ce ID an d t o sta rt V is ual con ten t fo r t he c urre n tly tune d in radio st ation, select t he but ton and p ress the joys tick. After the connection to the Channel Direct ory you ar e requested to select t he nearest locat ion to your current pos ition from a lis t of folders marked by . Highlight t he desired location and pr ess the joy stick. The device compares the frequencies of the listed radio stations with the currently tuned in frequency. If a matching frequency is found, the Vis ual Service ID of the tuned radio station is dis played. Press OK to st art vie win g the Visua l cont e nt. See âÂÂView Visual C ontentâ on page 85. . If there a re more t han one radi o stations with matching frequencies, t he relating radio stations and their Visual Service ID are displayed in a list. Highlight th e desired radio sta tion in the list and press Select . The tuned radio station and the Visual Ser vice ID are dis played. Pres s OK to s ta rt vi e win g th e Visual content. See â View Visual Contentâ on page 85. . Access to Channel Direc tor y throug h opt ions Li st To ac cess the Channel Directory (network service) select Options in t he channel list (see Using the channel lis t, 83 ) and select Channel directory . After the connection to the Channel Direct ory you ar e requested t o select t he nearest loca tion to your cur rent position from a li st of folder s marked by .
88 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Highlight the de sired location and press the joystick. Repeat this process until you reach t he list of r adio stations near t o your current pos ition. Note : Radio st ations, which provi de Visu al co ntent ar e mark ed with , t rad itional radio stations are m arked with . Highlight t he desired radio s tation by pushing t he joystick up or down a nd press the joystick to open t he selection menu for radio s tations: â¢S e l e c t List en to tune t o the highlighted radio station. To confir m the frequency setting pres s Yes or t he joystick. Press No to go back to prev iously tuned fre quency. The l ist of radio sta tions is displayed a gain and you may select an ot her radio st ation. â¢S e l e c t Start visual ser vice to open the Vis ual Content of the selected r adio station (if available). See âÂÂView Visual Contentâ on page 85. â¢S e l e c t Save t o save the de tails of the s elected radio stat ion to the c hannel list. â Re alPlay er⢠Select Menu â RealPlayer . With RealPlay erâ¢, you ca n play local me dia files stored in the phone memory, or memor y car d, or stre am media files over the air from a streaming link. The s treaming link can be activat ed during a browsing session or store d in the phone memory or memory car d. Media files are vide o, music or audio clips. File s with the extensions .3gp, .aac, .amr, .mp3, .mp4, .rm and .ram are supported by RealPlaye r.
89 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . RealPlayer does not nec essarily support all file format s or all th e variations of a file f ormats. For e xample, RealPlayer attempts to ope n all .mp4 f iles. However, some . mp4 files may include content that is not compliant with 3GPP sta ndards and, t herefore, is not supported by this phone. In t his case, t he operation might fail and r esult in partia l playback or in an error message. RealPlayer uses shared memory. See âÂÂShared memoryâ on page 17. Options in RealPlayer when a clip has been selected: Play , Continue , Sto p , Mute , Unmu te , Clip details , Send , Settings , Help , and Exit . Playing me di a fi le s To play a media file s tored in your phone âÂÂs memory or memory car d, scroll to t he file and pr ess the joystick t o play it, or go to RealPla yer and selec t Option s â Open and : ⢠Saved clip - To play a file sav ed in the Galle ry. See âÂÂGalleryâ on page 71. ⢠Mem. card sound c lips - To play s ound clips stored on the memory card. To s tream content over the air: ⢠Select a streaming link saved in th e Gallery. Bef ore your live cont ent begins streaming, your phone connec ts to the s ite and loads the f ile. ⢠Open the link to a file in the browser. To stream live conte nt, you must firs t configure your def ault access point . See âÂÂAccess pointsâ on page 143.
90 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Many service pr oviders require y ou to use an Inter net Access Point (IAP) for your default a ccess point. Other service providers allow y ou to use a WAP acc ess point. Contact y our service provider for more infor mation. Note : In RealPlaye r, you c an only o pen a n rtsp:// UR L add ress. You ca nnot ope n an http:// U RL addres s; however, R ealPl ayer recognis es an http link to a .ram file since a .ram file i s a text file contain ing an rtsp link. War ni ng: Do not hold the de vice near your ear wh en the loudspeake r is in use, because th e volume may be extr emely lo ud. Short cuts dur i ng play When a media file is playing use the joystick to seek (mov e quickly th rough the media file), and to mut e the sound, as follows: Move the joys tick up to seek fo rwards, or down t o seek backward s through the media file. Move the joys tick l eft, until the indicat or is displayed t o mute the sound. Move the joys tick right unt il you see the indicator to tur n on the sound. Ch angin g the setti ngs Select Options â S etting s â Video or Connection . Move the joys tick to t he right or t o the l eft to move betwee n the diffe rent setting tabs for Video and Connection . Select Video to change the following list of s ettings: ⢠Contrast - Ope n the slid er vie w to ch ang e the con tra st .
91 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Repeat - Choose On to have the curr ently playing video or audio file restart automatically once it has finished. Select Connection to ch ange the connection se ttings. â Movi e Dir ec tor "muvee s" are short, edited vide o clips that can contain video, music and text. An Quick muvee is cr eated automatically by the Movie directo r after you have selecte d the s tyle for the muvee. Movie director uses the defaul t music and text as sociated with the chos en style. Ev ery styl e has, for example, it s own font style, colour , music, and pace. With Custom muvee you can select your own video and music clips, image s and style, and you can also add an opening and closing message. muvees can be sent using M MS. Select Me nu â Movie and move the joystick to the right or t o the left to move between the director and muvee-clip views. To return to the main view from th e muve e-clip view, press Done . The muvee-clip view cont ains a list of muvee video c lips that you can Play , Send , Rename , and Dele te . Tip : To download new styles to y our phone, s elect Style downloads from the Movie direct or main view. ⢠To cr eate a quick muvee , select Quick muv ee , and pr ess the joy stick. Select a style f or the muv ee from th e style lis t, and press th e joystick . The creat ed muvee will be saved in the Movie director muv ee list. The muvee will be played automatically after sav ing.
92 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠To cr eate a cus tom muvee, select Custom muvee . W ith Video , Image , Style , or Music , choose the clips you want t o include in your muvee. Wit h Message you can add an opening t ext and a closing text to a muvee. Select Create muvee and se lect the lengt h of the muv ee: ⢠Multimedia message - the length of the muvee is optimised for MMS sending. ⢠Same as music - to set the muvee duration to be the s ame as the music clip cho se n. Options in the muv ee list options me nu: Play , Send , Rename , Dele te , Hel p and Exi t . ⢠User defined - to defi ne the length of t he muvee. Press OK to st art the muv ee cre atio n. ⢠To pr eview the cus tom muvee before saving it , in Preview muvee view, select Options â Play . ⢠To cr eate a new custom muvee by using the same style se ttings, select Options â Re create . ⢠To add an opening t ext and a closing text to a custom muvee when you are cr eat i ng it , i n Create muvee view se lect Message . Enter the opening message and t he closing message , and select Don e .
93 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Sett ings Select Settin gs to edit the following options: ⢠Memory in use - Select where to store your muve es. ⢠Resolution - Select the resolution of your muve es. ⢠Default muvee name - Set a de fault name for the muvees.
94 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 7. Messaging Select Menu â Messaging . In Messa ging you can creat e, send, receiv e, view, edit, a nd organise text messages, multimedia messages, e-mail messages, presentat ions, documents, smart messages, and special text messages containing data. You can also receive messages and data via an infrared or Bluetooth technology connection, receive service messages, c ell broadcast mes sages, and send service c ommands. Note that only devices that offer picture message fea tures can receive and display picture messages . Text mes sages and multime dia messages use s hared memory. See âÂÂShared memoryâ on page 17. Your d evice support s the sending of t ext mess ages beyond the norma l 160-cha racter limit . If yo ur m ess age ex ceed s 1 60 c har acte rs, it w ill be s en t as a se ries of t wo o r m ore me ssage s. Note that each me ssage will b e invoiced se parate ly according to your service providerâ s rates. In the navigat ion bar, you can see the me ssage leng th indicato r counting backw ards from 160. For e xample, 10 ( 2) means that you ca n still add 1 0 characters for the text to be sent as two message s. No te that u sin g sp ecia l (U nico de) c har acte rs such as ë , â, á, ì tak e up mor e sp ace . If there a re speci al characters in your mes sage, the indicato r may not sho w the message length correct ly. Befo re the mes sage is sen t, the device te lls you if the me ssage exce eds the
95 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . max imum leng th allow ed for one message . You ca n cance l sending by p ressing Cancel or you can save the mes sage in th e inbox. Options in the Mes saging main view ar e: Create message , Connect (shown if you hav e defined set tings for the mailbox ), or Dis conn ect (s hown if t here is an active c onnection to the mailbox), SIM messages , Cell broadcast , Service command , Settings , Help , an d Ex i t . When you open Messaging, you can see the New message function and a list of default folders : Inbox - Contains receiv ed messages e xcept e-mail and cell broadcast messages. E-mail messages are stored in the Mailbox . You can read ce ll broadcast messages by selecting Options â Cell broadcast . My f old ers - For or ganising your me ssages into folders. Mailbox - When you open t his folder, you can e ither connect t o your remote mailbox t o retrieve y our new e-mail me ssages or view your pr eviously retr ieved e- mail mes sages offline. Aft er you have def ined settings for a new ma ilbox, the name give n to that mailbox replaces Mailbox in the ma in view. See âÂÂE -mail messagesâ on page 111. Dra fts - Stores dr aft messages that have not be en sent. Sent - Stores the last 20 messages that have been s ent. You can change the number of messages to be sa ved. See â Settings for the Other folderâ on page 114. Messages or data that have been sent via an infrared or Bluet ooth technology connection ar e not saved in the Dr aft or Sent folders. Out box - Is a temporary storage place f or messag es waiting to be s ent.
96 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Reports ( network service) - You c an request the network t o send you a delivery report of t he text mes sages, smart messages, a nd multimedia mes sages you have sent. To t urn on deliver y report r eception, selec t Options â Settings â Text message or Multimedia message , scroll to Receive report , and select Ye s . Receiving a delivery repor t of a multimedia message that has been sent to an e- mail addres s might not be possible. â Wri ting a nd se nd ing me ssag es Select Menu â Messaging . Options in the t ext message editor: Send , A dd r ecipient , Insert , Del ete , Chec k contacts , Message details , Sending options , Hel p , and Exit . Before y ou can creat e a multimedi a message, or wr ite an e-mail, or connec t to your remote mailbox, you must have t he correct connection settings in place. See âÂÂSettings for e- mailâ on page 98. See â Settings for mult imediaâ on page 98. 1. Select New message . A list of mess age options opens. Selec t: ⢠Create: â Text message to cr eate a text message. To send a picture message, select O ptions â Insert â Picture . Each pic ture message is made up of several text messages. Therefore, sending one picture message may cost more than sending one text message. ⢠Create: â Multimedia message to se nd a multimedia message (MMS).
97 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Copyright protect ion may prevent some images, ringing t ones, and ot her content from being copied, modified, transferr ed or forwarded. ⢠Create: â E-mail to send e-mail. If you hav e not set up your e-mail account, you are pr ompted to do so. To add a media object to an e-mail, select O ptions â In se r t â Image , Sound clip , Video clip , Note or Template . 2. Press the joystick to select the recipient(s) from the Contacts directory or write the phone number or e -mail address of the recipient in the To: field if you are sending an MMS or e-mail to t he recipient. Press the # k ey to a dd a semicolon ( ; ) to separate eac h recipient. 3. Move t he joystick do wn to move to the message fie ld. 4. Write the m ess age . ⢠To add a media object to a multimedia message, select Options â Insert object â Image , Sound clip or Vide o clip . To add a new media object , select Options â Ins ert new â Image , Sound clip , Video clip or Sl ide . Select t he item you wish to add. When sound has been added, th e icon is shown in the navigation bar. If you select I nsert new â Sound clip , Recor der opens and you can record a new sound. The sound is aut omatically saved and a copy is inserted in t he message. 5. To send the m ess ag e, se lec t Options â Send or press the call key.
98 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Note : Pic ture m essage f unction c an be u sed o nly if it i s suppo rted by your ne twork opera tor o r ser vice p rovi der. O nly de vices that offer pict ure me ssag e fea ture s can receive a nd displa y pictur e messages . Only devices that off er compatib le mult imedia mess age or e-mail feature s can receive a nd displa y multimedi a message s. Settings for multimedia Select Options â S etting s â Multimedia message . Open Access point in use and sele ct the access point you created. See âÂÂMultimedia messagesâ on page 109. You may rec eive the settings as a smart message from your net work opera tor or service provider. Se e âÂÂReceiving smart mes sagesâ on page 101. For availa bility of and s ubscription to da ta services, cont act your networ k opera tor or service provider. The defaul t setting of the multi media mess age serv ice is gen erally on. The appearance o f a multim edia messag e may vary depend ing on the receiving d evice. Sett ing s fo r e- mail Before y ou can send, r eceive, ret rieve, re ply to, an d forward e-mail to a separate e-mail a ccount, you must: ⢠Configure an Internet Access Point (IAP) correctly. See âÂÂConnection se ttingsâ on page 143. ⢠Define your e-mai l settings corre ctly. See âÂÂE-mail messages â on page 111.
99 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Follow the i nstructions give n by your remote mailbox and Int ernet service provider.
100 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Inb ox - re ce ivin g messa ge s Select Menu â Messagingâ Inbox . Options in the Inbox: Op en , Create message , Reply , Delete , Message det ails , Move to folder , Mark/ Unmark , Help , and Exit . When there are unr ead messages in Inbox, the icon cha nges to . In Inbox, t he message icons tell you what k ind of a message it is. Here are some of the icons that you may see: indicates a n unread text mes sage and indicates an unread smart message indicates an unread multimedia message indicat es an unread WA P service message indicates data received via infrared indicates data received via Bluetooth technology indicates a n unknown message t ype. Viewing mul timedi a object s Options in the Objects view are: Open , Save , Send , Call , and Exit . To s ee what kinds of media obj ects have bee n included in t he multimedia message, ope n the mes sage and select Options â Objects . In the Objects view you can view files that have been included in the multimedia message. You can choose to save the file in your phone or to send it, for example, via infrared or Bluet ooth technol ogy to another compa tible devic e.
101 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Imp ort an t: Exer cise caution openi ng messages. Mess ages may contain mal icious software or otherwis e be harmful to you r device or PC. Receiving smart messages Your phone can receive ma ny kinds of smar t messages, text mes sages that contain data (also called Over-The-Air (OTA) messages). See âÂÂSettings for multimediaâ on page 98. and See âÂÂSet tings for e- mailâ on page 98. for more information on your phone se ttings. To open a received smart message, open t he Inbox, s croll to the smart message ( ), and press the joystick. ⢠Picture me ssage - To save the pictur e in the Picture messages folder in the Gallery for later use, select O ptions â Save pict ure . ⢠Business card - To sav e the contact information, s elect Options â Save busin ess ca rd . ⢠Ringing tone - To save the rin gin g ton e to th e Gal l ery, sele ct Options â Save . ⢠Operator logo - To save the logo, select Options â Save . The oper ator logo can now be seen in standby mode instead of t he network operatorâÂÂs own identification. ⢠Calendar entry - To sav e the invitation t o the Cale ndar, select O ptions â Save to Calendar . ⢠Web message - To save the book mark, selec t Opt ions â Save to bookmarks . Th e bookmar k is added to the Bookmarks list in browser s ervices. If the message contains bot h browser acce ss point settings and bookmarks, to save the da ta se lec t Options â Save all . O r, select Options â View details to
102 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . view the book mark and acc ess point information separate ly. If you do not wa nt to save all the da ta, select a setting or bookmark, open the details, a nd sel ect Options â Save to Settings or Save to bookmarks depending on w hat you are viewing. ⢠E-mail notification - Tells you how many new e-mails you have in your remot e mailbox. An e xtended notificat ion may list more de tailed information such as subject, sender, attachme nts, and so on. ⢠In addition, you can receive a text message se rvice number, voice mailbox number, profile settings for remote synchronisation, access point settings for the browser, multimedia messaging or e-mail, access point login script settings, or e -mail settings. To save the se tt ings, selec t Option s â Save to SM S sett. , Save to Voice mail , Save to Set tings , or Save t o e-mail sett. . Receiving service messages Service me ssages ( network serv ice) are notifi cations of, f or exampl e, news headlines, and they may contain a t ext messa ge or the addres s of a br owser service . For availabilit y and subscr iption, contact y our service pr ovider. â My fo l der s Select Menu â Messagingâ My fo lde rs . In My f olders, you c an organise your mes sages into folders, crea te new folders, and rename and delete folders.
103 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Ma ilbox Select Menu â Messagingâ Mailbox . When you open this folder , you can connect to yo ur remote mailbox (network serv ice) to: ⢠retr ieve new e-mail headings or messages, or ⢠view y our previousl y retrieved e -mail headings or messages offline. When you scroll to your mailbox and press the joys tick, the phone asks you if you want to Connect to mailbox? Sele ct Ye s to connect to your mailbox or No to view previously retrieved e- mail messages off line. Another way to start a c onnection is to select O ptions â Connect . If you select New message â Cre ate: â E-mail or Mailbox in the Messa ging main view and y ou have not set up your e-mail account , you are prompted t o do so. See âÂÂSettings for e- mailâ on page 98. When you create a new mailbox, the name you give to t he mailbox automatically replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have several mailboxes (max . six). When you are onli ne, select Options â Disconnect to end t he data call or GPRS connection t o the remot e mailbox.
104 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Retrievin g e-mail messages from the mailb ox Select Options â Connect . This starts a connect ion to a remote mailbox. 1. When you have an ope n connection to a remote mailbox, select Options â Retrieve e-mail â : ⢠New - To ret rieve all new e -mail messages to your phone. ⢠Select ed - To r etrieve only the e-mail messages that have been marked. Use the Mark/Unmar k â Mark / Unmark commands to select messages one by one. See âÂÂA ctions common to all applicationsâ on page 32. ⢠All - To retriev e all messages from the mailbox. To ca ncel ret rieving, press Cancel . 2. After you have retrieved the e-mail messages, you can continue viewing them online. Sele ct Options â Disconnect to close the connection and to view the e- mail mes sages offline. 3. To open an e-mail message, scroll to the e-mail you want to view and press the joystick. If th e e-mail message has not been r etrieved (arrow in the icon is pointing o utwards) and you are of fline and sele ct Ope n , you are asked i f you want to retrieve t his message fr om the mailbox. ⢠To vie w e-mail att achments, open a message that has the at tachment indicat or and select Options â A ttach men ts . In the Attachme nts view, you can retrieve, open, or save at tachments, in s upported formats. You can also send a ttachments via infrared or Bluetoot h technology.
105 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . If your mailbox uses t he IMAP4 protocol, you can de cide wh ether to retrieve e-mail headings only, messages only, or messages and attachments. With the POP3 protocol, the options are e-mail headings only or messages and attachments. See âÂÂE-mail messagesâ on page 111. Imp ort an t: Exer cise caution openi ng messages. Mess ages may contain mal icious software or otherwis e be harmful to you r device or PC. Del eting e-ma il messages ⢠To dele te an e-mail f rom the phone while still r etaining it in th e remote mailbox: Select Options â Del ete â Phone only . The phone mirrors the e-ma il headings in the remote mailbox. So , although you delete the message content, the e-mail heading stays in your phone. To remove t he heading as well, delete t he e-mail me ssage from your r emote mailbox first and then make a connection from your phone to the remote mailbox again to update t he status. ⢠To dele te an e-mail f rom both the phone and the remot e mailbox: Select Options â Del ete â Phone and server . If you ar e offline, the e-mail is deleted first f rom your phone. During the next connection t o the remot e mailbox, it is automatically deleted fr om the remote mailbox. If you ar e using the POP3 protocol, mes sages marked to be deleted ar e removed only after you have closed t he connect ion to the remot e mailbox.
106 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠To ca ncel deleting an e-mail from bot h the phone and server, s croll to an e- mail that has been marked to be dele ted during the next connection, a nd select Options â Undelete . â Outbox Select Menu â Messagingâ Ou tb ox . The O utbox is a t emporary storage place f or messages t hat are waiting to be sent. Status of the messages in the Outbox: ⢠Sending - A connect ion is being made and the mes sage is being s ent. ⢠Waiting/ Queued - For example, if ther e are two similar types of me ssages in the Outbox, one of t hem waits unt il the first one is sent. ⢠Resend at ... (time ) - Sending has f ailed. The phone t ries to send the me ssage again aft er a time-out pe riod. Press Send if you want to r estart the sending immediately. ⢠Deferred - You can set doc uments to be âÂÂon holdâ while they are in the Outbox. Scroll t o a message t hat is being s ent and select Options â De fer se ndi ng . ⢠Failed - The maximum n umber of sending att empts has been reached. If you were t rying to send a t ext me ssage, open t he message and c heck that the Sending se ttings are correct .
107 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Note : When sendin g messages, your de vice may display the words âÂÂMes sage SentâÂÂ. This is an in dicati on th at t he m essag e has be en s ent by you r de vice t o th e mes sage centre number progr ammed into yo ur device. Thi s is not an ind ication tha t the messag e has been rece ived at the i ntende d destinati on. For more details about messag ing service s, check with your s ervice pro vider. â Vi ewin g mess ages on a SIM card Before y ou can view SIM messages, y ou need to copy them to a folder in y our phone. See âÂÂA ctions common to all applicationsâ on page 32. â Cell b road cast Select Menu â Messagingâ Opt ions â Cell broadcast . You may b e able to receive mes sages on var ious topics, such a s weather or traffic c onditions from your s ervice provider (network ser vice). For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service pr ovider. In the main view , you can s ee: ⢠the status of the topic: - for ne w, subscribe d messages and - for new, unsubscribed messages. Options in Cell broadcast: Ope n , Subscribe / Unsubscribe , H otmark / Remo ve hotmark , T opic , Settings , Help , and Exit . ⢠the topic number, topic name , and whet her it has been flagged ( ) for follow- up. You wi ll be notified w hen messages bel onging to a f lagged topic have ar ri ved .
108 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . A packet data (GPRS) connection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Cont act your netw ork ope rator for the correc t GPR S s etting s. â Serv ice co mma nd edit or Select Menu â Messagingâ Opt ions â Service command . Enter and se nd service request s (also known as USSD commands) such as activat ion commands, for network ser vices, to your service pr ovider. â Messa ging s et ting s Select Menu â Messagingâ Opt ions â Settings . Tex t m ess ages Select Text messa ge . The following list of settings opens: ⢠Message cent res - List s all the def ined message c entres. Options when editing message centre settings: New msg. centre , Edit , Delete , Help , and Exit . ⢠Msg. centre in use (Message centre in use) - Defines which message centre is used for delivering t ext messages and smart mes sages such as picture messages. ⢠Receive report (delivery repor t) - When this network service is set to Ye s , the stat us of th e se nt me ssa ge ( P ending , Failed , Delivered ) is show n in the Reports (Network Serv ice).
109 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Receiving a delivery repor t of a multimedia message that has been sent t o an e-mail address might not be possible. ⢠Message validit y - If the recipie nt of a message cannot be reached within the validity per iod, the message is remov ed from th e message se rvice centre. Note that t he network must support this feature. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network for which the message remains valid. ⢠Message sent as - The opt ions are Text , Fa x , P aging , a nd E-mail . For further information, c ontact your network operator . ⢠Preferr ed connection - You can send text messages via the normal GSM network or via GPRS, if s upported by the network. ⢠Reply via s ame ctr . (network service ) - By setting this option to Ye s , if t he recipient replies to your message, the r eturn message i s sent using the same message servic e centre number. Note that not all network services provide this option. For availability, c ontact your network operator or service provider. Multimedia mess ages Select Multimedia message . The following lis t of settings opens: ⢠Access point in use ( Must be defined ) - Select which access point is use d as the preferr ed connection for the multimedia message centre. Se e âÂÂSettings for multimediaâ on page 98. If you r eceive multimedia message set tings in a sma rt message and save them, t he received settings are automatically used f or the Acc ess point. See âÂÂRec eiving smart messagesâ on page 101.
110 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Multimedia rece ption - Select: ⢠Only i n home net. - To receive multimedia message s only when you are in your home network. When you are outside your home network, multimedia message r eception is tur ned off. ⢠Always on - To always receive multimedia messages. ⢠Off - Not to receiv e multimedia mess ages or advert isements at all. ⢠On rece iving msg. - Select: ⢠Retr . immediately - To let the phone try t o retrieve mult imedia messages instantly . If there ar e messages with Deferred status, they are ret rieved as well. ⢠Defer retr ieva l - To let the multime dia messaging cent re save the message to be retrieved later . To retrie ve the mess age, set On receiving msg. to Retr. immediately . ⢠Reject message - To reject mult imedia messages. The multimedi a message centre deletes the messages. ⢠Allow anon. messages - Select No to reject messages coming from an anonymous sender. ⢠Receive adverts - De fine whether you want to allow reception of multimedia message adv ertisements or not. ⢠Reports - Se t to Yes , if you want the stat us of the sent mes sage ( Pending , Failed , Deliv ered ) to be shown in the Repor ts.
111 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Deny report sending - Choose Ye s , if you do not want your phone to se nd delivery report s of r eceived multimedia messages. ⢠Message validit y (network service) - I f the recipient of a mes sage cannot be reached wit hin the validity period, the message is removed fr om the multimedia message centre . Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network f or which t he message r emains valid. ⢠Image s ize - Define the size of the image in a multimedia mess age. The options ar e: Small (max. of 160x120 pixels) a nd Larg e (max. 640x480 p ixels). The defaul t setting of the multi media mess age serv ice is gen erally on. The appearance o f a multim edia messag e may vary depend ing on the receiving d evice. E-ma il m essa ge s Select E-mail . Open Mailbox in use to select which mailbox yo u want to use. Setti ngs f or M ail boxes Options when editing e-mail settings: Editing options , New mailbox , Delete , Help , and Exit . Select Mailboxes to open a list of defined mailboxes. If no mailboxe s have been defined, you are prompted t o do so. Th e following list of s ettings is shown (this information is available f rom your e-mail s ervice pr ovider): ⢠Mailbox name - Write a desc riptive name for the mailbox.
112 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Access point i n use ( Must be defined ) - The Internet Access Point (IAP) used f or the mailbox. Choose an IA P from the list. See âÂÂConnection settingsâ on page 143. ⢠My e-mail address ( Must be def ined ) - Wr ite the e- mail address given t o you by your s ervice pr ovider. The addres s must contain t he @ character. Replies to your mess ages are sent to this a ddress. ⢠Outgoing ma il server: ( Must be defined ) - Write the IP address or host name of the computer that sends your e-mail. ⢠Send message (network service) - Define how e-mail is s ent from your phone. Immediately - The phone tries to connect to the mailbox immediately aft er you have s elected Send . During next conn. - E- mail is sent the next time y ou connect t o your remote ma ilbox. ⢠Send copy to self - Select Ye s to save a c opy of the e -mail to your remote mailbox and to the address defined in My e-mail address . ⢠Include signature - Selec t Ye s to attach a signature to your e-mail messages and t o start to wr ite or edit a signature t ext. ⢠User name: - Write yo ur user name, provide d by your service provide r. ⢠Pas s wo rd : - Write your pass word. For increasing sec urity, you c an leave th is field blank, so that every t ime you try t o connect to your remote mailbox, you are prompted for the password Otherwise the password is s ent automatically. ⢠Incoming mail s erver: ( Must be defined ) - The IP address or host name of the computer that receives your e-mail.
113 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Mailbox type: - Defines the e-mail protocol your remote mailbox service provi der recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . This setting can be s elected only once and cannot be changed if you have saved or exited from t he mailbox s ettings. ⢠Secur ity - Used with the POP3, IMAP4, and SMTP protocols to secure t he connection t o the remot e mailbox. ⢠APOP secure login - Used with the PO P3 protocol to encrypt the sending of password s to the remote e -mail server. Not shown if IMAP4 is selected for Mailbox type: . ⢠Retrieve attachment s (not shown if the e-mail prot ocol is set to POP3) - To retrieve e-mail with or without attachments. ⢠Retrieve headers - To limit the number of e-mail hea ders you want t o retrieve to your phone. The options are All and User defined . Used with the IM AP4 protocol only. Serv ice messages Select Service message . The following list of set tings opens: ⢠Service mes sages - Choose whether or not you want to allow reception of service messages. ⢠Download messages - Choose t o download mes sages automatically or after your agreement.
114 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Cell broad cast Check w ith your service pr ovider whet her Cell broadcast (network service) i s available and what the available topics and related topic nu mbers are. Select Cell broadcast t o c hang e the s etti ngs : ⢠Reception - On or Off . ⢠Language - All allows you t o receive ce ll broadcast messages in ev ery possible language. Selected allows y ou to choose in which languages you wish to receive cell broadcast messages. If the language you prefer could not be found in the list, select Other . ⢠Topic detection - If you receive a me ssage that does not belong to a ny of t he existing topics , Topic detection â On allows you to s ave the topic number automatically . The topic number is saved t o the topic list and shown wit hout a name. Choos e Off if you do not w ant to save new topic numbers automatically . Sett ing s for t he O th er fol der Select Oth er . The following list of settings open s: ⢠Save se nt messages - Choose to save a copy of ev ery text message, multimedia message, or e-mail that you have sent to t he Sent items f older. ⢠No. of s aved msgs. - Define how many sent mes sages are sa ved to the Se nt items folder at a time. The default limit is 20 mes sages. When the limit is reached, t he oldest mes sage is delet ed.
115 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Chat Select Menu â Chat . Options in the Chat main view are: Op en , Lo gin , Logout , Settings , Help , and Exit . Chat (network service) allows you to conver se with ot her people using instant messages, and join discussio n forums (chat groups ) with specif ic topics. Once you have regis tered with a c hat servic e, you can log into the s ervice provider âÂÂs chat server . Check th e availability of chat se rvices, pricing, and tariffs with your net work operator and/or service provider. Service pr oviders also give you inst ructions on how to use their services. To ac cess a chat service you need to save the s ettings for tha t service. You ma y receive the sett ings from the ne twork operator or service pr ovider that of fers the servi ce. See âÂÂReceiving smart messagesâ on page 101. You c an also enter t he settings manually . See âÂÂChat and Presence serversâ on pa ge 123. Connect ing to a chat s erver Select Menu â Chat . 1. The phone automatically t ries to connect to a chat server . You can cha nge the chat serve r to connect to. See âÂÂChat and Presence serversâ on page 123. 2. Once the connection has been established, enter your user ID and password and pr ess the joy stick, or pr ess Cance l to stay offline. When you are offline,
116 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . your phone is not connected to t he chat server and you c annot send or receive messages. To log in later, select Options â Login . You obtain t he user ID and pas sword from your service provider. To log out, select Options â Logout . Modifyin g your cha t settin gs Select Options â S etting s â Chat settings . ⢠Use sc reen name - Select Ye s to enter a nickname (max. 10 characters). ⢠Chat prese nce - Prevent others from seeing if you are online, select Not a ctiv e . ⢠Allow messages from - Select All , From c hat contacts or None . ⢠Allow invitations from - Select All , From chat cont acts or Non e . ⢠Message spee d - Select the s peed at which new messages are display ed. ⢠A vailability reloading - Choose how to update information about whether your chat contacts are online or offline. Select Automatic or Manual . ⢠Reload availab. for - Select Al l con ta cts or Select ed contacts. Joining an d leaving a cha t g roup Select Menu â Chatâ Chat groups . A list of chat groups that you have saved or are currently joined to is shown. T he icon next t o a gr oup indicates what t ype it is: Options in the Chat groups view are: Open , Join group , Create new group , Leave chat group , Chat group , Search , Settings , Help , and Exit .
117 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠- A group t hat you have creat ed and are cur rently joined to. ⢠- A gr oup that you have creat ed but are not c urrently jo ined to. ⢠- A group t hat you have saved and a re curr ently joined to. ⢠- A gr oup that you have save d but are not c urrently joined t o. ⢠- A group that you are currently joined to but have not saved. To join a chat group: Scroll to a group on the list and press the joys tick. To join a chat gr oup not on the lis t but for which y ou know the group ID, s elect Options â Join group . Enter the group ID and press the joystick. You can s croll to a group, select Options â Chat group and then select: Save group , Dele te , View members to see which me mbers are cur rently joined t o the group, Chat group details to see the group ID, topic, members, editing rights in the group, and whe ther sending priva te messages is allowed in the group, a nd Chat group settings to vie w and edit the chat groupâÂÂs se ttings. See âÂÂEditing chat group settingsâ on page 122. To leave the chat group: Select O ptions â Leave chat group . Searc hing for ch at gr oup s and us ers Select Chat groups â O ptions â Se a rc h â Groups or User s . ⢠You can search for Groups by Group name , Topic , and Members (user ID). For groups that you hav e found you can select New sea rch , J oin and Save group . ⢠You can search for Us ers by User's name , Use r ID , Phone number , and E-mail address . For users that you have found you can select Ne w se arch , Open
118 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . conversat ion , Add to Chat contact to save the con tact , Send invitation , and Add to blocked list to block (or unblock) messages from the contact. When the search result is displayed, you can s elect Options â New sea rch , More result s from the same s earch, and Pr evious results to see your previous search result . Chat ting in a chat gro up Select Menu â Chatâ Chat groups . Once you have joine d a chat group, you can v iew the me ssages that ar e exchanged in the group, a nd send your own messages . Options while chatting: Send , Send priva te msg. , Reply , Send invitation , Leave chat group , Save group , Record convers. / Stop recording , Help , and Exit . ⢠To send a message, write the message and press the joystick. ⢠To s end a private message to a member (if allowed in the group), select Options â Send private msg. , select the recipient, write the message, and pres s the joystick . To reply to a private message sent to you, select Options â Reply . To invite chat cont acts who are online to join t he chat gr oup (if allowed in t he group), select O ptions â Send invitation , select the contacts you want to invite, write the invitation message, and press Done .
119 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Recordi ng messa ges To record the messages that are exchanged in a chat group or during an individual conversat ion, select O ptions â Re cor d conv er s . . Enter th e name for the message file and pr ess the joystick. To stop recording, select Options â Stop recording . The recor ded message files are saved to N otes. See âÂÂNotesâ on page 156. Blocki ng mes sages To preve nt receiving me ssages from certain chat us ers, selec t O ptions â Blocking options and then selec t: ⢠Add to blocked list - To block messages f rom the curr ently select ed user. ⢠Add ID to list manually - Enter the user ID of the user and press the joys tick. ⢠View block ed list - To see the use rs whose me ssages are block ed. ⢠Unblock - Select the user that you w ant to re move from the bloc ked list and press the joystic k. Starting and viewing individual conversati ons Select Menu â Chatâ Conversations . This shows a list of the chat users with whom y ou have an ongoing conversation. Options in the Conver sations view ar e: Send , Add to chat contact , Fo r war d , Record conv ers. / Stop recording , Blocking options , End conversation , Help , and Exi t . To s tart a new co nversation, s elect Options â New con ver sati on and then select:
120 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Select recipient - To see a lis t of your s aved ch at contact s that are curre ntly online. Scroll to the contact and press the joystick. ⢠Ent e r u se r I D - Enter t he user ID and pr ess the joystick. T he user ID is provided by th e service provider to those who register to the service . To vie w an ongoing conv ersation, scroll t o the user and press the joystick. To continue the conversation, write your mess age and press the joy stick. To r eturn to the conversa tions list wit hout closing the conversation, press Ba ck . To clos e the conversation, sele ct Options â End convers ation . Icon: next to a user indicat es that you have receiv ed a new me ssage from that us er. Ongoing conver sations are aut omatically clos ed when you e xit Chat. To save a us er to your ch at contacts, scroll to th e user and select Options â Add t o Chat contact . To s end automatic replies to inco ming messages, s elect Options â Set auto reply on . Ent er the text and press Don e . Chat contacts Select Menu â Chatâ Chat contacts . Options in the C hat contacts view ar e: Open , Op en conversation , Switch tracking on , Belongs to groups , N ew Chat contact , Edit , Dele te , Reload user availab. , Blocking opt ions , Search , Sett ings , Hel p , and Exit . This shows a list of your saved chat contacts. is shown n ext to contacts that are currently online, and indicates contacts that are offline.
121 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . To cr eate a n ew cont act, select Options â New chat cont act . Fil l in the N ame and User ID fiel ds and press Don e . You can s croll to a contact and press the joys tick to vie w contact de tails. Press Options and select: ⢠Edit - Edit the contactâÂÂs de tails. ⢠Open c onversation - Start a new conversa tion or continue an ongoi ng co nve rsat io n with the c ont act . ⢠Switch track ing on - Be notified ev ery time the c hat contact goes online or offline. ⢠Belongs to groups - See which groups t he chat cont act has joined. ⢠Reload user avai lab . - Update information a bout whether contact s are online or offline. This option is not available if you have s et the Availability reloading to Automatic in Chat setti ng s . Creating a n ew ch at gr oup Select Chat groups â Optionsâ Cr eate new group . Enter th e sett in gs for t he group: ⢠Group name , Group topic , and a W elcome note that the participants s ee when they join the group. ⢠Group size - Maximum number of members allowed to join the group. ⢠Allow search - Define if others can f ind the chat group by searching.
122 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Editing rights - Scroll to the chat group members to whom you want to give editing rights and permission to invite contacts to join the group. ⢠Group members - See âÂÂRestricti ng access to a c hat groupâ on page 122. ⢠Banned - Dis plays a lis t of banned users. ⢠Allow private msgs. - Allow or prevent private messaging between members. ⢠Group ID - Is crea ted automatically and cannot be changed. Editi ng chat gr oup set tings Select Men u â Chat â Chat groups . You can e dit the sett ings for a chat group if y ou have creat ed the group or if the creator of the group has given you editing rights. In the Chat groups view, scroll to the desired group and select Options â Chat group â Chat group se ttings . See âÂÂCreating a new chat groupâ on page 121. Re str ic ting ac cess t o a c ha t gr oup You can ma ke a chat group closed by crea ting a Group members li st. Onl y the users on the list are allowed t o join the group. Select the Chat groups view, scroll to the group and select Options â Chat group â Chat group settings â Group members â Selected only . ⢠To add a user t o the list, select Add and Chat cont act or Enter use r ID . ⢠To remove a user from the list, scroll to the user and sele ct Remo ve . ⢠To cle ar the list a nd allow all cha t users to join the group aga in select Remov e all .
123 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Chat and P resence se rvers Select Options â Settings â Server sett ings . You may receive the settings as a sma rt message f rom the serv ice provider that offers the chat s ervice. ⢠To ch ange t he chat or presence serve r you w ish to c onnect t o, select De fault serve r . ⢠To c hange the Presence login type, select Login type and select Automatic , Aut. in home net. , or Manual . ⢠To cha nge the Chat login t ype, select Login t ype and selec t Automatic or Manual . ⢠To add a new server, select Options â New ser ver . Enter or sele ct th e set ti ngs: Server name and Access point in us e to conne ct to the se rver, Web address of the chat server, your Us er ID and login Pa s s w o r d . See âÂÂConnection settingsâ on page 143. You obtain t he user ID and pas sword from your service provider w hen you register for the servic e. If you do not k now your us er ID or pas sword, contact your service provider.
124 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 8. Tools â App licat ions Select Menu â Tools â Manager . You can ins tall new compat ible Symbian operat ing system applications (SIS files) and Java⢠applications (Java MIDlets and MIDlet suites) on your phone. You can also update and uninstall applications from the phone, and monitor the ins tallation history. Your phone support s J2MEâ¢Java applica tions. Do not downloa d PersonalJava⢠applicat ions to your phone as they cannot be inst alled. Options in the Applicat ion manager main v iew are: Install , View details , View cert ificate , Update , Go to web addres s , Rem ove , View log , Send log , Settings , App. downloads , Help , and Exit . Applications in the Applicat ion manager use shar ed memory. See âÂÂShared memoryâ on page 17. When you open the Application manager, you can se e a list of: ⢠Applications s aved in t he Application manager. ⢠Partially installed applic ations (indicated by ). ⢠Fully ins talled applications t hat you can r emove (indicated by ). You can only use Symbia n operating system applic ations with a .SIS e xtension.
125 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Dow nload ing an app licati on Your phone supports J2ME TM Java applic ations. Make su re that the application is compatible wit h your phone bef ore downloading it . You can downloa d new Java applications in different ways: â¢S e l e c t Menu â Tools â M anager â App. downloads and the lis t of availa ble bookmar ks is s hown. Select t he appropriat e bookmark to connec t to the desired page. If the connect ion fails, you may not be able to acces s the page from the s ervice whose connection set tings are cu rrently act ive. In this case, enter the Web menu and ac tivate another se t of service s ettings. See â Making a connectionâ on page 172. Try again to connect to the pa ge. For the availability of different services, pricing and tariffs, contact your network operator and/or the service provider. â¢S e l e c t Menu â We b â Download . Select to download an appropriate application or game. ⢠Use t he Nokia Application installer from PC Suite to download t he applications to your phone. Imp ort an t: Only ins tall and use applica tions and other soft ware from source s that offer adequate security and pro tection against harmful software. Note t hat when downloading an application, it ma y be saved in the Games menu instead of the Web menu.
126 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Installin g an applica tion You can ins tall applications t hat are specif ically intended f or this phone and suitable f or the Symbi an operating system. If you ins tall an application that is not intended specifically f or this phone, it may function a nd look different f rom what was or iginally intended. ⢠Open the Application manager, scroll to the application, and s elect Options â Ins tall to star t the in stal latio n. ⢠Alter natively, sea rch the phone me mory or t he memory car d, selec t the applicat ion, and press t he joystick to start the ins tallation. Applications may be downloaded to y our phone during brows ing, received a s attachments in multimedia messages or e-mails, or r eceived via infrared or Bluetooth technology from another device , for example, a phone or a compat ible PC. Imp ort an t: Use only servi ces that you trus t and that offer adequate se curity and protection against harmful software. To increas e protection, t he applicat ion installation syste m uses digital signat ures and cert ificates for appl ications. Do not install the appl ication if t he Application manager gives a sec urity warning during ins tallation. If you ins tall an application that contains an update or repair to an existing applicat ion, you can only restore the original application if you hav e the original applicat ion or a full backup copy of the removed application. To restore the original applicat ion, first remov e the updated or repaired applica tion and then r e- install it from the original appl ication or t he backup copy .
127 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . During ins tallation, the phone c hecks th e integrity of t he application to be installed. T he phone shows information about the chec ks being carried out and you are giv en options whet her to cont inue or cancel the installation. O nce the phone has checked the int egrity of th e application, it is installe d on your phone. Insta ll ing a Ja vaâ¢a pplic ati on The .JAR f ile is required f or installation. If it is miss ing, the phone may a sk you t o download it . If there is no acces s point defined f or the Application mana ger, you are ask ed to select one. When downloading the .J AR file, you may need t o enter a user name and passwo rd to acces s the serve r. You obtain thes e from the suppl ier or manufac turer of the a pplication. ⢠To s tart a data connection a nd to view ext ra information about the application, s croll to it and select Options â Go to web addres s . ⢠To s tart a data connection a nd to chec k if there is an update availa ble for the application, s croll to it and select Options â Update . Java set tin gs ⢠To cha nge the default access point that a Java application us es for downloading ex tra data, sele ct Options â Settings â A ccess point . See âÂÂAccess pointsâ on page 143. ⢠To cha nge the s ecurity settings that determine the actions that a Java application is permitted to perform, select Option s â Settin gs . Not all J ava applications permit you t o change the s ecurity set tings.
128 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Launchin g an applica tion 1. Select Menu â We b â Applications â Select application: . 2. Scroll t o an applicat ion or an a pplicat ion set (the name depe nds on the application). 3. Select Options â Ope n or pr ess the call ke y. If the s election is a single application it is launched. Otherwise, a list of applications in the selected application set is displayed. To launch a s ingle application, s croll to the des ired application and select Options â Open , or press the call key. Note that running some applic ations may consume the phoneâÂÂs battery faster (and you may need to conn ect the phone to t he charger) . Other opt io ns avai labl e for an appli ca tion or appli catio n set ⢠Delete - Delete th e application or application se t from the phone . ⢠Application acces s - Restrict the appli cation from acce ssing the net work. Select Ask fi rst and th e phone asks for net a ccess, Al ways allowed t o allow the net access, or Not allo wed not to allow the net access. ⢠Update - Check if a new ver sion of the applic ation is available for download from the se rvices (network servic e). ⢠Go to web address - P rovide further informat ion or additional data for the applicat ion from an Internet page. This feature needs to be supported by the network. It is only sh own if an Inte rnet address has been provided wit h the application.
129 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Details - G ive additional inf ormation about t he application. Memo ry st atu s f or ap pl i cat io ns Select Menu â Extrasâ Memo ry . This shows the amount of me mory availa ble for game and application installations. The applic ations use shar ed memory. See âÂÂShared memoryâ on page 17. Rem oving an appli cation 1. To remove an applicat ion, scroll to it and s elect Options â Remo ve . 2. Press Ye s to confirm the removal. If you r emove an applic ation, you can only re-install it if you have th e original applicat ion or a full backup of the removed applicat ion. If you r emove an applicat ion, you may no longer be able t o open document s created wit h that applicat ion. If another applic ation depends on t he application t hat you remove d, the other application may stop worki ng. Refer to t he documentation of t he installed appli cation for details. â File ma nag er Select Menu â Tool s â File manager . In the File manager, you can br owse, open, a nd manage files a nd folders in t he phone memor y or on the memory car d, if you use one.
130 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Options in the Fi le manager main view ar e: Open , Send , Dele te , Move to folder , Copy to folder , New folder , Mark/Unmark , Rename , Find , Rec eive via infrared , View details , Memor y details , Help , and Exi t . Open the File manager to see a list of t he folders in t he phone memor y. Move th e joystick to the right to see the folders on the memory card, if you use one. You can browse, open, and create folders , mark, copy a nd move items to folders . See âÂÂActions c ommon to all applicat ionsâ on page 32. Co pyright prot ections may preven t some ima ges, ri ngin g tones , and o ther conte nt from bei ng c opi ed, mo di fie d, tr ans fe rr ed or fo rwa r de d. Receiving files via I nfrared Select Options â Receive via infrared . Files are automatically receive d into the r oot level of the folder str ucture and c an be moved or copied to ot her folders. See âÂÂInfrared connectionâ on page 186. View ing memo ry cons umptio n Select Options â Memory details . If you have a memory card installed in your phone, you have a choice of two memory view s, one for the phone memory and one f or the memory card. Move the joys tick to t he right or t o the l eft to move f rom one memory t ab to ano t he r. To che ck memory cons umption of the cur rent memory s elect Options â Memory details .
131 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . The phone calculates t he approximate amount of free memory for s toring data and installing new applicati ons. In the memory views, you can view the memory consumption of the different data groups: Calendar , Contacts , Documents , Images , Sound f iles , Video clips , Messages , A pplications , Mem. in use , a nd Free memory . If the phone memory is getting low, remove some f iles, or move them to t he memory car d. See âÂÂTroubleshootingâ on page 193. â V oice c omm and s Select Menu â Tool s â Vo i c e c o m. . You can us e Voice comma nds to start applicati ons and profiles, a nd to dial number s from Contacts, without having to look at yo ur phoneâÂÂs display. You record a word, or words ( voice command) and then pronounce this voice command to open an application, activate a profile, or dial a number. You can ha ve only one v oice command per item. Options in the Voice commands main view ar e: Add voice command , Open , New appl ication , Playbac k , Change , Delete , Delete all , He lp , and Exit . Any spoken wor d(s) can be a voice command. ⢠When recording, hold the phone at a short dis tance away from your mouth. After the starting tone, cle arly prono unce the word, or words, y ou want to record as a voice command. Before using voi ce tags, no te that: ⢠V oice tag s are not la ngua ge-depen dent. T hey are depe ndent on the speak er's voice.
132 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Y ou must say the n ame exactly as you said it when you recorded it. ⢠V oice tags a re sensiti ve to backgroun d noise. Record vo ice tags and us e them in a quiet environme nt. ⢠V ery sho rt names are n ot accepted . Use lon g names and avo id similar n ames for differen t num be rs . Note : Usin g voice tag s may be difficult in a noisy en vironmen t or during an emerge ncy, so you shoul d not rely solely u pon voice di alling in al l circumstance s. Add ing a voice com mand to an appl icat ion 1. In the Voice commands main view, scr oll to the a pplication that you want to add a v oice command t o, and se lect Options â A dd voice tag . To add a voice co mmand to a prof ile, the Pr ofiles folder must be opened and a specific pr ofile selected. To add an application to the list of a pplications in the Voice commands main view, sele ct Options â New application , scroll to t he application that you want to a dd and press Select . 2. The t ext Press 'Start', t hen speak after t one is displayed. â¢P r e s s Start to r ecord a voice command. The phone sounds a starting tone and th e note Speak now is displayed. 3. Pronounce the voice command. The phone stops recording after approximately 5 seconds.
133 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 4. After r ecording, the phone plays the recor ded command a nd the note Playing voice c ommand is displayed. If you do not want to save the recor ding, press Quit . 5. When the voice command has be en successfully saved, the not e V oic e command saved is displayed and a beep s ounds. A symbol can be se en next to the application. Star ti ng a n ap pli cat io n u sin g a voi c e co mma nd 1. In standby mode, press a nd hold the ri ght selection key. A short tone is played and the n ote Speak now is displayed. 2. When you are st arting an application by saying a voice command, hold the phone a short distance away from yo ur mouth and pronounce the voice command cl early. 3. The phone plays th e original voice command and star ts the applicatio n. If the phone plays an incorre ct voice command, press Retry . Replay ing, e ras ing , or ch angin g a voice comm and To replay, erase, or change a voice command, scroll to t he item that has a voice command (indica ted by ), select Options , and then either: ⢠Playback - L isten to the v oice command aga in. ⢠Delete - Erase t he voice c ommand. ⢠Change - Rec ord a new voic e command. Pr ess Start to recor d.
134 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Dev ice man ager Select Menu â Tool s â Device mgr . . Device ma nager allows a third part y, such as your servi ce provider, to assist you directly with phone settings. To allow device ma nagement, your phone must es tablish a connec tion and synchronise with the t hird partyâÂÂs server. You can start the s ynchronisation session from your phone, and you can accept or reject server-initiat ed synchronisation attempts. Options in the D evice manager main view are: St art configuration , Ne w server prof ile , E dit profile , De le te , Enable config. / Disable conf ig. , View log , He lp , and Exit . This feature is operator dependent and may not be av ailable on all phones . Contact y our service provider for information and availability. A device manager profile mus t be de fined before you can connect t o a server. T he third party who is assisting you can help define the pr ofile settings: ⢠Server name - Display name of the server. ⢠Server ID - Remote de vice manager s erver ID. ⢠Server password - Password used in server aler ts. Enter the pas sword that must be provided by the de vice manager server when synchronising with y our phone. ⢠Access point - Internet ac cess point y our phone uses to establish the s erver connection. Choos e from the lis t of acces s points defined in your phone . ⢠Host addres s - Device manageme nt server URL.
135 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Por t - Device manageme nt server port. ⢠User name - Your user name f or this profile. ⢠Pas s wo rd - Your password for this profile. ⢠Allow configuration - Device management allowed on this server. Select Ye s or No . ⢠Auto-accept all reqs. - Automatic or ap proved device mana gement on this server . Select Ye s to allow synchronisation w ithout your ver ification, or select No to verify each synchronisation at tempt.
136 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 9. P e rsonalising your phone â Pro fil es Select Menu â Profiles . Options in the Prof iles main v iew are: Acti v ate , Personalise , Create new , D elete profile , Hel p , and Exit . In Profiles, y ou can adjust and customise t he phone tones for different event s, enviro nments, or caller gr oups. You can se e the current ly selected profile at the top of the display in standby mode. If the General profile is in use, only the current date is shown. To cha nge the profile, s croll to a profile and s elect Options â A cti vate . To modify a profile, s croll to the pr ofile in the Profiles list and s elect Options â P ers onalise . To cr eate a new pr ofile, select O ptions â Create new . A lis t of profile settings opens. Scroll to th e setting you want t o change and press the joysti ck to open the choices: ⢠Ringing tone - Set the ringing tone fo r voice calls , choose a ringing tone f rom the list. Press a ny key t o stop the sound. If a memory card is used, tones stored on it have t he ic on next to t he tone name. R inging tones use shared memory. See âÂÂSha red memoryâ on page 17. You c an also change ringing t ones in Contacts. See âÂÂAdding a r inging toneâ on page 57. ⢠Ringing type - When Ascending is selec ted, the ringing vo lume starts fr om level o ne and increases level by level to the set volume le vel.
137 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Ringing volume - Set t he volume leve l for the ringing and message ale rt tones . ⢠Message aler t tone - Set the tone for messa ges . ⢠Chat alert tone - Set the tone fo r inst an t mes sag es. ⢠Vibrating alert - Set the phone to vibrate at incoming voice calls and messages. ⢠Keypad tones - Set the volume level f or keypad t ones. ⢠Warning tones - The phone sounds a warning tone, for example, when the battery is running low. ⢠Alert for - Set the phone t o ring only upon ca lls from phone numbers that belong to a s elected cont act group. Phone calls coming from people outside the selected group have a silent alert. The choices are All calls or (a list of contact groups, if you hav e created th em). â Theme s Select Menu â Th emes . Options in the Themes main v iew are: Preview , Apply , Edit , He lp , and Exit . You can c hange the look of your phoneâÂÂs display by activating a theme. A theme can include the idle screen wallpape r, colour palett e, screen saver, and background image in âÂÂGo t oâÂÂ. Edit a t heme for more detailed pers onalisation. When you open Themes you s ee a list of the available themes. The cur rently active theme is indicated by a check mark. Move the joys tick to the r ight to s ee the themes on the memor y card, if you use one.
138 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . To previe w a theme, scroll t o the th eme and select Options â Prev iew to vie w the theme. Press Apply to acti vate the th eme . You c an activ ate the the me with out previewing it by select ing Options â Apply from the main view. Group toget her elements from other themes , or images from the Gallery to personalis e themes further . Editing a theme: 1. Scrol l to a theme, select O ptions â Edit , and select: ⢠Wallpaper - Select an image from one of t he available themes, or select your own image from the Gallery, to us e as a backgr ound image in standby mode. ⢠Colour palette - Change the c olour palette used on the dis play. ⢠Screen sav er - Select what i s shown on the screen sav er bar: the t ime and date or a text th at you have w ritten yours elf. The location and background colour of the screen s aver bar c hanges in 1-minute intervals. Also, t he screen saver changes to indicate the number of new messages or missed calls. You can set the t ime that elaps es before the screen saver is activated. See âÂÂPhone settingsâ on page 139. ⢠Image in 'G o to' - Select an image from one of the avai lable themes, or select y our own image from th e Gallery, t o use as a back ground image in Go to. 2. Scroll to the eleme nt to be edited a nd select O ptions â Change . 3. Select Options â Set to select t he current setting. To preview t he selected element , select Options â Preview . N ote that you cannot pr eview all elements.
139 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . To res tore the currently selec ted theme to its original se ttings, select Options â Res tore orig. t heme when editing a theme. â Sett i ngs Ch angin g gene ral setti ngs Select Menu â Setting s 1. Scroll to a setting group and press the j oystick to open it. 2. Scrol l to a setting you want to c hange and pr ess the joyst ick to: ⢠switch between options if there are only t wo ( On /Off ), ⢠open a li st of options or an editor, ⢠open a s lider view and move the joystick to the right or to the lef t to increase or decreas e the value r espectively . You may b e able to receive some settings from y our service provider in a shor t message. See âÂÂReceiving smart mes sagesâ on page 101. Ph one set tin gs Select Phone . Gene ral ⢠Phone language - Change the l anguage for t he display text s in yo ur phone. This change may als o affect th e format used for date and t ime and t he separato rs used, for ex ample, in calculations. If y ou select Automatic , the
140 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . phone select s the language ac cording to t he information on your SIM car d. After you ha ve changed t he display text language, you mus t restart the phone . Changing the settings f or Phone language or Wr iting language affect s e very application in y our phone and the change remains effective unt il you change these s ettings again. ⢠Writing language - Change the writing langua ge of your phone . Changing the language affects: ⢠the characters a vailable when y ou press any key 1 - key 9 ⢠the predictive text dictionary used ⢠the s pecial charact ers that are available when you pres s the * key and key 1 . ⢠Dictionar y - Set predictive text input On or Off f or all editors in the p hone. Select a language for entering predictive text from the lis t available. You can also c hange this setting when you are in an editor. Press the # key a nd se lect Dictionary â Dictionary on or Of f . ⢠Welcome note or lo go - The welcome note or logo is dis played br iefly each t ime you switch on the phone. Selec t Default if you want to us e the default image or animation. Select T ext to write a welcome not e (max. 50 lett ers). Select Image to select a p hoto or picture from the Gallery. ⢠Orig. phone s ettings - Reset some o f the settings to t heir original values. To do this, you need the l ock c ode. See âÂÂSecurityâ on page 149. After res ettin g the settings, t he phone may take a longer time to powe r up. All documents and files t hat you have created are left as they a re.
141 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Standby mode ⢠Left selec tion key an d Right selection key - Change the shortcuts t hat appear over the left and right se lection keys in s tandby mode. In addition to the applications, you c an have the s hortcut point to a function, for example, New me ssage . You can only have shortcut s to pre-installed applications and f unctions. Disp lay ⢠Brightness - Adjust the br ightness of the dis play. ⢠Screen sav er timeout - T he screen s aver is act ivated when the s creen save r time-out period is over. When the screen saver is active, the dis play is cleared and you can see t he screen saver bar . ⢠To deac tivate the sc reen s aver pres s an y key. Call s ett ings Select Call . Send my caller ID (n etwo rk se rvic e) ⢠Set your phone number t o be displayed ( Yes ) or hidden ( No ) from the person whom you are calling. Or, the value may be s et by your network operator or service provider whe n you make a subscripti on. Call waiting ( ne twork se rvic e) ⢠The net work notifies you of a new incoming call whil e you have a call in progres s. Select A cti vate to reques t the networ k to activ ate call wait ing,
142 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Cancel to request the network to deac tivate call waiting, or Check status to check if the function is active or not. Auto mati c red ial ⢠When this setting is act ivated, your phone makes a maximum of ten at tempts to co nnect the ca ll after an uns uccessful c all attempt. Pr ess the end ke y to stop automatic redialling. Summary after call ⢠Activa te this s etting if you want the phone t o briefly dis play the approximate duration of t he last cal l. Speed dialling â¢S e l e c t On , and the number s assigned to t he speed-dial ling keys ( 2 - 9 ) can be dialled by pressing and holding th e key. See âÂÂAssigning speed- dialling keysâ on page 59. Anykey answer â¢S e l e c t On , and you c an answer an inc oming call by brief ly press ing any key, exc e pt the right selection key , the power key, a nd the end key. Line in use ( netw ork s erv ice ) ⢠This setting is shown only if the SI M card supports two subscriber numbers, that is , two phone lines . Select which p hone line ( Line 1 or Li ne 2 ) you want to use for mak ing calls and sending short mes sages. Calls on both line s can be answered irres pective of the selected line. Note : You cannot make calls if yo u select Line 2 and have not subscr ibed to this network service.
143 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . To preve nt line selection, s elect Line change â Disable i f supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Conne ction se ttin gs Select Connection settings . Access p oin ts Here y ou can see a short explanat ion for every setting t hat may be needed for different data connecti ons and acce ss points. If you have not yet us ed your phone to ma ke a WAP connection, you may need to c ontact your service provid er for a ssi sta nce w ith th e fi rst- ti me conn ec tion . Many service pr oviders require y ou to use an IAP f or your default access point. Other service provide rs allow you to use a W AP access point. Contact your s ervice provider for more information. Start t o fill in the settings from the t op since, depending on the data connection you select ( Data bear er ), only certain f ields are available. ⢠Connection name - Give a descriptive name for t he connection. ⢠Data bear er - The options are GPRS or Data call . De pending on what data connection you select, only certa in setting fields ar e available. Fill in all f ields marked wit h Must be defined , or with an asterisk. O ther fields c an be left empty, unles s you have been instructe d otherwise by y our service provider . To be able t o use a data connect ion, the net work operator or service provider must support this feature, and if necessary, activate it for y our SIM card
144 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Access point name (for packet dat a only) - T he access point name is needed to establish a connection to the GPRS network. You obtain the access point name from your network operator or service provider. ⢠Dial-up number (for data call only) - T he modem telephone number of the acces s point. ⢠User name - Write a user name if requir ed by the s ervice prov ider. The user name may be needed t o make a data co nnection, and is usually provided by the service provider. The us er name is often case-sensi tive. ⢠Prompt pas sword - If you must enter a new password eve ry time y ou log onto a server, or if you do not want t o save y our password to t he phone, choos e Yes . ⢠Pas s wo rd - A password may be nee ded to make a data connect ion, and is usually provided by th e service p rovider. The pass word is ofte n case-sensitive . When you are writing the password, the characters you enter are shown briefly and t hen changed to asterisks ( * ). The e asiest way to ent er numbers is t o press and hold t he digit you want to enter, and then continue e ntering letters. ⢠Authenti cat ion - Normal / Secur e. ⢠Homepage - Depending on what you ar e setting up, ent er either: ⢠the service address, or ⢠the address of the mult imedia messaging ce ntre. ⢠Data call t ype (for data call only) - Analogue , ISDN v .1 1 0 , or ISDN v .120 de fines whether the phone uses an analogue or digit al connection. This setting depends on both your GSM net work operator and Internet Service Pr ovider (ISP), becaus e some GSM networ ks do not support c ertain types of ISDN
145 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . connections. For details , contact y our ISP. If ISDN connections ar e available, they establish connections more quickly than analogue me thods. ⢠Maximum data speed (for data c all only) - T he options are Aut omatic , 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 38 400or 43200, de pending on the chosen Data call type . This option allow s you to limit t he maximum connec tion speed when GSM data are used. Higher data rates may cost more, dep ending on the service provi der. The s peeds above represent the ma ximum speed at which your c onnection operates . During the conne ction, th e operating speed may be less , depending on network conditions. Options â A dvanced settings ⢠Netwo rk ty pe â The internet pr otocol (IP) version of t he network. ⢠Phone IP address - The IP address of your phone. ⢠Name s ervers - The IP a ddress of the pr imary and secondary D NS servers. ⢠Proxy serv. address - The IP address of t he proxy server. ⢠Proxy por t number - T he port number of the proxy server. To enter these se ttings, contact your Internet se rvice provide r. The following settings are shown if you have selected data call as the connection type: ⢠Use callbac k - This option allows a server to call y ou back once you have made the initial call. Contact your service provider to s ubscribe to this service.
146 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . The phone expects t he callback call to us e the same data call settings th at were us ed in the callback-requesting c all. The networ k must suppo rt that type of call in both dir ections, to and from the phone. ⢠Callback type - T he options are Use s erver no./ Use other no. . Ask your servi ce provi der for t he correct setting to use. ⢠Callback number - Ent er your phoneâÂÂs dat a phone number which the dial-back server us es. Usually, t his number is the data-call phone number of your phone. ⢠Use PPP compr ession - Whe n set to Ye s , t his option speed s up data transf er, if supported by the remote PPP server. If you have problems with establishing a connection, t ry set ting this to No . Contact your service provider for guidance. ⢠Use login s cript - The options are Ye s / No. ⢠Login script - Insert the l ogin script. ⢠Modem initialisation (Modem initialisation s tring) - Controls your phone using modem AT c ommands. If required, enter characters s pecified by your service provi der or Internet s ervice provider . GPRS Select GPRS . The GPRS s ettings affect all access poi nts using a pac ket data c onnection. GPRS connection - If you select When available and you ar e in a net work that supports pac ket data, the phone registers to the GPRS netw ork and short messages are sent via GPRS. Als o, start ing an acti ve packet dat a connect ion, for example, to send and r eceive e-mail, is quicker. If you select When needed , th e phone uses a pac ket data connection only if you start an application or action t hat
147 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . needs it. The GPRS c onnection can be c losed when it is not neede d by any applicat ion. If there i s no GPRS coverage and you have chosen When available , the phone periodically tries to es tablish a packe t data connection. Access point - The access point name is needed when you want t o use your phone as a packet data modem to your computer. Data c all Select Data c all . The Data call settings af fect all access points t hat use a GSM dat a call. Online time - If t here are no actions the data call is dropped automati cally after a time-out period. In the option Change sel ect User defined to enter a time, or Unlimited .
148 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Date an d ti me Select Date and time . The Date and time settings allow you to define the date and time used in your phone, as well as change the dat e and time format and separator s. ⢠Time and Dat e - to s et the time and date. ⢠Date forma t - to choose be tween European, US and Japanes e format. ⢠Date separa tor - to choos e betwee n several separators . ⢠Time for mat - to choose between 24-hour and 12- hour time form at. ⢠Time s eparator - to choose betwee n several separ ators. ⢠Clock t ype â Analogue or D igital - To ch ange the clock show n in standby mode. See âÂÂClockâ on page 160. ⢠Clock alarm t one - To change the t one played when the c lock alarm time is reached. ⢠Auto time update - To a llow the network to update time, date, and time zo ne information t o your phone (network service). For the Auto time update se tting to take effect , the phone ne eds to be r estarted. Ch eck any al arms as t hese may be aff ected by Auto time update . ⢠GMT offs et - To change t he time zone f or the clock time. ⢠Daylight-sa ving - To turn daylight saving time on or off.
149 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Secur it y Select Security . Phone and SI M You can c hange the following codes: lock code, PIN code, and PIN 2 code. These codes can only include t he numbers from 0 to 9 . Avoid using acce ss codes similar t o emergency numbers, such as 112, t o prevent accident al dialling of t he emergency number. PIN code request - When the PIN code request is a ctive, the c ode is request ed each time the phone is s witched on. Note t hat some SIM cards may not allow the PIN code request to be deactivated. PIN code /PIN2 code / Lock code - Open this s etting if you want to change t he code. Autolock period - You can set an autolock per iod, a time-out after whic h the phone is automatically locked and can be used only if the corr ect lock code is entered. Enter a number for the time-out in minutes or select None to tur n off t he autolock per iod. ⢠To unlock the phone, enter the lock code. Lock if SIM changed - Select Ye s if you w ant the phone t o prompt for the lock c ode when an unknow n, new SIM card is ins erted into your phone. The phone maintains a list of SI M cards that are recognised as t he ownerâÂÂs cards. Options in the Fi xed dialling view are: Open , Call , Activ . f ixed dialling , Deact. fixed dialling , New contac t , Edit , Delete , Add to Contacts , A dd f rom Contacts , Find , M ark/Unmark , Help , and Exit .
150 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Fixed dialling - You can res trict your outgoing calls to s elected phone numbers, if supported by y our SIM card. You need the PIN2 code for this function. When this function is active, y ou can only ca ll those phone numbers that a re included in t he fixed-dialling list or which begin w ith the same digit(s) as a phone number on the list. ⢠Press t he joy sti ck to set Fixed dialling on. ⢠To add new numbers t o the Fix ed dialling list, selec t Opt ions â New contact or Add from Contacts . Closed user group (network service) - You can specify a group of people whom you can ca ll and who can call you. F or more information, contact your network opera tor or service provider. Sel ect: Default to activate th e default group agreed on with the netw ork opera tor, On if you want to us e another group (you need to know th e group index number ), or Of f . When security features that restrict calls are in use (such as call ba rring, clos ed user group and fixed dia ling) calls still ma y be possib le to the offi cial emergency n umber progra mmed into your device. Confirm SIM services (network service) - To set th e phone to display confirmation messages when you are us ing a SIM card service. Ce rtif ica te ma nag eme nt Options in the ce rtificate mana gement main v iew are: Ce rtificate details , Delete , T rust settings , Mark/U nmark , Hel p , an d Ex i t .
151 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . In the certificate manageme nt main view , you can s ee a lis t of authority certificat es that have been stored in your phone. Move the joystick to t he right to see a list of personal certificates, if available. Authority certificates a re used by some browser s ervices, su ch as banking s ervices, for checking signatures or server certificates or other authority certificate s. Server certificates a re used to improve securit y in the connect ion between t he phone and t he gateway. T he phone receives the s erver cert ificate fr om the service provider before the connec tion is establis hed and its validit y is checked using the authorit y certificates saved in the phone. Server certificate s are not saved. Server certificates ma y be needed when yo u, for example : ⢠want to connect to an online bank or another site or remote serve r for actions that involv e transferr ing confidential information, or ⢠want to be sure of the authenti city of software when downloading and installing s oftware. Imp ort an t: Note that even if the u se of cert ifica tes cons iderably r educes the risks involve d in remote co nnection s and softw are instal latio n, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any pro tection by itself; th e certific ate ma nager must con tain correct, a uthentic, or trusted certificat es for increased se curity to be available. Certif icates have a restri cted lifet ime. I f Expired certif icate or Ce rtifica te not vali d yet is shown even i f the cert ificate sh ould be val id, check that the curren t date and time in your d evice are correct. Before changing any certificate settings, you mus t make sure that yo u actually trust the own er of the certific ate and that the certifi cate reall y belongs to the liste d owner.
152 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Changing the trust settings of an authority certificate ⢠Scrol l to an authority certificate and select Options â Trust settings . Depending on the certificate, a list of t he applications that can use the selected certificate is shown. For example: Application manager / Yes - The certificate is able to certify the origin of new soft war e. Internet / Yes - T he certificat e is able to certify e-mail and imagi ng servers. Call ba rring Select Call barring . Call barring (network service) all ows you t o restrict t he making and rec eiving of calls wit h your phone. For this function, y ou need the barring password obt ainable from y our service provider. 1. Scroll t o one of the barring options. 2. Select Options â Activ ate to request t he network to set call r estriction on, Cancel to set the selected call restrict ion off, or C heck status to che ck if the calls ar e barred or not. â¢S e l e c t Options â Edit barrings passw . to change the barring password. â¢S e l e c t Options â Cancel all barrings to cancel all active call barrings. Call barr ing and call di verting cann ot be active a t the same time . When calls are barre d, calls stil l may be possible to ce rtain official eme rgency numbers.
153 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Netw ork Select Network . Operator selection ⢠Automatic - Set th e phone to automaticall y sear ch for and selec t one of t he cellular net works avai lable in your area. ⢠Manual - Select the desired networ k manually from a lis t of net works. If th e connection t o the ma nually selected network is los t, the phone sounds an error tone and a sks you to select a network again. The selec ted network must have a roaming agr eement with your home network, that is, t he operator whos e SIM card is in your phone. Cell info display ⢠On - Set the phone to indicate w hen it is used in a cellular network based on Micro Cellular Network (MCN) technology a nd to activat e cell info r eception (network s erv ice). En ha nce me nt Select Enhancement . Scroll t o an enhancement f older and open t he settings: ⢠Default profile - Select the profile y ou want t o activate each time you c onnect a certain enhanc ement to your phone. ⢠Automatic answer - Set the phone to answer an incoming call automatically after 5 seconds after you connect this enhancement to y our phone. If the
154 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Ringing type is se t to Beep once or Silent , automatic ans wer cannot be used, and you must answer t he phone manually. â Go t o Select Menu â Go to or pr ess Go t o in stan dby mode. Options in the G o to main view are: Open , Edit shortcut name , Shortcut icon , D elete shortcut , Move , List vi ew / Grid view , Help , and Exit . Use G o to for storing s hortcuts, links to your favourit e photos, video clips, notes, Recorder sound files, and browser bookmarks. The default shortcuts ar e: - opens the Note s editor, - opens the Calendar at the current date, and - opens t he Messaging Inbox. Shortcuts can be added only from some of the functions. Applications do not have this functi onality. Adding and using shortcuts: 1. Open the application and scroll to the item that you want to a dd as a sh ortcut. 2. Select Options â Ad d t o ' Go t o ' and press OK . ⢠To open a shortcut , scroll to th e icon and pres s the jo ystick. The file is opened in the corresponding application. ⢠To delete a shortcut , scroll t o the shortcut t hat you want to remove and sel ect Options â Delete shortcut . Removing a shor tcut does not a ffect the file it is r eferring to.
155 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠To change the shortcut name , s el ec t O ptions â Edit shortcut name . Wri te the new name. This change aff ects only t he shortcut, not the file or the item tha t the shortcu t refe rs to.
156 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 10 . E x t r a s â Notes Select Menu â Extrasâ Note s . You can li nk notes to Go to and s end them to other devices. Plain t ext files (TXT f ormat) you receiv e can be save d to Notes. ⢠Pr ess ke ys 1 - 9 to s tart to wr ite . Pre ss th e cle ar key t o clear letters. Pres s Do ne to sav e. â Calc ulator Select Menu â Extrasâ Calculator . 1. Enter th e first numbe r of your cal culation. If you make a mis take, press the cle ar key to erase it. 2. Scrol l to an arithmet ic function and press the joys tick to select it. 3. Enter the se cond number. 4. To exe cute the ca lculation, s croll to and press the joyst ick. Options in Calculator ar e: L ast resu lt , Memory , C lear screen , Help , and Exit . Note : This calculator has limit ed accuracy and is design ed for simpl e calculation s. â¢To add a decimal, pr ess the # key. ⢠Press and hold the clear key to clear t he result of the previous calculati on.
157 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Use and to view previous calculations and move in t he sheet.
158 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Conv erte r Select Menu â Extrasâ Con ve rt er . In Converter, you can conv ert measurement parameters such as Len gth f rom one unit to anot her, for exa mple, Ya r d s to Metre s . The Conve rter has limited ac curacy and rounding error s may occur. Conver ting un its Options in Converter: Conversion type , Curren cy rates (not applicable to other units), Hel p , and Exit . To mak e curr ency conver sion you must f irst se t the exchange rate. See âÂÂSetting a base currency and exchange ratesâ on page 159. 1. Scroll to th e Typ e field and pr ess the joy stick to open a list of meas urement parameters. Scr oll to the measurement pa rameter you want t o use and press OK . 2. Scroll to th e first Uni t field and pres s joystick to open a list of a vailable units . Select the unit fro m which you want to convert and press OK . 3. Scroll to th e nex t Un it field and select the unit to which you want to convert. 4. Scroll to th e first Amount f ield an d ente r the val ue tha t you want to c onver t. The oth er Amount field change s automatically to show th e converted value. Press the # k ey to ad d a decimal and press the * key f or the , - (for temperature), and E (expone nt) symbols.
159 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . The c onversion order changes if you write a va lue in the second Amount field. The result is shown in the first Amount f ield. Set ting a base currency and exchan ge rates Before you can carry out currency conversions, you ne ed to choose a base currency (us ually your domestic currency) and add exchange rat es. The rat e of the ba se currenc y is always 1. The bas e currency det ermines the conversion rates of the ot her currencie s. 1. Select Curren cy as the me asurement paramet er type and select Options â Curr ency rat es . A list of c urrencies o pens and you can see the current bas e currency at the t op. 2. To cha nge the base c urrency, scr oll to the curr ency (usually your domes tic cur re ncy ), a nd sel ect Options â Set as base curr . . 3. Add exchange rates, scroll t o the c urrency, and ent er a new r ate, that is, how many units of t he currency equal one unit of the base currency you have sel ect ed . 4. After you have ins erted all t he required exchange rates, you can make currency conversions . See âÂÂConverting unitsâ on page 158.
160 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Recor der Select Menu â Extrasâ Re cord e r . The v oice recorder allows you to r ecord tele phone conversations and voice memos. If you ar e recording a t elephone conv ersation, both par ties hear a tone every 5 s econds during r ecording. Recorded f iles are s tored in the G allery. See âÂÂGalleryâ on page 71. Options in Recorder ar e: Record sound clip , Dele te , Re name sound clip , Send , G o to Gallery , Se tting s , A dd to 'Go to' , Help , and Exi t . â¢S e l e c t Options â Record sound clip and scroll to a function and pres s the joyst ick to select it. Use: - to reco rd, - t o pause, - to stop, - to fas t forward, - to r ewind, or - to play an opened sound file. The recorder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS connection is active. â Clock Select Menu â Extrasâ Clock . Ch angin g cl ock se ttin gs Options in Clock: Set alarm , Res et alarm , Remo ve alarm , Setti ngs , He lp , and Exi t . ⢠To cha nge the t ime or date, select Options â Settings in Clock.
161 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Set ting an alar m 1. To s et a new alar m, select Options â Set alarm . 2. Enter th e alarm ti me and press OK . When the alarm is active, the indicator is shown. ⢠To ca ncel an alarm, go to Clock a nd select Options â Remove alarm . Turning off the alarm â¢P r e s s Stop to turn o ff the al arm. â¢P r e s s Snooze to stop t he alarm for 5 mi nutes, after which it resumes. You can do this a maximum of fiv e times. If the alarm tim e is re ached while the device is switche d off, the device switc hes itsel f on and s tart s sou ndi ng th e al arm to ne. If yo u pres s Stop , the device asks whether you want to activate the device for calls . Press No to switch off the device or Yes to make and receive call s. Do n ot pr es s Yes when wireles s phone u se may caus e interf eren ce or dang er. Persona lising the al arm tone 1. To pers onalise the alarm tone, selec t Options â S ettin gs . 2. Scroll to Clock alarm tone and press t he joystick. 3. When you scroll through the list of tones , you can st op on a tone to listen to it before you make your s election. Press Selec t to sele ct the curre nt tone .
162 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Mem ory card Select Menu â Extrasâ Mem ory c ard . Options in the memor y card: Remove mem. c ard , Backup phone mem. , Res tore from card , Format mem. card , M emory card name , Set password , Change password , Remove password , Unlock memory car d , Memor y details , Hel p , and Exit . For details on inserting a memory card into t he phone, see the G etting Started section. You can use it to store your multimedia files such as video clips and sound files, photos , and messaging dat a, and t o back up informat ion from your phoneâÂÂs memory. Included with y our Nokia phone is a Reduced Size MultiMedia Card (RS-MMC) that may contain add-on applic ations from independent developers. These applicat ions are designed by the devel ope rs to be compatible wi th your phone. Use only compatibl e Multi MediaCard ( MMC) with th is device . Th e compati ble MMC f or your phone is Reduced Size Dual Voltage Mult iMediaCa rd. Other memory cards , such as Secu re Digital (SD) ca rds, do not fit in the MMC card slot and are not compa tible with th is device. Using an in compatible memo ry car d may damage the mem ory car d as well as t he device, and data stored on the incompatib le card may be corrupte d. Details of how you ca n use the memor y card wit h other feat ures and applications of your phone are given in the se ctions describing thes e features and applications. Keep all memory ca rds out of the r each of small childr en.
163 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . For matti ng the m emo ry ca rd When a memory car d is formatt ed, all data on t he card are permanen tly lost. Some memor y cards are supplied pre-for matted and other s require format ting. Consult your r etailer to fi nd out if you must format the memory card bef ore you can use it . â¢S e l e c t Options â Format mem. card . Select Ye s to conf irm. When for matting is complete, e nter a name for t he memory card (max . 11 letter s or numbers). Backing up and r est oring info rmat ion To bac k up information fr om your phoneâÂÂs me mory to the memor y card, s elect Options â Backup phone mem. To res tore information f rom the memory c ard to t he phoneâÂÂs memory, select Options â Restor e from card . You can only back up the phone memory and restore it t o the same p hone. Locki ng th e memory card To s et a password to lock your memory car d to help prev ent unauthorised use, sel ect Options â Set password . You are as ked to enter and confir m your password. The password ca n be up to eight characters long.
164 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . The passw ord is stored in y our phone and you do not have t o enter it aga in while you are using the memory card on the same phone. If you want to use the memory card on anot her phone, you a re asked for the password. Unlo cking a me mory c ard If you ins ert another passw ord-protected memory c ard into your phone, you are prompted to enter the password of the ca rd. To unlock t he card: â¢S e l e c t Options â Unlock memory c ard . Note : Once th e password is removed, th e memory card is unlocked and c an be used on ano ther phone withou t a p assw ord. Checking me mory consu mptio n You can c heck the memory consumption of dif ferent data gr oups and the available memory for ins talling new a pplications or softw are on your memor y card : â¢S e l e c t Options â Memory details . â Walle t Select Menu â Extrasâ Wallet . Options in the wa llet main vi ew are: Ope n , Sett ings , Hel p , and Exi t . Wallet provide s you with a storage ar ea for your personal informat ion, such as credit and debit card number s, addresses and other useful data, for example , user names and passwords.
165 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . The infor mation stored in the wallet ca n be easily retrieved while browsing to automatically complete online forms on br owser pages, f or example, when the service asks for c redit card det ails. Dat a in the wallet are encry pted and protect ed with a wallet code t hat you define. You can group wallet dat a into profiles that can be access ed, for exa mple, when making purchas es online. Due to the nature of t he wallet, it automatically closes after 5 minutes. Enter the wallet code t o regain access to the contents. You can change this automatic time- out period, if required. Se e âÂÂPresence settingsâ on page 65. Ente ring th e wall et c ode Each t ime you open the wallet yo u are prompt ed for a w allet code. When you open the wallet for t he first t ime, you must create your own acce ss code: 1. Enter a code of your choice (4 - 10 alphanumeric char acters), and pres s OK . 2. You are prompted to ve rify the code. Enter the same code and press OK . Do not give y our wallet code to anyone else. 3. Enter t he code t hat you have create d and press OK . If you en ter the wallet code incorrectly on three c onsecutive occas ions, the wallet applicat ion is blocked f or 5 minutes. The block time increases if further incorr ect wallet codes are entered.
166 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . If you f orget your walle t code, you have to r eset the code, and you will lose a ll information s tored in the wallet . See âÂÂResetting t he wallet and wallet codeâ on page 170. Stor ing p ers ona l c ard de tails 1. Select the Cards category fr om the main wallet menu and pr ess the joy stick. 2. Select a type of card from t he list and pr ess the joystick. ⢠Payment cards - Credit and debit cards. ⢠Loyalt y cards - Member ship and store ca rds. ⢠Online ac c. cards - Personal user names and pass words to online s ervices. ⢠Address cards - Basic cont act details f or home/office. ⢠Us er i nfo card s - Customise d personal prefe rences for online s ervices. 3. Select Options â New card . A blank form opens . 4. Fill in the fields a nd press Done . You can a lso receive card infor mation directly to the phone from a card issuer or service provider (if t hey offer th is service). You are notified which category t he card belongs to. Either save or discard the card. You can view a nd rename a saved card, but you cannot edit it. You can ope n, edit or de lete the f ields in the c ard. Any changes are saved upon exiting. Options when viewing or editing card details: Delete , Help , and Exit .
167 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Creat ing p ers onal no tes Personal notes are a means of storing s ensitive information, f or example, a bank account number. You can acces s the dat a in a personal not e from the br owser. You can a lso send a note as a message. ⢠Selec t the P e rsonal notes cat egory from the main w allet menu a nd press the joyst ick. â¢S e l e c t Options â New note . A blank note opens . â¢P r e s s k e y 1 - 9 to s tart writing. Pres s the clear key to clear char acters. Press Done to sa ve . Creating a wallet profile Once you have stored your personal details, you can combine t hem together into a wallet pr ofile. Use a w allet profile t o retrieve wal let data from different cards and categories to t he browser. 1. Select the Wallet profiles category from the main wallet menu and press the joyst ick. 2. Select Options â New profile . A new wallet profile form opens . 3. Fill in the fields a s indicated below and press Done . Some of t he fields must c ontain dat a selected from t he wallet. Save the dat a under the relevant category before creating a wallet profile, or the profile can no t b e cr e at ed . ⢠Profile name - Choose and enter a name for the prof ile.
168 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Payment card - Select a card from t he Payment card cate gory. ⢠Loyalt y card - Select a card from the Loyalty card category. ⢠Online ac cess card - Select a card from the Online access card category. ⢠Shipping address - Select an address from the Address car d category. ⢠Billing address - By def ault this is the s ame as the Shipp ing address. If y ou require a different address, select one from the A ddress card category. ⢠Us er i nfo card - Select a card f rom the U ser info ca rd category. ⢠Receive e-receipt - Selec t a des tination from the Addres s card cat egory. ⢠Deliver e-receipt - Select To phone , To e-mail , or T o pho. & e-mail . ⢠RFID sending - Se t to On or Of f . Defines whe ther or no t your unique phone identification is sent wit h the wal let profile (for fut ure development dependent on RFID -based tick eting). Retrieving information from the wallet to yo ur brows er When using online mobile service s supporting the wallet funct ionality, you can upload t he data stored in your wallet t o automatically e nter your details into an online form. For example, by uploading your payment card detai ls you do not need to enter t he card number and ex piry date each time y ou need them (depending on the content being brows ed). Also, you can retrieve your user name and password stored as an acces s card when c onnecting to a mobile ser vice that requires authenticat ion. See â Purchasing an itemâ on page 177. A cache is a memory location th at is us ed to store data temporaril y. If yo u have tried to access or have acces sed confide ntial informatio n requiring passwords, em pty the cache
169 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . after each use. The in formation or service s you have access ed is stored i n the cache. To empty the cache, s elec t Menu â Web â Options â Nav igation opt ions â Cl ea r C a che . Viewing ticket detai ls Options in the T ickets main view ar e: Vi e w , Dele te , Rename , Mark/Unmark , Help , and Exit . You can rec eive notificat ions of ti ckets purchase d online via the br owser. Received notifications ar e stored in t he wallet. To view the notifica tions: 1. Select the Tickets category f rom the main wallet menu and press the joy stick. 2. Select Options â View . Wallet setting s Select Options â Settings from the main w allet menu: ⢠Wallet code - Change your wallet code. You are prompted to enter th e current code, c reate a new code, and verify th e new code. ⢠RFID - Set the phone ID code, type, a nd sending options (for f uture development depe ndent on RFID-bas ed ticke ting). ⢠Automatic close - Change the a utomatic time-out period (1 - 60 minut es). After the t ime-out period has ela psed, the wallet code mus t be re-entered to gain ac cess to the c onte nts.
170 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Resetting the wa llet and wallet co de To res et both the cont ents of the w allet and the wallet code : 1. Enter *#7370925 538# in standby mode. 2. Enter th e phone lock code, and pres s OK . See âÂÂSecurityâ on page 149. 3. You are asked to confirm the erasing of data. Press OK . When opening the wal let again, you mus t enter a new wallet code . See âÂÂE ntering the wallet codeâ on page 165.
171 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 1 1. Service s and Ap plications â Web ( Mobile brows er) Select Menu â We b or press and hold key 0 in standby mode. Various service providers maintain pages specifically designed for mobile phones , offering se rvices that can be, fo r example, news , weather reports, banking, t ravel information, e ntertainment, and games. Wi th the mobile brows er, you can view the se services a s WAP pages writ ten in HTML, WML, and XHTML pages writt en in XHTML, or a mixt ure of WML and XHTML. If you have not ye t used your phone t o make a WAP connection, you may need to contact y our service provider for assistance with the first-time connection. Check the a vailability of services, pricing, and tariff s with your network ope rator and/or ser vice provider. Ser vice providers also give you instructions on how to use their serv ice s. Basic st eps fo r acc essing ⢠Save t he settings t hat are nee ded to ac cess the br owser s ervice that you want to use. See â Setting up the phone for the browser s erviceâ on page 172. ⢠Mak e a connection t o the s ervice. See âÂÂMaking a c onnectionâ on page 172. ⢠Start browsing t he web pages. See âÂÂBrowsingâ on page 174. ⢠End the connection to the service. See âÂÂEnding a connectionâ on page 178.
172 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Setting up the phone for the browser service Receiv in g set tings in a smar t messag e You may rec eive servic e settings in a special t ext message, a so-called s mart message, f rom the network oper ator or service provider that offers the service. See âÂÂReceiving smart me ssagesâ on page 101. For more information, cont act your network operator or service provider. Enteri ng th e sett ing s manu ally Follow the i nstructions give n to you by your service provider. 1. Select Menu â Settings â Connection â A ccess points and define the settings for an access point. See â Connection settingsâ on page 143. 2. Select Menu â We b â Options â Bookmark manager â Add bookmark . W ri te a name for the bookmark and the addres s of the br owser page defined for the current ac cess point. Ma ki ng a co nn ecti on Once you have stored all the required connection s ettings, you c an access browser pages. There ar e three different way s to acces s browser page s: ⢠Select the homepag e ( ) of yo ur service provider. ⢠Select a bookmar k from the Bookma rks view.
173 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â¢P r e s s t h e k e y s 2 - 9 to start to write the address of a brow ser service. The Go to field at the bottom of the display is immediately activated a nd you can continue writing the address there. After you have selected a page or written the address, press the joystick to start to download t he page. Viewing bo okmarks Your device may have s ome bookmark s loade d for site s not a ffiliated with Nokia . Nokia d oes not guarantee or endorse th ese sites . If you choos e to access them, yo u should take the same precautions, for security or con tent, as you would with an y Internet site. Options in the Bookmarks view (whe n a bookmark or folder is s elected): Open , D ownload , Back to page , Bookmark manager , Mark/Unmark , Navigation options , Advanced opt ions , Send , Find bookmar k , D etails , Setti ngs , Help , and Exit . In the Bookmarks view, you can see bookmarks pointing to different kinds of browser pages . Bookmarks are in dicated by t he following icons: - The st arting page defined for the brows er access point . If you us e another browser ac cess point f or browsing, t he starting page is changed accordingly. - T he last vis ited page. When the phone is disconnected from the ser vice, the address of the last visited page is kept in memor y until a new page is vis ited during the next connection. When you scroll through bookmarks, you can s ee the address of t he highlighted bookmar k in the Go to field at t he bottom of the display. - A book mark showing the t itle.
174 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Adding bookmar ks manually 1. In the Bookmarks view, select Opt ions â Bookmark manager â A dd bookmark . 2. Start to fill in the fields. Only the addr ess must be def ined. The default acces s point i s assigned to t he bookmark if no other one is selected. Pr ess the * key t o enter s pecial charact ers such as / , . , : , and @ . Press the clear key to clear char acters. 3. Select Options â Save to save the bookmar k. Browsi ng On a brows er page, new links appe ar underlined in blue and previous ly visited links in purple. Image s that act as links ha ve a blue border around them. Options when browsing: Open , Service options , Bookmarks , Save as bookmark , View image , N avigation options , Advanced options , Send bookmark , Fin d , Det ails , Settings , Help , and Exit . Keys and c ommands use d in brows ing ⢠To open a link, pr ess the joy stick. ⢠To s croll the vie w, use the joy stick. ⢠To ent er letter s and numbers in a f ield, pr ess the ke ys 0 - 9 . Press the * key t o enter s pecial charact ers such as / , . , : , a n d @ . Press the clear key to cle ar char acters. ⢠To go to the pr evious page while browsing, press Back . If Back is not available, sel ect Options â Navigation options â His tory to view a chronological l ist of
175 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . the pa ges you have visited duri ng a browsing sessi on. The history list is cleared each time a session is closed. ⢠To che ck boxes and make se lections, pr ess the joys tick. ⢠To r etrieve the latest content from the server, se lect O ptions â Navigation options âÂÂReload . ⢠To open a sub-list of commands or actions for the currently open browser page, s elect Options â Service options . ⢠To dis connect from a browser service and to quit br owsing, pres s and hold the end key . Saving b ookmarks ⢠To save a bookmark while browsing, select O ptions â Save as bookmark . ⢠To s ave a bookmark receive d in a smart message, open the message in the Inbox in Mes saging and select Options â Save to bookmarks . See âÂÂReceiving smart messagesâ on page 101. Viewing s aved pa ges Options in the Sav ed pages v iew are: Op en , Back to page , Reload , Saved pages , M ark/Unmark , N avigation options , A dvanced options , D etails , Settings , Help , and Exit . If you r egularly browse pa ges containing inf ormation which doe snâÂÂt change very often, you can save and t hen browse them when offline. ⢠To s ave a page, while browsing s elect Options â A dvanced options â Save page .
176 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Saved pa ges are indicat ed by th e following icon: - The saved browser page. In the saved pages view you can also create folders to store your s aved browser pages. Folders are indicated b y the following icon: - Folder c ontaining saved br owser pages. ⢠To open the Saved pages view , move the joystick to t he right in t he Bookmarks view. In the Save d pages vie w, press the joystick to open a sa ved page. To s tart a connect ion to the br owser serv ice and to retrieve the page again, select Options â N avigati on opt ions â Reload . The phone stays online after you r eload the page. A cache is a memory location th at is us ed to store data temporaril y. If yo u have tried to access or have acces sed confide ntial informatio n requiring passwords, em pty the cache after each use. The in formation or service s you have access ed is stored i n the cache. To empty the cache, s elec t Menu â We b â Op tions â Nav igation opt ions â Cl ea r C a che . Dow nl o adi n g You can dow nload items suc h as ringing to nes, images, operato r logos, software, and video clips using the mobile browser. T hese items c an be provided fr ee or you can purchase them. Once downloaded, items ar e handled by the respective applications on your phone, for example, a downloaded photo is saved in th e Gallery.
177 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Importa nt: Only install and use appl ications and other s oftware from sources that offer adequate security and pro tection against harmful software. Purchas ing an i tem To downloa d the item: 1. Scrol l to the link and select Options â Ope n . 2. Choose the ap propriate option t o purchase the i tem, for example, Buy. Carefully read all the information provided. If the online content is compatible, you c an use your w allet informa tion to make the purchase: 1. Select Open wallet . You are prompt ed for your w allet code. See âÂÂEnter ing the wallet codeâ on page 165. 2. Select the appropriat e card cat egory from your wallet. 3. Select Fill in . This uploads t he selected wallet information. If the wallet does not contain a ll information neces sary for the pur chase, you ar e requested to enter the remaining details manually. Co pyright protec tion may prev ent som e images, rin ging tone s, and oth er content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. Checkin g an i tem befo re do wnlo ading You can s ee details a bout an item befor e you download it. Details about a n item may incl ude the pr ice, a brief de scription and size. ⢠Scrol l to the link and select Options â Ope n . Details about the item are displayed on y our phone.
178 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠If y ou want to c ontinue with the downloading, press Accept , or if you want to cancel the download, press Canc el . Ending a conn ectio n â¢S e l e c t Options â A dvanced options â Disconnect , or ⢠Press and hold the end key to quit browsing a nd to return to s tandby mode. Br owse r s etti ngs Select Options â Settings : ⢠Default access point - To change the default access point, pr ess the joystick to open a li st of ava ilable access poi nts. The cur rent default acce ss point is highlighted. See â Connection settingsâ on page 143. ⢠Show images - Choose whether to view pict ures when you are browsing. If you choose No , you can later load images dur ing browsing by selecting Options â Sho w images . ⢠Text wrapping - Choose Off if you do not want the text in a paragraph to automatically wrap, or On if you do. If text is not wrapped, the ends of lines may be truncated. ⢠Font si ze - Y ou can choose five text sizes in the browser: Smallest , Small , Normal , Larg e , and Large st . ⢠Default encoding - T o make sure your browse r pages display text charact ers correc tly, select t he appropriate language type.
179 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Automatic bookmarks - Choose On if you want the bookmarks to be automatically saved in the Auto. bookmarks folder when you visit a page. When you select Hide folder , the book marks ar e still automatical ly added to the folder. ⢠Screen siz e - Choose how to use t he display area for view ing pages. ⢠Rendering - Choose the image quality for the pages. With the high image quality, the page download speed is s lower, and vice versa. ⢠Cookies - Allow / Re ject . You can enable or disable the receiv ing and sending of cookies (a me ans for c ontent providers t o identify user s and their pr eferences for freque ntly use d conte nt). ⢠Securi ty warnings - Choose to hide or show security notif ications. ⢠Conf. DTMF sending - Always / First time only . Choose whether you want to confirm before the phone sends D TMF tones during a voice call. See âÂÂOptions during a callâ on page 39. For example, you can make a voice call while you are viewing a browser page, send DTMF tones while a voice call is in progress, and save a name and phone number from a br owser page into Contacts. ⢠Wallet - Choose On to open th e wallet aut omatically when a compatible browser page is opened. â Games Select Menu â Ga mes . To s tart a game, s croll to the ga me icon and press the joy stick. For instructions on how t o play the game, select Options â Help .
180 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 12. Connect ivi ty â PC Su ite You can us e your phone wit h a var iety of PC connectivity and data communications applications. With PC Suite you can synchronize contacts, calendar and to-do notes and notes between your phone and the compatible PC, or a remote Inte rnet serv er ( netwo rk se rvice). You may find more information a bout PC Suite and t he download link in the support area on the NokiaâÂÂs Web site, <www.nokia. com/support>.
181 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Blue toot h co nnec tio n Select Menu â Connectivityâ Bluet ooth . This device is co mpliant with Blu etooth wi reless tech nology Spec ification 1.1 s upport ing the fol lowing profiles: H ands-free, Obj ect Pus h Pro file, File Tra ns fer Prof ile, Dial U p Net working Pro fil e and F a x Pro fi l e. To en s ure in ter ope rabil i ty be t wee n othe r devices supporting Bluetoo th wirel ess techno logy, use Nokia appro ved enh ancement s for thi s model. Ch eck with th e manufacture rs of other devices to determine the ir compatibilit y with this device. There ma y be re stric tions on u sing Bl uetoo th techn ology in some locations . Check with your local aut horities or service pro vid er . Fea tures using B luetoot h wire less technol ogy, o r allo wing s uch features to run in t he backgro und whil e using othe r features, increase the dema nd on battery powe r and reduces the ba ttery life. Bluetooth technology enables wir eless connections between e lectronic devices within a maximum range of 10 me tres. A Bluetoot h connection can be used to send images, videos, texts, business cards, calendar notes, or to connect wirelessly to compa tible devices using Bluetooth tec hnology, suc h as computers. Please note that not all computers using Bluet oot h technology are necessarily compatible. Since dev ices using Bluetooth technology communicate using radio waves, your phone and th e other de vices do not ne ed to be in direct line-of-sight. T he two devices only need to be within a maximum of 10 metres of ea ch other, although the connection can be s ubject to int erference f rom obstructions such as walls or
182 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . from other ele ctronic devic es. Using Bl uetooth technology c onsumes the bat tery and t he phone's operating t ime is reduce d. Take th is into account w hen performing other operations with your phone. There may be restrictions on using devices using Bluetooth technology. Chec k with your local authorities. When you activa te Bluetooth technology for the first time, you ar e asked to give a name to your phone. Bluetoo th co nnect ion setti ngs ⢠Bluetooth - On / Off. ⢠My phone's visibility - Sho wn to all - Your phone can be found by other Bluetooth dev ices or Hidden - Your phone ca nnot be f ound by other d evices. For sec urity reasons it is advisable to use the hidden mode wheneve r possible. ⢠My phone's name - Define a name for your phone. After you ha ve set t he Bluetooth connection as active and c hanged My phon e's visibility to Shown to all , your phone and this name can be seen by other Bluetooth dev ice users. Sen din g da ta via Blu eto oth tec hn olo gy There ca n be only one active Bluet ooth connection at a time. 1. Open an applic ation where the item you wish to send is stored. For example, to send a photo to another devic e, open the Gallery applic ation. 2. Scroll t o the item you want to send and s elect Options â Send â V ia Bluetooth .
183 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 3. The phone starts to s earch for devi ces wit hin range. Dev ices using Bluetooth technology t hat are within range start to appear on th e display one by one. You can s ee a devic e icon, the devic eâÂÂs name, the devic e type, or a short na me. Paired devic es are show n with . A pair ed device is one where a Bluetooth connection alr eady exists between your phone and the ot her device. ⢠To inte r rupt the se arch, pre ss Stop . The device lis t freezes and you can star t to form a connection t o one of t he devices already found. 4. When searching for de vices, some de vices may show only the unique device addresses. To find out the unique address of y our phone, e nter the code *#2820# in standby mode when the Bluetooth connection is active. If you have search ed for devi ces earlier, a list of t he devices that were found previously is shown first. To start a new search, select More device s . If you switch off the phone, the list of devices is cleared and the device search needs to be star ted again bef ore sending dat a. 5. Scroll t o the device yo u want to connect wit h and press Select . The it em you are sending is copied to O utbox and the not e Connec ting is shown. 6. Pairing (if not required by t he other de vice, go to s tep 7.) ⢠If the other device requires pai ring before dat a can be tr ansmitted, a tone sounds and you are asked to ent er a passcode. ⢠Create y our own passc ode (1-16 charact ers long, numeric) a nd agree w ith the owner of the ot her device t o use the s ame code. This passcode is used only once and you do not hav e to memoris e it. ⢠Aft er pairing, the de vice is saved to the Paired de vices vie w.
184 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 7. When the connection has been successfully established, the note Sending data is shown. Data rec eived via Bluetoot h connection can be found in t he Inbox folder in Messaging. See "Inbox - rec eiving messages". Icons for differ ent device s: - Computer , - Phone , - Audio/video , and - Bluetooth device . If sending fails , the me ssage or data are deleted. The Drafts folder in Messaging does not s tore messages sent via Bluetoot h connection. Checking the status of the Bluetooth connection ⢠When is shown in s tandby mode, the Bluetooth connection is active. ⢠When is blinking, your phone is trying to connect to t he other dev ice. ⢠When is s hown continuously, the Bluetoot h connection is a ctive. Paired devices view Paired devices are easier to recognise, they are indica ted by in the sear ch result list. In t he Bluetooth main vie w, move the joys tick to the r ight to open a list of paired devices ( ). ⢠To pa ir wit h a dev ice: Select Options â New paired de vice . The phone starts a device search. Scroll t o the device you w ant to pair with and press Select . Exchange passcodes. The device is added to the Paired devices list. ⢠To c ancel pairing: Scroll to the device whose pairing you want to cancel and press the clear key or select O ptions â Del ete . If you want to cancel all pairings, s elect Options â Delete all .
185 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . If you ar e currently connected t o a devic e, and delete t he pairing with that device, the pairing is removed and t he device connection is terminated, but Bluetooth connection remains active on the hands et. ⢠To set a device to be authorised or unauthorised: Scroll t o the de vice and sel ect Options â Set as authorised - Connections between your phone and this device can be made without yo ur knowledge. N o separate acce ptance or authorisa tion is needed. Use this status only for your own devices t hat others do not have access to, for example your PC, or devices that belong t o someone you trust. The icon is added next to auth orised devices in the Pair ed devices view. Set as unauthorised - Connection request s from this device need to be accept ed separately every time. Receiving data via Bluetooth wireles s techn ology When you receive data v ia Bluetooth wir eless techno logy, a tone sound is played and you are asked if y ou want t o accept t he message. If you acce pt, the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messagin g. Mes sages received v ia Bluetooth tech nology are indicated by . See âÂÂInbox - receiving mes sagesâ on page 100. Discon nec ting Blu e toot h conn ectio n A Bluetooth conne ction is disconne cted automatically after sending or r eceiving data.
186 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Infr are d conn ecti on Select Menu â Connectivityâ I nfra red . Via infrared, you can s end or rece ive data such as business cards and calendar notes to and from a compatible phone or data device. Do not poi nt the IR (infrared) beam at anyone's eye o r allow it to interfere with other IR devices. This device i s a Class 1 las er product. Sending and receiving data via infrared 1. Make sure that the infrared ports of the sending and receiving devices are pointing at each other and that there are no obstructions betwe en the devices. The pref erable d istance between t he two d evices is 1 me tre at most. S e e âÂÂKey s and partsâ on page 26. 2. The us er of the r eceiving dev ice activat es the infrared port . To ac tivate the infrared port of your phone to r eceive da ta via infrar ed, go to Menu â Connectivityâ I nfra red . 3. The us er of the s ending device s elects the des ired infrared f unction to star t da ta tr ans fe r. To s end data via infr ared, select Options â Send â Via infrared in a n application. If data transfer is not s tarted within 1 minut e after the act ivation of the infrared port , the connect ion is cance lled and must be started again. All items t hat are receiv ed via infrared are place d in the Inbox folder in Messaging. New infrared message ar e indicated by .
187 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Tip : Microsoft Windows 2000: T o be able t o use infrared to transfer files between your phone and a compatible computer, go to Control Panel and select Wireless Link. In the Wireless Link File Transfer tab, check the Allow others to send files to your computer us ing infrared. After transferring the files, it is advisable to change ba ck the default settings to pr event unauthorized file transfer. Checking the status of the infrared c onnection ⢠When blinks, y our phone is t rying to connec t to the othe r device or a connection has been lost. ⢠When is shown continuously, the infrared connection is activ e and your phone is ready to send a nd receiv e data via it s infrared port. â Con nection mana ger Select Menu â Connectivityâ Connec tion manager . Options in the Connect ion manager main v iew wh en there are one or mor e connections a re: Details , Disc onnect , D isconnect all , Help and Exit . In the Connection manager, you can identify t he status of multiple data connections, view det ails on the amount of data sent and r eceived, and end unused connect ions. You can v iew details of data connect ions only. Voice calls are not listed. When you open the Connect ion manager, you ca n see a list of: ⢠Open data connections, - Data call , - GPRS . ⢠The s tatus of each connec tion.
188 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Amount of dat a uploaded and downloaded for e ach connection (GPRS connections only). ⢠The durat ion of each connec tion (Data call c onnections only). Note : The actual time invoiced for calls by your s ervice prov ider may vary , dependi ng on netwo rk features , roundin g off for billi ng, and so forth. Vie win g con ne ction det ails To vie w the details of a connect ion, scroll to a connection and select Options â Det ails . The following is displayed: ⢠Name - The name of the Internet Acc ess Point (IAP) in use. ⢠Bearer - The type of da ta connection: Dat a call or GP RS . ⢠Status - The current status of the connection. ⢠Received - The amount of dat a, in bytes , received t o the phone . ⢠Sent - The amount of data, in bytes, sent from the phone. ⢠Durati on - The length of time that the connect ion has been open. ⢠Speed - The current speed of both sending and receiving data in KB/s (kilobytes per second). ⢠Dial-up (GSM) - The dial-up number used, or Name (GPRS) - acces s point name used. ⢠Shared (not displayed if the connection is not shared) - The number of applicat ions using the same connection.
189 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Ending co nnect ions ⢠Scrol l to a connection and select Opti ons â Disconnect to end that co nnect ion only. â¢S e l e c t Options â Disconnect all to close all currently open connections. â Conn ecti ng y ou r ph one to a c o mpati ble co mput er For further information on how t o make a connection to a compatible computer via USB, inf rared or Bluetooth technology, and how to install N okia PC Suite , see the Quick Guide for Nokia PC Suite . For fur ther information on how to use N okia PC Suite, se e the help function on PC Suite or v isit the s upport pages at www.nok ia.com. â Us ing you r phon e as a m odem Select Menu â Connectivityâ Modem . Use your phone as a modem to connect to the Internet wit h a compatible PC, or to send and receive f axes. Detailed insta llation instructions can be found in the PC Suit e user guide. You can find more information about P C Suite and the dow nload link in t he support a rea on the NokiaâÂÂs Web site, <www.nokia.com/support>.
190 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Re mote synch ro nisati on Select Menu â Connectivityâ Sync . The Sy nc application enables you to synchronise your calendar or contacts wit h various c alendar and address book applications on a compati ble computer or on the Internet. Synchronisation takes place over a GSM data call or packet data con nection. The s ynchronisation application us es Sync ML technology f or synchronisation. For information on Sy ncML compatibility, cont act the s upplier of the c alendar or address book a pplication you want to sy nchronise your phone da ta with. Creat ing a ne w sync hron isat ion p rofi le Options in the Remot e sync main vie w are: Synchronise , New sy nc pr ofi le , Edit sync profile , Del ete , View log , Help , and Exit . 1. If no profiles have bee n defined, the phone asks you if you want t o create a new prof ile. Select Ye s . To creat e a new profile in addit ion to existing ones , select Options â New syn c profile . Choose whether you want to use t he default setting values or copy the values f rom an exist ing profile to be used as the basis for the new profile. 2. Define the following: Sync prof ile name - Wr ite a descripti ve name for the profile. Access point - Select an access point you want t o use for the dat a connection.
191 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Host addres s - Contact your service provider or s ystem administrator for the correc t values. Port - Contact your service provider or system a dministrator for t he correct val ue s . User name - Your user ID for the synchronisation server. Contact your service provi der or system adminis trator for your correct ID. Pas s wo rd - Write your pa ssword. Contact your s ervice provider or system administra tor for the co rrect v alue. Move t he joystick t o the right and select the applica tion that yo u wish to synchronise. The av ailable applications that you can synchronise may var y. Contact your service provider for mor e information. 3. Press Do ne to sav e the sett ing s. Sy nchr on isin g da ta In the Sync main view, you can see the diff erent profiles, and what kind of data are sy nchron ised: Calendar, Contacts, or both. 1. In the main view, s croll to a pr ofile and select O ptions â Synchronise . The status of t he synchronisa tion is shown at the bottom of the s creen. To cancel synchronisation before it is f inished, press Cance l . 2. You ar e notified when the synchroni sation has been complet ed.
192 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Aft er synchronisation is complete, select Options â View log to open a log file showing the synchronisation status ( Complete or Incomplete ) and how many calendar or contact entries have been added, updated, deleted, or discarded (not synchronise d) in the phone or on the server.
193 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 13. Troubleshooti ng Memory low When the f ollowing notes are s hown, the phone memory is low a nd you must start to delete some data: Not enough memory to per form operation. Delete s ome data first. or Memory low . Delete s ome data. To view w hat kind of data you have and how much memory the differ ent data groups consume, go to File manager an d sel ect Options â Memory details . You may want t o delete the following items regularly to avoid memory getting low: ⢠Message s from the Inbox, D rafts, and Sent folder s in Messaging. ⢠Retri eved e-mail messages from t he phone memory. ⢠Saved br owser pages. ⢠Images and photos in Images. To dele te contact inf ormation, calendar not es, call t imers, call c ost timers, game scores , or any ot her data, go to the respec tive applica tion to remove th e data. If you ar e deleting multipl e items and another of the following notes are shown: Not enough memor y to perform oper ation. Delete some data fir st. or Memory l ow . Delete some data. try de leting items one by one (starting f rom the smallest it em). Clearing the calendar memory - To remove more than one event at a time, go to the Month view and select O ptions â Dele te en try â and either:
194 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Before da te - to delete all calendar not es which take place bef ore a certain date. Ent er the date bef ore which all calendar notes are delet ed. or ⢠All entries - t o delete all calendar notes. Erasing log information - To eras e all the log contents, Recent calls regis ter, and Messaging deliver y reports permanently, go to Log s and select Options â Clear log or go to Settings â Log duration â No log . Different ways to store data : ⢠Use N okia PC Suite to make a backup copy of all data t o a compat ible computer. ⢠Send images to your e -mail address and t hen save the images t o your computer (network service). ⢠Send dat a via inf rared or Bluetooth tec hnology to a compatible devi ce. ⢠Store da ta on a c ompatible memory card. â Q&A Phone display ⢠Q. Why do missing, discoloured or bright dots appear on t he screen every time I turn on my phone? A. This is a charac teristic of this type of display. Some displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or of f. This is nor mal, not a f ault.
195 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Camera ⢠Q: Why do images look smudgy? A: Check t hat the ca mera lens protection window i s clean. Bluetooth ⢠Q: Why c anâÂÂt I end a Bluet ooth connection? A: If another device is connected to your phone, you can either end the connection us ing the other device or by deactiva ting Bluetooth. Sele ct Bluetooth and s elect the sett ing Bluetooth â Off . ⢠Q: Why c anâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs Bluetooth-enable d device. A: Check t hat both you and your friend hav e activated Bluetooth. Check th at the distanc e between the two devices is not over 10 metres or that there a re no wal ls or other obs tructions between the device s. Check that the other device is not in âÂÂHiddenâ mode. Check th at both devic es are compatible. Multimedia messaging ⢠Q: What should I do w hen the phone tells me that it cannot receive a multimedia message because the memory is full? A: The amount of memory needed is indicated in the error me ssage: Not enough memory t o retrieve mes sage. Delete some data fi rst. T o v i e w w h a t k i n d of data you have and how much memory t he different data groups consume , go to File manager and selec t Options â Memory details .
196 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Q: Ho w can I end the data conne ction when the phone starts a data connection again and again? The brief not es on the displ ay state that t he phone is retrieving or try ing to retrieve a message. What is happening? A: The phone is trying to r etrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia messaging ce ntre. Check that the settings for multimedia mes saging have b een defined correctly and t hat there are no mistakes in phone numbers or a ddresses. Select Messaging and select Options â Settings â Multimedia message . To s top the phone fr om making a data c onnection, y ou have the f ollowing options. Sele ct Messa gi ng and select Options â Settings â Multimedia message , and then: â¢S e l e c t On receiving msg. â Defe r retr ieval if you want the multimedia messaging ce ntre to s ave the message to be retrieved la ter, for e xample, after you have check ed the s ettings. After this change, the phone still need s to send info rmation notes to the network . To retrieve t he message lat er, sel ect Retr . imme diately . â¢S e l e c t On receiving msg. â Reject message - if you want to reject a ll incoming multimedia messages. After this change, the phone needs to send information notes to the network and the multimedia-messaging centre deletes a ll multimedia messa ges that are waiting to be sent to you. â¢S e l e c t Multimedia reception â Off - if you want to ignore a ll incoming multimedia messages. After this change, the phone will not mak e any network connections relat ed to multimedia me ssaging.
197 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Messaging ⢠Q: W hy can âÂÂt I s elect a con tact? A: If you c anno t sele ct a con tact i n the C ontac ts dire ctory , the cont act ca rd does not ha ve a phone number or an e-ma il address. Add the missing information t o the contact card in th e Contacts applicat ion. Calendar ⢠Q: Wh y are the week numbers missing? A: If you have changed the Calendar s ettings so tha t the week starts on a day other than Monday, then the we ek numbers are not shown. Browser Services â¢Q : No valid acces s point defined. Define one in Web settings. A: Insert proper browser set tings. Contact your s ervice provider for instructions. Log ⢠Q: Wh y does the log appear to be empty? A: You may h ave activated a filter, and no communication events fitting that filter have been logged. To see all events , select Options â Filter â All communication . PC connectivity ⢠Q: Why do I have problems in connec ting the phone to my PC? A: Make sure that Nokia PC Suite is installed and running on your PC. See the Quick Guide for Nokia PC Suit e . For f urther information on how to use Nok ia
198 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . PC Suite, se e the help function on PC Suite or v isit the s upport pages at www.nok ia.com/support. Access c odes ⢠Q: What is my password for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes? A: The default lock c ode is 123 45 . If you forget or lose the lock code, cont act your phone dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PU K code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network s ervice pr ovider. For inf ormation about passwor ds, contact your ac cess point provide r, for example, a commercial Int ernet Service Provider (ISP), ser vice provider, or network operator. Application not responding ⢠Q: How do I close an application th at is not r esponding? A: Open the application swit ching window by pressing and holding . Then scroll to t he applicat ion, and press t he clear key to close t he application.
199 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 14. Battery in form ati on â Charg ing and Di schar gi ng Your phon e is powe red by a re cha rgeab le b atter y. Note that a new battery's full performance is achie ved only after two or three complete charge and discharg e cycles! The battery can be charged and di scharged hundreds o f times but it will eve ntu ally wear out. When the operatin g time (talk-ti me and standb y time) is noticeably s horter than normal , it is time to buy a new ba ttery. Use only batt eries approve d by the p hone manu facture r and rec harge your batte ry only with the c harge rs ap prove d by the m anufa cturer. U nplug the cha rger whe n not in use . Do no t leave the ba tter y connecte d to a charg er for l onger than a week, si nce ove rcharg ing may shorten its lifet ime. If l eft unus ed a fully ch arged ba ttery will discharg e itsel f over ti me. Temperature e xtremes ca n affect the abil ity of your batter y to charge. Use the battery only for its intended purpos e. Never use any charger or batte ry which is damaged. Do not short-circui t the battery. Ac cid ental short -circuiting can oc cur when a metalli c obj ect (coin, cl ip o r pen) cause s dire ct conn ecti on of t he and - term inals of t he bat tery (metal strips on the battery) for example when you ca rry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short- circuitin g the terminals may damage the battery o r the connect ing object. Leaving the batte ry in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in s ummer or winter conditions, w ill reduce the capacity and li fetime of the b attery. Alw ays try to keep the battery between 1 5ðC and 25ðC (5 9ðF and 77ðF). A phone with a hot or cold ba ttery may
200 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . temporarily not work, even wh en the battery is fully charged. Batteries' performance is particula rly lim ited in temp eratu res well below freez ing. Do not dis pos e of b atte ries in a fir e! Dispose of bat teries accordin g to local regula tions (e.g . recycling) . Do not dispose a s hous ehold w aste. â Nokia batter y authent icat ion guideli nes Always use orig inal Nokia b atteries for your safety. To check th at you are gett ing an original Nokia battery, purchase it from an autho rized Nokia dealer, look for the Nokia Original Enhancements logo on the p ackagi ng and inspect th e holo gram label us ing the fo llowin g ste ps: Successful completio n of the four step s is not a tota l assurance of the authenti city of the battery. If you have any reason to belie ve that your bat tery is not an authenti c original Nokia battery, yo u should refra in fr om using it and tak e it to the ne arest autho rized Noki a service point or dealer fo r assistance . Your authori zed Nokia servi ce point or de aler will in spect the battery for authentici ty. If a uthenticity cannot be verified , return the bat tery to the place of pur ch ase Auth enti ca te hol ogr am 1. When looki ng at the holo gram label , you shoul d see the Nokia connectin g hands symbol fr om one angle a nd the Nokia O riginal Enhanceme nts logo whe n look ing from ano ther ang le.
201 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 2. When you angle the hologram to the left, righ t, down, and up side s of t he logo , you should see 1, 2, 3, and 4 dots on eac h side respectively. 3. Sc rat ch the side o f th e label to re veal a 20-d igit code, fo r examp le 123456 789198765 43210. Turn the batte ry so that t he num bers are faci ng upwa rds. The 20-digi t cod e reads starti ng from the number at the top row follo wed by the bottom row. 4. C onfirm that the 20-d igit co de i s valid by fo llowin g the instructions at www.nokia.co m/batterychec k. To create a te xt messa ge, en ter the 20 -digit code for ex ample 123456 789198765 43210 and sen d to 44 7786 20027 6. Nat iona l and intern ati onal opera tor ch arge s wi ll apply . You s hould re ceive a message i ndicating whether t he cod e can be authentica ted. What if battery is not authentic? If you cannot confirm tha t your Nokia battery with the h ologram on the labe l is an authentic Nokia battery, please do not use th e battery. Ta ke it to the neares t author ized Nokia s ervice point or dealer fo r assista nce. The u se of a bat tery that is not approved by the manufa cturer
202 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . may be d ange rous an d ma y res ult i n poor perfo rmanc e a nd da mage t o your devi ce a nd its enhancements . It may also i nvalidat e any approva l or warranty appl ying to the device. To find out more about or iginal Nokia batteries, vi sit www.nok ia.com/ba ttery.
203 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Care and Mainte nance You r dev ice is a pr od uct of s upe ri or des i gn an d c raf ts ma nsh ip an d sho ul d be tre at e d wi th care. The suggestions below h elp you protect your warranty covera ge. ⢠Kee p the d evice dry. Precip itatio n, humidi ty a nd all types of liqu ids o r moist ure ca n contain mi nerals t hat corrode el ectronic ci rcuits . If yo ur device does g et wet, remove th e batt ery and a llo w the de vic e to dr y co mple tely be fore repl acing it. ⢠Do not us e or s tore the de vice i n du sty, d irty a reas . Its moving part s an d elect ron ic co mpon ents can be d ama ged. ⢠D o not store the d evice in hot a reas. High tempera tures can shorten th e lif e of elect ronic de vices, dama ge b atterie s, and war p or m elt ce rtai n pl astics. ⢠D o not store the devi ce in cold areas. When the de vice returns to its normal temperature, mo isture can form i nsid e the d evice and d ama ge el ectron ic ci rcuit boards . ⢠D o not attemp t to open the dev ice other than as instructe d in this guide. ⢠D o not drop, knock, o r shake the device. Ro ugh handling can brea k internal circuit b oards and fi ne mec han ics . ⢠Do not use harsh chem icals, cleaning s olvents , or stron g dete rgents to clean the devic e. ⢠Do not pa int t he dev ice. Paint c an cl og th e movi ng part s an d pr event pr oper ope ration. ⢠U se a soft, clean, dry cloth to clea n any lense s (such as camera, proximity se nsor, and light s ensor l enses). ⢠Use only the suppl ied or an a pprov ed re place ment antenn a. U naut horise d ant ennas, mo dificat ions , or at tachme nts co uld d amage the de vice a nd m ay viola te reg ulat ions gov ernin g radio devices.
204 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . All of the abov e suggesti ons apply equal ly to your device, b attery, ch arger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, t ake it to the nearest a uthorize d service facility for service.
205 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Add itiona l safet y inform ation â Operat ing envi r onment Remember to f ollow any spe cial regula tions in fo rce in any are a and always switch off your device whe n its use is proh ibited or w hen it may cause i nterfere nce or d anger. Use the devic e only in its norma l opera ting posi tions. To maintain complian ce with rad io frequency exposur e guidel ines only u se enhan cements approved by Nokia for u se with this device. Wh en the device is on and being w orn on the body, alwa ys u se an a ppro ved hold er or carrying case. Parts of the device a re magnetic. Metalli c materials may be attract ed to the device , and pers o ns wi t h a hea r ing a i d sho ul d no t ho ld th e dev ic e to the ea r wit h th e h ear in g ai d. Alw ays secure the devi ce in its hold er, becaus e metalli c mate rials may be at tracted by th e earpi ece. Do n ot p la ce cr ed it c ar ds or o t her ma gn eti c s to rag e med ia ne ar th e de vic e, b eca use informatio n stored on them ma y be erased. â Medical devic es Ope ration of a ny ra dio tra nsmi tting e quipme nt, i nclud ing wir eles s phon es, may inter fere with the functi onality o f inadeq uately pr otected med ical device s. Con sult a physici an or the manufacturer of the med ical de vice to determin e if the y are adequ ately shi elded fr om external RF energ y or if you have any q uestions. Switch off your device in health care facilitie s when an y regulatio ns posted in thes e areas in struct yo u to do so. H ospital s or health care f aciliti es may be using equ ipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy . Pacemaker s Pacemaker manu facture rs recommend that a mini mum separatio n of 6 in. (15.3 cm) be mai ntaine d be tween a wi reless pho ne an d a pa cemak er to a void p ote ntial interfe renc e wit h
206 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . the pacemaker. These recommenda tions are consi stent with the i ndependen t research b y and recommendat ions of Wire less Tec hnology Re search. Persons wi th pacemaker s should: ⢠a lways keep the device more th an 6 in. (15. 3 cm) from their pacema ker when the device is switched on; ⢠not ca rry th e dev ice i n a bre ast pock et; an d ⢠hol d the devi ce t o the e ar opp os ite the pac emake r to m ini mise the pot enti al for interference. If you have any reason to sus pect that inte rference is tak ing place, switch off your device immediately. Hearing a ids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with so me hearing aids. If interference occurs, consu lt your servi ce provide r. â Vehicl es RF signals may affect impro perly inst alled or inadequate ly shie lded electro nic syste ms in motor vehicl es such as el ectronic fu el inje ction systems , elect ronic an tiskid (antilock) br aking sys tem s, ele ct ronic spe ed c ontrol sy stem s, ai r ba g sy stem s. Fo r mor e i nform atio n, check with the ma nufactur er or its rep resentati ve of your ve hicle or any equipmen t that has be en adde d. Only qualif ied perso nnel shoul d service th e device, or install the d evice in a vehicle. Fau lty installatio n or servi ce may be dangero us and may in validate any warranty that ma y apply to the device. Ch eck regula rly that all w ireless de vice equip ment in your vehic le is mounted and op eratin g pr operl y. Do n ot stor e or ca rry flam mabl e liq uids , gase s, or ex plosi ve ma ter ials in the same compar tment as th e device, it s parts, or enh ancemen ts. For vehicle s equippe d with an air b ag, remember that air bags inflate with great fo rce. Do not place objects, incl udin g inst alle d or po rt able w irel ess equipm ent in the area over the a ir b ag or in th e air
207 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . bag deploy ment area . If in- vehicl e wireles s equipmen t is imp roperl y installe d and the air b ag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your de vice while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operatio n of the airc raft, d isrupt the w ireless telepho ne network, and may be ille gal. â Potent iall y expl osive envi ronm ents Switch off your device when in any area with a pot entially ex plosive a tmosph ere and obey all signs and instr uctions. Po tentiall y explo sive atmos phere s include are as where yo u would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engin e. Sparks in s uch areas could cause an explosion or fire res ulting in bodily injury or even death. Sw itch off the device at refuelling poi nts such as near g as pum ps at serv ice sta tion s. O bserv e re stri ction s o n the use of ra dio eq uipmen t in fuel depots , sto rage, and distr ibuti on are as, ch emi cal pl ants o r wh ere b lasti ng operatio ns are in pr ogress . Areas wit h a potenti ally exp losive atmo sphere a re often but not always clea rly mark ed. They in clude b elow deck on bo ats, che mical tran sfer or s torag e fac ilities , vehi cles usi ng liqu efie d petro leum g as (s uch as prop ane o r butane ), and area s where the air co ntains chemicals or particle s such as grain , dust or me tal powders . â Safet y infor mati on about vi deo games About photosensitive seizures A ve ry s mall percen tage o f peop le ma y e xperie nce a sei zure whe n expo sed t o c ertai n visua l images, in cluding fla shing lig hts or patter ns that may a ppear in vide o games. Eve n people who have n o histor y of seizure s or epil epsy may have an und iagnosed co nditi on that c an cause pho tosens itive epi leptic seiz ures whil e watch ing video g ames. Th ese seizure s may have a variety of symp toms, i ncluding l ighthead edness, al tered vi sion, eye or face twitching , jerking or s haking of arms or legs, disorien tation , confusi on, or momenta ry loss of
208 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . awar enes s. Sei zur es may a lso cau se loss of con sci ou sne ss or co nvu lsi on s tha t c an l ead t o injury fr om falling down or stri king nearby o bjects. Immedi ately stop playing and consult a doct or if you exp erienc e any of thes e sympt oms. Adults who allo w teenagers (or chil dren) to pla y the games sho uld watch for or ask their children about these sy mptoms as they are more like ly than adu lts to expe rience the se seizure s. The ris k of photose nsitive ep ilept ic seizu res may be re duced by pla ying in a wel l-lit room and by no t playi ng whe n yo u are drowsy or fa tigued . If y ou or a ny of yo ur re lativ es have a history of s eizures or epile psy, consul t a doctor before pl aying. Play saf ely Take a bre ak f rom pla ying ga me s at l east ev ery ha lf hour . Stop play ing immedi ately if you begi n to feel tired of i f you exp erience an unp leasant sens ation o r pain i n your ha nds an d/or arms. If the co nditio n persist s, consult a docto r. Use o f vibration can aggr avate injurie s. Do not turn vib ration on if y ou have a ny ailment in the b ones or joi nts of yo ur fingers, hands, wri sts, or a rms. â Emergen cy ca lls Imp ort an t: Wireles s phon es, inc luding this de vic e, opera te u sing r adio si gnals, wireles s network s, landli ne networks , and u ser-prog rammed functions. Because of this, co nnections in all cond itions can not b e guarante ed. You s hould ne ver rely solely o n any wireles s device for es sential communicatio ns like med ical emerge ncies . To mak e an e mergency call: 1. I f the device is not on, switch it o n. Check for adequate signal streng th. Some network s may require that a valid SI M card is prop erly inserted in the device.
209 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 2. Pr ess th e end key as many times as nee ded to clear the disp lay and ready the d evice for calls. 3. Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Eme rgency numbers vary by lo cat ion. 4. Pr ess th e ca ll ke y . If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency cal l. If the dev ice is in off line or fli ght mode you must cha nge the profil e to activate the phone function before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service pro vider for more information. When making an emergency call , give all the necessary i nformation as ac curately as possible. Y our wirel ess device ma y be the only mea ns of communica tion at th e scene of a n acc ident. Do no t end the call un til gi ven per miss ion to do so. â Ce rtif icat ion inf orm ati on (SAR ) THIS DEVICE MEETS INTE RNATIONAL GU IDELINES FOR EXPO SURE TO RADIO WAVES Your mobile device is a rad io trans mitter and receiver. It is designed and manu factu red not to exceed the lim its for exposur e to radio frequency (RF) recommen ded by intern atio nal guideli nes (ICNI RP). Thes e limi ts are part o f compreh ensive g uidelin es and esta blish permitte d levels of RF en ergy for th e genera l populati on. Th e guidel ines were deve loped by inde pe nd en t sc ien ti fi c or g anis at ions t hr oug h pe ri od ic an d t hor ou gh eva lu ati on of sci e nt ifi c studies. The guid elines inclu de a su bstanti al safet y margin de signed t o assure th e safety of all perso ns, regardless of age and health. The exposu re standard for mobile devices emplo ys a unit of measureme nt known as the Specifi c Absorpt ion Rate, or SAR. The S AR limit st ated in th e interna tion al guide lines is 2.0 W/kg*. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard op erating positi ons with the device tra nsmit ting a t its hi ghes t certi fied power level in all test ed fre quency b ands. Alth ough th e SA R is de termi ned at the high est c ertifi ed po wer l evel, t he a ctual SA R of the device whi le
210 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . operatin g can be well belo w the maxi mum value. Th is is becaus e the device is designed to operate at mu ltip le power leve ls so as to u se only the p ower requ ired to rea ch the networ k. In general, the clo ser you ar e to a base station, the low er the power output of the d evic e. T h e h i gh e st S AR valu e f or th is d ev ice wh en te s ted f or u s e at th e e ar is 0 . 39 W /k g. This device meets RF exp osure gui del ines when used eit her in the normal use positio n again st t he ear o r when pos iti oned at le ast 2.2 cm away f rom the bo dy. When a carr y cas e, bel t cl ip or h ol de r is us ed for bod y- wo rn ope ra tio n, it sh oul d n ot con ta in met al and s h ould pos ition the pr oduct at le ast 2.2 c m away fr om y our body . In order to transmit d ata files or me ssages, thi s device requires a qu ality connectio n to the network. In so me cases, tr ansmis sion of dat a files or messages may b e delayed un til such a connection is ava ilable. Ensure the above sepa ration dista nce instru ctions are followed until the trans mission is comp leted. * T he SAR limit for mobil e dev ices use d by the pu blic i s 2.0 w atts/ kilog ram ( W/kg) avera ged over ten grams of bod y tissue . Th e guidel ines i ncorp orate a su bstant ial marg in of saf ety to gi ve addit ional p rotec tion for the publ ic and to acco unt for any v ariati ons in m easur ements. SA R value s may vary dependi ng on nationa l re porting requi rement s and the ne twork band. For SAR informa tion in other reg ions look under product informa tion at www.no kia.com.
DECLARATIO N OF CONFORMITY We, NO KIA CORPO RATI ON dec la re und er ou r so le re spons ibi li ty that th e pr oduct R M-51 is i n con for mit y with the prov isi on s of the fo ll owin g Counc il Dir ect ive :199 9/5/ EC. A copy of the Decl ar ati on of Con for mit y can be foun d at ht tp:/ /w ww. nok ia. com /ph on es/ decl ar atio n_ of_ con for mit y/ Copy right é 20 05 No kia. Al l righ ts rese rved. Reprodu cti on, tr ansf er, d ist rib uti on or stor age of par t or all o f th e co nten ts i n thi s d ocume nt in any for m without the prior written permission of Nokia is prohibited. Nokia, Nokia Conne cting People, Pop-Port and Xpress-o n are regi stered tr ademarks of Noki a Corporation. Other produ ct and c ompa ny nam es me ntio ned h ere in may be t ra demar ks or tr aden ames of th eir res pe cti ve ow ner s . Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. This produc t in clud es softw are lic ens ed from Sym bian S oftwa re L td. é 199 8-20 05. Symb ian an d Symbi an O S a re tr adema rk s of S ymb ian Ltd. Java⢠and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademark s of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Stac î, LZS î, é19 96, Sta c, Inc ., é1994 -199 6 Mic rosoft Corp oration . Inclu des o ne or mo re U.S . Pate nts: No . 47017 45, 5 01600 9, 5 12673 9, 5 14622 1, and 5 414 425. O ther p atent s pen ding. Hi/fn î, LZS î,é198 8- 98, H i/fn. In clud es on e or m ore U. S. Paten ts: N o. 4701 74 5, 5016 009, 5126 739, 51 462 21, a nd 54 14425 . Other patent s pen ding .Par t of the s oftwar e i n this prod uct is é Copyr ight A NT Lt d. 199 8. All rig hts reserved.m-Router Connectivity Components é 2000-2002 Intuwav e Limited. A ll rights reserved. (www.intuwave.com) US Patent No 58184 37 and oth er pend ing pat ents . T9 text inpu t softw are Copy righ t (C) 1997-2 004. Te gic Comm unications, Inc. All rights reserved. Bluet ooth is a r egi ster ed t rade mark o f B luet ooth SIG, I nc.
Nokia oper ate s a po licy of conti n uous devel opm ent. Noki a r eser ves th e r ig ht to make ch an ges an d impro veme nts t o a ny of the pr oduc ts desc ribe d in this doc ument with out prio r not ice . Un der n o circ umsta nce s sh all N oki a be re spo nsibl e for an y los s of d ata or inc ome or a ny sp ecial, inci den tal, c on seque nti al or in dir ect da mage s how soev er c ause d. T h e c o n t e n t s o f t h i s d o c u m e n t a r e p r ov i d e d â a s i s â . E x c e p t a s r e q u i r e d b y a p p l i c a b l e l a w , n o w a r r a n ti e s o f an y kin d, e ithe r exp res s or i mpli ed, inclu din g, bu t no t li mite d to, th e imp lie d warra nt ies of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpos e, are made in relation to the accuracy, reliability or contents of this document. Nokia reserves the right to revise this document or withdraw it at any time without prior notice. The av aila bili ty of par tic ular prod uc ts ma y vary by re gion . Ch eck w ith th e Nok ia d eale r nea rest to you . Issu e 1 EN , 92 34625
4 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Content For your safety ..................................................... ............................................. 14 General information ............... .............................. ............................................. 18 Sticke rs in the sales packag e .......................... ................................. ................ ....................... ......... ..... 18 Acce ss codes ........ ................................ ................ ................................. .......................... ...................... ..... 18 PIN co de ............................. ................................ ................. ................................ ......... ....... ..................... 18 PIN2 code .......... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ........... ..................... ..... 18 Lock code ........... ................................ ................................. ................ .......................... ...... ................ ..... 19 PUK a nd PU K2 code s ...... ................................ ................. ................................ ...................... ............... 19 1. Getting started ............................................................................... ............... 20 Inserti ng a SIM card and a MultiMedi aCard ............................................... ................................ ..... 2 0 Removi ng the Multime dia card during phon e operation......... ................................ ................ ..... 23 Chargi ng the b attery ......... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ . .................... 23 Switc hing th e phone on and off .................... ................. ................................ ............................ ......... 24 2. Your phone........................................................ .............................. ............... 26 Keys and parts ..................................... ................ ................................. ........................... ..................... ..... 26 Esse ntial indica tors ............................................ ................................. ................ .............. .................. ..... 29 Keyp ad lock (Keyguard) .... ................................ ................. ................................ .................... ................. 30 Me nu ..................... ................................ ................................. ................ .................... ............ ................ ..... 30 Acti ons commo n to all app lications ............. ................................. ................................ ............... . ..... 32 Volum e control .................... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ..................... 34 Help ........................ ................................ ................................. ................ .................. .............. ................ ..... 35
5 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 3. Call functions ................................................... .............................. ............... 36 Making a voic e cal l ............ ................................ ................................. ................ ............... ................. ..... 36 Speed dialling a phone num ber .................. ................. ................................ ............................... ...... 37 Making a confer ence call (network service) ............................. ................ ................................ ..... 37 Answe ring or rejecting a call .......................... ................. ................................ ....................... ......... ..... 38 Call waiting (net work service) ..... ................................. ................................ ................ ........... .......... 38 Options during a call ...... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ... .................. 39 Push to talk .......... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ........ ........................ ..... 39 Settin gs for push to talk ............... ................................. ................................ ................ ..................... 40 Connecti ng to th e pus h to t alk service ..... ................................. ................................ ................ ... .. 41 Making a pus h to talk call ............ ................................. ................................ ........................ ........ ..... 42 Rece iving a p ush to talk ca ll .... ................ ................................. ................................ ............. ... ..... 43 Callback reques ts ............ ................................ ................................. ................ ................. ............... ..... 43 Sendi ng a callback reques t ....................... ................................. ................ ................................ ..... 43 Saving the ca llback request sen der ........ ................................. ................................ ................ .... . 44 Using group s ..................... ................ ................................. ................................ ............. ... ................ ..... 44 Addi ng a group ............. ................................ ................. ................................ ................... .................. 45 Joining an ex isting group .......... ................ ................................. ................................ ........... ..... ..... 45 Rece iving an i nvitation .............................. ................................. ................ ......................... ............ 46 Call regi ster and general log ........................... ................................. ................ ...................... ............... 47 Recent calls regis ter ....................... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ..... 47 Call d uration ..... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ............ .................... ..... 48 Viewing the gene ral log ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ....... .............. 48 GPRS d ata cou nter.......... ................................ ................. ................................ ................... ............. ..... 50 4. Writing text ........................ ............................................................ ............... 51 Using tradition al text input ............. ................................. ................ ................................ ..... ................ 51 Using predicti ve text i nput .............. ................ ................................. ................................ ..... ........... ..... 52 Tips for wri ting text ........................... ................................. ................................ .............. .. ..................... 53 Copy ing text to the clipbo ard ......................... ................................. ................ ........................ ............. 54
6 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 5. Personal information........................................ .............................. ............... 56 Cont acts ................................ ................................ ................................. ................ ...... .......... ..................... 56 Managi ng contacts ......................... ................................. ................................ ................ ..................... 56 Adding a ring ing ton e .................... ................................. ................................ ................ ..... ................ 57 Voice d ialling .... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ............ .................... ..... 58 Addi ng a voice tag to a phone number . ................................. ................................ ................ ..... 58 Making a ca ll by s aying a voice t ag ........................ ................................ ................................ .... . 59 Assigni ng speed-dialling keys ..... ................................. ................................ ................ ............ ......... 59 Prese nce ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ...... ......... ................. ..... 60 Changing y our availability in formation .... ................................. ................................ ................ .... . 61 Changing wh o can view your Presence information ............................. ................................ ..... 61 Publi c viewe rs ............... ................................ ................. ................................ ................. ............... ..... 62 Privat e viewe rs ............................. ................................. ................................ ................ .. ................... 63 Blocke d viewers............ ................ ................................. ................................ ................... .................. 64 Upda ting your Presenc e informa tion ........ ................................. ................................ .................... . 64 Presence set tings ............ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ..................... 65 Positi oning ............................ ................ ................................. ................................ ....... ......... ..................... 66 Calen dar ................................ ................................ ................................. ...................... .......... ..................... 66 Creating c alendar entries ............................. ................................. ................................ ................ ..... 67 Calendar views . ................................ ................ ................................. ............................... . ................ ..... 68 To-do ...... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................... ............. ..................... 69 Impo rting data from compat ible phones ...................... ................ ................................ .................... . 70 6. Media .................................. .............................. ............................................. 71 Galle ry.................... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ... ............................. ..... 71 Openin g files..... ................................ ................ ................................. ............................ .................... ..... 72 Other default folders ...................... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ..... 72 Picture m essages folder ............. ................................. ................................ ................ .......... ........... 72 Wallp apers folde r ........ ................................ ................. ................................ ..................... ........... ..... 73
7 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Prese nce log os folder.................. ................................. ................ ................................ ....... .............. 73 Downlo ading files ........... ................................ ................................. ................ .................. .............. ..... 73 Upload ing ima ges to a n ima ge server ....... ................. ................................ ................................ .... . 74 Came ra................................... ................................ ................................. ................ ..... ........................... ..... 74 Taking a picture or record ing a video cl ip ................ ................................ ................ ..................... 75 Nig ht mode.... ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ..................... 76 Self timer ....... ................................ ................................. ................................ ................ ..................... 76 Camera s ettings ............................... ................................. ................ ................................ ..................... 76 Viewing image s ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ................ ..... 78 Zoo ming on a saved imag e ....... ................................. ................................ ................ ............... ...... 79 Shortcut s du ring zoomi ng......................... ................................. ................ ............................. ... ..... 79 Visual R adio.......................... ................................ ................. ................................ ........ ........ ..................... 79 Turning o n the radio....... ................ ................................. ................................ ................... .................. 81 Tuning and savi ng a radio channel ............................. ................................ ................................ . .... 82 Using the radio ................................................ ................................. ............................... ................ . ..... 82 Using the chan nel list .................... ................................. ................ ................................ ................ ..... 83 Chann el setu p ............................... ................................. ................ ................................ .. ................... 84 View Vis ual Cont ent ....... ................................ ................. ................................ .................... ............ ..... 85 Visual R adio settings ...... ................................ ................. ................................ ................... .................. 86 Channel Direc tory ........... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ..................... 86 Acce ss to Channel Directory throug h Visual Radio button ............................. ................ ..... 87 Acce ss to C hannel D irectory through o ptions List ............ ................................ ..................... 87 Rea lPlayer⢠.......................... ................................ ................................. ................ ......... ....................... ..... 88 Playing media files .......................... ................................. ................ ................................ . ............... ..... 89 Shortcut s du ring play ................................. ................................. ................ ........................ ........ ..... 90 Changing t he settings.... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ..................... 90 Movie Director ..... ................................ ................................. ................ ........................... ..... ..................... 91 Settin gs .............. ................................ ................ ................................. ........................ ........................ ..... 93
8 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 7. Messaging ........................... ............................................................ ............... 94 Writi ng and sending m essages ....................... ................................. ................ ........................... .......... 96 Settin gs for multimedia ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ..................... 98 Settin gs for e-mail.......... ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ..... 98 Inbox - re ceivin g messages ............................. ................................. ................................ ....... ......... .. 100 Viewing m ultimedia ob jects ........ ................................. ................ ................................ .................. 100 Receivi ng smart messages ............................ ................. ................................ .......................... ........ 101 Receivi ng service messages .......................... ................. ................................ .......................... ...... .. 102 My fo lders ............ ................................ ................................. ................ ....................... ......... .................. 102 Mailbo x.. ................................ ................................ ................. ................................ ..... ........................... .. 103 Retrievin g e-mail messages from th e mailbox ........................ ................ ................................ .. 104 Deleting e-mail m essage s............. ................................. ................................ ......................... ......... 105 Outbo x ... ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ..... ........... .................. 106 Viewing mess ages on a SIM c ard.................................... ................ ................................ ............. ..... 107 Cell broad cast ...... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ .......... ...................... .. 107 Service command editor ................... ................................. ................ ................................ ..... ............. 108 Me ssaging s ettings ............................ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ .. 108 Text messages .. ................................ ................ ................................. ............................... ................... 108 Multim edia messages .................... ................................. ................................ ................ ....... ........... 109 E-mail messages .............................. ................................. ................ ................................ . ............... .. 111 Settings for M ailboxe s ............... ................ ................................. ................................ ......... ....... .. 111 Service messa ges ............................. ................ ................................. ................................ . ............... .. 113 Cell br oadcast .................................. ................ ................................. .............................. .................... 114 Settin gs for the Other folder ....................... ................................. ................................ ................ .. 114 Chat ........................................ ................ ................................. ................................ .. .............. .................. 115 Connecti ng to a chat server ......................... ................................. ................ .......................... ...... .. 115 Modify ing your c hat se ttings ...... ................................. ................ ................................ ............ ...... 116 Joining and le aving a chat gro up ............... ................. ................................ ............................... ... 116 Searc hing for ch at gr oups and users ......... ................. ................................ ................................ .. 117
9 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Chatting in a c hat g roup ............................................... ................................ ................ ........ .......... 118 Record ing mes sages.................... ................ ................................. ................................ ........ ........ .. 119 Blocki ng me ssages ...................... ................................. ................................ ................ ....... ........... 119 Starting and viewing i ndividu al conv ersation s ....... ................................ ................................ .. 119 Chat contac ts ................... ................ ................................. ................................ .............. .. .................. 120 Creating a new c hat group ........................................... ................................ ................ .................. 121 Editi ng chat group setting s ...................... ................................. ................ ................................ .. 122 Restric ting access to a chat group .......................................... ................................ ................ .. 122 Chat and Prese nce servers ............ ................ ................................. ................................ ......... ....... .. 123 8. Tools ...... ............................................................ ........................................... 124 Appl ications ......... ................................ ................................. ................ ......................... ....... ................ .. 124 Downlo ading an applicat ion ........................ ................................. ................................ ............ .... .. 125 Installing an applicatio n ............... ................................. ................................ ...................... ............ 126 Instal ling a J avaâ¢appli cation ... ................................. ................................ ................ .............. .... 127 Launching a n application ............. ................................. ................................ ......................... ....... .. 128 Othe r options available for an application or applic ation set ......................... .................. 128 Memory status fo r applica tions .................. ................................. ................................ .............. .. .. 129 Removin g an application .............. ................................. ................................ ................ ......... ......... 129 File manager ........ ................................ ................................. ................ .......................... ...... ................ .. 129 Receivi ng files via Infrared ........................... ................................. ................................ ....... ......... .. 130 Viewing m emory consumpti on.... ................................. ................................ ................ ................ .. 130 Voic e commands ................. ................................ ................................. ................ ............... ................. .. 131 Adding a vo ice com mand to an a pplication ............................. ................ ................................ .. 132 Starting an application using a voic e command .... ................ ................................ .................. 133 Replayi ng, erasing, or chang ing a voice comman d ................ ................ ................................ .. 133 Dev ice manage r................................... ................ ................................. ............................. ................... .. 134
10 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 9. Personalising your phone ................................. ........................................... 136 Profil es ... ................................ ................................ ................................. ................ ... ............................. .. 136 Themes ... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ..................... ........... .................. 137 Settings ................................. ................ ................................. ................................ ..... ........... .................. 139 Changing ge neral setting s ............................ ................................. ................ ......................... ......... 139 Phone settings ................. ................................ ................................. ................ ............... . .................. 139 Call s ettings ...... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ........... ..................... .. 141 Connecti on settings ....................................... ................................. ................ ................................ .. 143 Acce ss point s ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................. .............. . .. 143 GPRS ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ .......... ..... ................. .. 146 Data c all ......................................... ................................. ................ ............................ .... ................ .. 147 Date a nd time .................. ................................ ................................. ................ ............... ................... 148 Security .............. ................................ ................................. ................................ ........ ........ .................. 149 Phon e and SIM ............................................. ................. ................................ .................... .............. 149 Certi ficate manageme nt............ ................ ................................. ................................ ............ .... .. 150 Call b arring ....................... ................................ ................................. ................ ........... ..................... .. 152 Network ............. ................ ................................ ................................. .......................... ...................... .. 153 Enhanc ement .................. ................ ................................. ................................ ................ .................. 153 Go to....................... ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ .. 154 10.Extras ............................................................... ........................................... 156 Not es ...... ................ ................................ ................................. ................................ ... ............. .................. 156 Calc ulator ............................. ................ ................................. ................................ ....... ......... ................ .. 156 Conv erter .............................. ................ ................................. ................................ ....... ......... .................. 158 Converti ng units .............. ................................ ................. ................................ ................ .................. 158 Settin g a base currency and ex change ra tes ........................... ................ ................................ .. 159 Record er ................................................ ................ ................................. ...................... .......... .................. 160 Clock ....... ................................ ................................ ................. ................................ .. .............. .................. 160 Changing c lock settings ................ ................................. ................................ ................ .................. 160
11 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Settin g an ala rm .............................. ................................. ................ ................................ ................ .. 161 Person alising the alarm tone ................... ................. ................................ ............................... ... 161 Memo ry card ........ ................................ ................ ................................. ........................... ..... ................ .. 162 Formatting the me mory c ard....... ................ ................................. ................................ ............. ... .. 163 Backing up and restoring informa tion ....................... ................................ ................ .................. 1 63 Locking the me mory c ard ............. ................................. ................ ................................ .......... ........ 163 Unlock ing a memory card ......... ................................. ................................ .............................. .. .. 164 Checkin g memory consumpt ion . ................ ................................. ................................ .................. 164 Wallet ................... ................................ ................................. ................ .................... ............ ................ .. 164 Entering the w allet code ............................... ................. ................................ ....................... ........... 165 Storing persona l card details ....... ................................. ................................ ................ .......... ........ 166 Creating pe rsonal notes ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ .. 167 Creating a wa llet profile ............................... ................. ................................ ...................... ............ 167 Retrievin g information from the wal let to your browser ..... ................................ .................. 168 Viewing ticke t details .................... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ .. 169 Wallet settin gs . ................................ ................................. ................ .............................. .. ................ .. 169 Resetting the w allet an d walle t code ........................ ................ ................................ .................. 170 11.Services and Applications............................... .............................. ............. 171 Web (Mob ile brows er) ....................... ................ ................................. ................................ ... ............. .. 171 Basic ste ps for a ccessing .............. ................................. ................................ ................ ....... ........... 171 Settin g up th e phone for the brows er servic e ......................................... ................................ .. 172 Rece iving setti ngs in a smart message . ................................. ................................ ................ .. 172 Enterin g the settings manuall y ............... ................................. ................ ................................ . . 172 Making a connec tion ..... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ .................. 172 Viewing boo kmarks ......................... ................................. ................................ ................ .................. 173 Addi ng bookm arks manually ..................................... ................................ ................ ................. . 174 Browsi ng ............................ ................................ ................. ................................ .......... ...... .................. 174 Keys and commands used in browsing................... ................ ................................ .................. 174
12 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Saving bookm arks........ ................................ ................................. ................ ...................... .......... .. 175 Viewing saved page s................... ................................. ................................ ................ ........ .......... 175 Downlo ading .... ................................ ................................. ................ ............................... . .................. 176 Purcha sing an item ..................... ................................. ................ ................................ ....... ........... 177 Checki ng an item before dow nloading . ................................. ................................ ................ .. 177 Ending a conn ection ...... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ .................. 178 Browse r settings .............. ................ ................................. ................................ ................ .................. 178 Games .... ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ..... ........... .................. 179 12.Connectivity .................................................................................. ............. 180 PC S uite . ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ..... ........... .................. 180 Bluet ooth connecti on........ ................................ ................. ................................ .................. ................ 181 Bluetoot h conne ction se ttings .................... ................. ................................ ............................. ..... 182 Sendin g data via Blu etooth te chnolo gy .................................... ................................ ................ .. 182 Paired d evices vi ew ........ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ... ............... 184 Receivi ng da ta via B luetooth wireless techno logy ................. ................................ ................ .. 185 Disconne cting Bluetoo th connection ......................................... ................................ ................ .. 1 85 Infrared connec tion ........... ................................ ................. ................................ ................ ................ .. 186 Conne ction ma nager ......... ................................ ................. ................................ ................... ............... 187 Viewing conne ction details ........................................... ................ ................................ ................ .. 188 Ending conn ections ........ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ .................. 189 Conne cting yo ur phone to a c ompa tible com puter... ................................ ................................ .. 189 Using your ph one a s a m odem ....................... ................. ................................ ............................ .... .. 189 Remote synchron isation ... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ..... ............. 190 Creating a new sync hronisation profile..................... ................ ................................ .................. 1 90 Synch ronising da ta ......................................... ................................. ................ ................... ............... 191 13.Troubleshooting ................ .............................. ........................................... 193 Q&A ........................ ................................ ................ ................................. ................... ............. ................ .. 194
13 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 14.Battery information .......... .............................. ........................................... 199 Chargi ng and Disch arging ................................ ................................. ................................ ...... .......... .. 199 Nokia battery authent ication gui delines ..... ................................. ................................ ................ .. 200 Care and Maintenance ......................................... ........................................... 203 Additional safety information ............................. ........................................... 205
14 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . For yo ur s afe t y Read thes e simple guid elin es. Not fo llowing th em may be dang erous or il legal . Read the complete use r guide for further informat ion. SWITC H ON SAFELY Do not swit ch the phone on wh en wi reless ph one use is pro hibit ed or w hen i t may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all lo cal law s. Always ke ep your ha nds free to operat e the vehicl e while driving . Your fi rst consi deration while dri ving should be road saf ety. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWIT CH OF F IN HOS PITALS Follow any res trictio ns. Swit ch the phone of f near medica l equipm ent. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRA FT Follow any restri ctions. Wirel ess device s can cause inter ference in ai rcraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELLING Do not use th e phone at a re fuelling point. Do n ot use near fu el or ch emicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BL ASTING Follow any res trictio ns. Do not us e the phon e where bla sting is in progress .
15 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . USE SEN SI BLY Use on ly i n t he no r ma l po si tio n as ex pl ai ned i n t he p r odu ct do c ume nta t io n. Do not t ouch the ant enna unn ecessarily . QUALIF IED SE RVICE Only qual ified pers onnel ma y install or repair this product. ENHA NCEM ENTS AND BATTE RIES Use only a pproved enhancemen ts and batt erie s. Do not conne ct incompat ible produc ts. WATER-RESISTA NCE Your phone is not water- resistant. Keep it dry. BACK-UP COP IES Remember to make back-up copi es or keep a w ritten rec ord of all imp ortant information s tored in your phone. CONNECTIN G TO OTHER DEVICES When connecti ng to any other device, read its user guid e for detaile d safety instru ctions. Do not connect incompa tible products. EMER GENC Y CALL S Ensur e the phone i s swit ched on and in se rvice. Pr ess th e end key as many ti mes as needed to clear the dis play and return to the start screen. Enter th e emerge ncy number, then pre ss the send key. Give your locatio n. Do not end the call un til given permis sion to do so .
16 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Abou t you r dev ice The wireless device describe d in th is guid e is approv ed for us e on the EGS M 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 1 900 netw orks. Cont act your servi ce provide r for more informat ion abou t ne two rk s . Wh en usi ng t he fe ature s in this de vice, obey all la ws an d re spect pr ivacy and l egit imate righ ts of o th er s. War ni ng: To us e any features in th is device, other than the al arm clock, th e device must be swi tched on. Do not s witch the devi ce on when wireless de vice use may cause inte rfer ence or da nger. â Networ k Servic es To use the phone yo u must have service f rom a wireles s service provid er. Many of the feat ures in this device d epend on features in the wirele ss network to functi on. These Network Service s may not be availa ble on al l networks or you ma y have to make specif ic arrangements with your se rvice pr ovider befo re you can ut ilize Network S ervice s. Your service p rovider ma y need to give you addit iona l instru ctions fo r their use a nd expla in what charges will apply. Some networks may have limita tions tha t affect how you can use Network Service s. For in stance, some n etworks ma y not support a ll language-d epende nt ch ara cters an d ser vic es. Your ser vice pro vid er m ay have reque sted that cert ain fe ature s be d isab led or not activ ated in your devi ce. If s o, they w ill not a ppear on yo ur device me nu. Con tact yo ur servi ce provi der for more info rmation. This devi ce sup ports WAP 2.0 pro tocol s (HTT P and SSL) t hat run on T CP/IP proto cols. S ome fea tures of this de vic e requi re netw ork s upport for thes e techno logi es.
17 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Sha red me mor y The foll owing featu res in thi s devic e may share memo ry: con tacts, tex t messa ges, and multimedia message s, images and ringing to nes, video recorde r, RealOne P layer TM , calendar, to -do notes , visu al rad io, and d own load ed appli cati ons. Us e of one or m ore of th ese features may reduce the memo ry ava ilable f or the remain ing feat ures s haring memory. For exa mple, saving many i mages may use all o f the avai lable memory . Your devi ce may displ ay a message that the memor y is full when you tr y to use a shared me mory featu re. In th is case, delete some of the informatio n or entrie s store d in the s hared memo ry feature s before continuin g. Some of the featu res may hav e a certain amount of memo ry speci ally all otted to them in addition to th e memory shared with other feat ures. â Enh anc emen ts, batte ries , and ch arge rs Ch eck the mode l numbe r of any c harger befor e use with t his p hone. Th is ph one is i ntende d for use when supplied wi th power from ACP-7 . War ni ng: U se only batte ries , charge rs, and enhancemen ts ap proved by Nokia for use wi th this p articular mod el. The use of an y other t ypes may invalida te any appro val or wa rranty , and may b e dan gerous . For availabili ty of approve d enhancements , please che ck with your dealer. When you dis co nne c t th e po w er c ord of any e nha nce m ent , gr a sp and pul l the plu g , no t th e c or d. Your p hone and its enha ncements may cont ain small pa rts. Keep th em out of reach of small children .
18 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Gene ral information â Stic kers in the sa les packa ge The s tickers included o n the war ranty card, in the s ales packa ge, contain important inf ormation for service and customer support purposes. T he sales package also includes instructions on how to use t he sticker s. â Acc ess c odes PIN co de The PIN (Per sonal Identification Number, 4 to 8 digit s) code he lps to protect your SIM card agains t unauthorised use. T he PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM card . After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the PIN code is blocked. If the PIN co de is block ed, you need to unbloc k it w ith the PUK code before you can use the SIM card again. PIN2 c ode The PIN 2 code (4 to 8 digit s), supplied wit h some SIM ca rds, is required to a ccess some functions .
19 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Lock code The loc k code (5 digit s) can be used to lock the phone a nd keypad to avoid unauthorised use. The factor y setting for the lock code is 12345. To avoid unauthorised us e of your phone, change the lock code. Keep the new c ode secret and in a safe plac e separate fr om your phone. PUK and PUK2 codes The PUK (Per sonal Unblocking Ke y, 8 digits) code is require d to change a blocked PIN co de. The PUK2 code is required to change a blocked PIN 2 code. If t he codes are not supplied with t he SIM card, contact the operator whose SIM card is in your phone for the codes.
20 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 1. Gett ing starte d Note : Before removing the cover, always switch off the power and disconnect the char ger an d any other d evic e. Av oid tou ching e lectro nic compo nents w hile changing the covers. Always store a nd use the device wi th the covers attached . â Ins erting a S IM c ard and a Mult iMedi aCard 1. To open the phone slide t he phone cover tow ards the bottom of the phone.
21 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 2. Open the memory card holder by pulling it up gently. Insert t he SIM card int o the lower slot. Make sure that th e bevelled cor ner on the SIM card is facing towards the top of the phone and th at the golden contact area on t he card is facing downwards. 3. To remove the SIM card, open the memory car d holder and us e the slider to slide the SIM car d out of th e card holder.
22 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 4. Insert the MultiMediaCard (MMC) into the holderâÂÂs slot. Make sure that the bevelled corner and golde n contact ar ea of the MMC are facing downwards. 5. Close the me mory card holde r by pressing it downwards until locked. 6. Align the golden contacts of t he battery with the corresponding connectors on the phone, and push the oppos ite end of the battery unt il it snaps into place. 7. Close the phone cover by sliding it toward s the top of the phone. Kee p all SIM ca rds out of the rea ch of small children . For avai lability and information on using SIM car d services, co ntact your SI M card vendor. This may be the se rvice pro vide r, networ k ope rato r, or ot her ven dor. Use only compati ble Mul timedia card s (MMC) with thi s device. Th e compatib le MMC for your device is Redu ced Size Dual Voltage Mu ltiM ediaCard. Other memory cards , such as Secure Digital (SD ) cards, do not fit in the MMC card slot and are n ot compatib le with this device. Using an incompa tible mem ory card may dam age the memory card as well as the device, and data store d on the incompatib le card may be corrupted.
23 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Remo ving the Mu lt imed ia card du r ing ph on e oper at ion You can remov e or replac e the Multimedia card during phone operation w ithout switching the phone off. 1. Open the phone cover. 2. Select Menu â Extras â Me mory c ard . an d sel ect Options â Remo ve mem. card or press the dip switch right to Multimedia card holder. The phone displays the message: Remo ving memory card will close all open applic ations. Remove anyway? 3. Press Ye s and turn the phone. 4. Open the Multimedia card holder, remove or re place the Multimedia card and close the card holde r. 5. Turn the phone and press Ok . 6. Close the phone cove r. â Ch arging th e bat tery 1. C on nec t th e po wer cord to the cha rg er. 2. Connect the other end of the power cord from the c harger to the base of the phone.
24 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 3. Connect the charger to an AC wall out let. The bat tery indicator bar on the display sta rts scrolling. Note that you can use the phone while charging. When the battery is fully charged, the bar stops scrolling. Disconnect the charger first from the phone and the from the AC outlet. See âÂÂBattery informationâ on page 199. â Swi tc hi ng t he ph o ne on a nd o f f To switch the phone on and off, press and hol d the power button on the top of the phone. War ni ng: Do not switch the pho ne on when wire less phone u se is prohib ited or when it may cause i nterferen ce or dan ger. You r dev ic e has an int ern al an tenn a. Note : As with any other radio- transmit ting devi ce, do not touch the antenn a unnece ssarily when t he pho ne i s switch ed on . Conta ct with t he a ntenna affects c all quality and may cause the phone to opera te at a hi gher power level than oth erwis e needed . Avoidi ng contact with the ante nna area w hen operatin g the ph one optimis es the antenna performance and the battery life. NORMAL POSITION : H old the phone as shown in the picture above.
25 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . If the phone requests a PIN code: The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM c ard. ⢠Enter the code (di splayed as * ***) and press the left selection ke y. If the phone requests a lock code: ⢠Enter the lock code (displa yed as ***** ) and pres s the left selection ke y. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345. send key
26 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 2. Y o ur p hone â Keys and pa rts Fr on t vie w 1. Earpiece 2. Pus h to ta lk (P TT) key To ac tiva te Pu sh t o ta lk . See âÂÂPush to talkâ on page 39. 3. Joyst ic k Enables scrolling through names, phone numbers, menus or settings. The joy stick is a lso used to mov e the cursor up and down, right and left when writ ing text, us ing the cale ndar, and in s ome game applica tions. Pressing the joystick briefly selec ts the function. 4. Menu key opens the main menu. 5. Call key dials a phone number and answers a call. In standby mode it shows the list of most recently called numbers. 6. â e nter numbers and characters.
27 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . and are used for various purposes in different functions. 7. End key ends an active c all. Exits from any function. 8. Edit key opens a list of commands when you are edit ing a text such as Copy , Cut and Pa s t e . 9. Clear ke y clears an e ntry or deletes an item and exits from different functions. 10. Se lection keys The funct ions of the key s depend on th e guiding text shown on the dis play above t he keys . To displa y the main menu, pr ess . 11. Pow er key Switches the phone on a nd off. When the keypad is locked, pressing the pow er key turns the phoneâÂÂs display lights on for approximately 15 seconds.
28 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Back, top and side view 1. Power key and L oudspeaker 2. Eyelet for w rist s trap 3. Camera lens 4. Infrared (IR) port Connectors view 1. Charg er conne ctor 2. Pop-Port TM connector used, for example, fo r headsets and t he data cable. 3. Microphone
29 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Ess entia l indica tors - The p hone is being used in a GSM network. - You hav e received one or several mes sages to the Inbox folder in Messaging. - There a re messages waiting to be sent in Outbox. See âÂÂM essagingâ on page 94. and - You hav e missed calls. See âÂÂRec ent calls registerâ on page 47. - Shown if Ringing type is set to Silent and Message alert tone , Chat alert tone , and E-mail alert tone ar e set to Off . See âÂÂProfilesâ on page 136. . - The p hone keypad is locked. Se e âÂÂKeypad l ock (Keyguard)â on page 30. . - You hav e an active alarm. See âÂÂClockâ on page 160. - All call s to the phone are diverted to another number. - A memory card is being read or wr itten to. - A headset is connected to the phone. - A loopset is connected to the phone. - The connection to a Bluetooth headset has been lost. - A dat a call is active. - A pac ket data (GPRS) connect ion is active. - Shown when the pac ket data connect ion is on hold. These icons are shown instead of t he signal st rength indicator (shown in the top lef t corner in t he standby mode ). See âÂÂGPRSâ on page 146.
30 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . - Bluetooth is active. - An infrared connection is ac tive. - Data is being transmitted us ing Bluetooth. See âÂÂBluetooth connectionâ on page 181. - US B connection is active . â Key pad lock (K ey guard) Use t he keypad loc k to prev ent the keys from being accidentally pressed. To lock : In standby mode pres s the left s election key and then th e * key. W hen the keys are locked, is sh own on the d isplay. To unlock : Press the left s election key an d then * key . When the keypad lock is on, calls still may be possible to t he official emergency number programmed int o your device. Enter the eme rgency number and press th e cal l key. â Menu Press to display the main menu. In the menu you can acces s all the applications in your phone. Options in the Menu: Open , A pp. downloads , List view / Grid view , Mov e , Mo ve to folder , Ne w folder , Memory details , Help and Exit .
31 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Grid view or List view of the Menu â¢S e l e c t Options â List vie w or Gr id view to change be tween a list or an ordered grid of the available applications. Note : The order of the applic ations can be c hanged by th e user and may therefor e differ fro m the standard or der described in this Us erâÂÂs Guide . Moving in the Menu ⢠Move the joyst ick up, down left and right to navigate in the menu. Opening applications or folders ⢠Scrol l to an applicat ion or a folder and press t he joystick to open it. Closing applications â¢P r e s s Back or Exit as many times a s needed to return t o standby mode or s elect Options â Exit . Displaying and switching between open applications ⢠Press and hold to switch from one open application t o another. The application s witching window opens showing a lis t of applications that are currently open. Scroll to an application and press the joystick to go to it. ⢠Numerous open applications may increase the dema nd on batt ery power and reduce th e battery life. Exit from unused applications. Shortcuts in idle mode ⢠To open Camera , move the joystick up. ⢠To open Co nt ac ts , move the joystick dow n or press t he joystick.
32 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠To open Calendar , move the joystick t o the right or press th e left s election key. ⢠To wr ite an new t ext messa ge, move t he joystick to the left or press the right selection ke y. ⢠To cha nge the pr ofile, press the power key and s elect a pr ofile. ⢠To open the last dialled numbers list, press the call key . ⢠To us e voice co mmands, press and hold the right selection key . ⢠To s tart push to talk, pres s the PTT key. ⢠To s tart a connect ion to Web, p ress and hold the 0 key. â Acti ons co mm on to a ll app lic at io ns ⢠Opening items for v iewing - Scr oll to an item and press the joystick , or select Options â Op en . ⢠Editing items - Open the item for viewing and select Options â Edit . Use th e joystick to scroll through all fields of t he item. ⢠Removing, deleting items - Scroll to t he item a nd select Options â De le te or press the clear key. To delete many items at a t ime, you f irst need to mark them. ⢠Marking an item - There are sev eral ways to se lect items whe n you are in a list. ⢠To s elect one ite m at a time, scroll to the item and s elect Options â Mark / Unmark â Mark or press t he edit k ey and move the joys tick at t he same time. A check mark is placed n ext to the marked item. ⢠To s elect all ite ms in the list, select Options â Mark/U nmark â Mark all .
33 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠To mark multiple items, pr ess and hold t he edit k ey and t hen move the joystick down or up. As the selec tion moves, a check mar k is placed nex t to the items. To end the selection, stop the scrolling with the joystick and then release the edit key. After you have s elected all the items that y ou want, you can move or delete them by selecting Opt ions â Move to folder or Dele te . ⢠Unmarking an item - Scroll to t he item a nd select Options â Ma rk / Unmark âÂÂUnmark or press the edit k ey and the joys tick at t he same time. ⢠Creating f olders - Sele ct Options â New folder . You are asked to give a name to the folder (max. 35 let ters). ⢠Moving items to a folder - Select Options â Move to folder (not shown if there a re no folders available). W hen you selec t M ove to folder , a list of available folders opens and you can als o see the r oot level of the application (for moving an item out of a folder). Select the location that you want the item to be moved to and pr ess OK . ⢠Sending items - Scroll t o the item a nd select Options â Sen d . Select the method, the choices a re Via multimedia , Via bl uetooth , Via e-mail , Via fax and Via infrared . ⢠If y ou choose to s end the item in an e-mail or a multimedia messa ge, an editor ope ns. Press the joys tick to s elect the rec ipient(s) from the Contacts directory or write the phone number or e-mail address of the reci pient in the To - field. Add text or sound and selec t Options â Send . See âÂÂWriting and se nding messagesâ on page 96. ⢠Via Bluetoo th. See âÂÂSending data via Bluetoot h technologyâ on page 182.
34 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Co pyright prot ections may preven t some ima ges, ri ngin g tones , and o ther conte nt from bei ng c opi ed, mo di fie d, tr ans fe rr ed or fo rwa r de d. â Vo l u m e c o n t r o l Voice volume icons : - for earpiece mode, - for loudspeaker mode. When you have an a ctive call or ar e listening to a sound, pre ss the joystic k to the left or t o the right or the volume c ontrol side k eys to incr ease or dec rease the volume lev el, respect ively. The loudspeaker allows you to spe ak and listen to the phone fr om a short distance without hav ing to hold the phone to your ea r, for example, having it on a table nearby. T he loudspeaker c an be used during a ca ll, with sound and video applications, and when view ing multimedia mes sages. Sound and v ideo applicat ions use th e loudspeaker by default. Using the loudspeaker makes it easier to use ot her applications during a call. To s tart using the loudsp eaker during a n already active call, sel ect O ptions â A ctivate loudsp. . A tone is played, is shown in the navigation bar, and t he volume indic ator changes. The louds peaker cannot be activat ed during a call w hen you have connected a heads et to th e pho ne. War ni ng: Do not hold the de vice near your ear wh en the loudspeake r is in use, because th e volume may be extr emely lo ud.
35 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . To tu rn off the loudspeaker when you have an active call, s elect Options â A ctivate handset . â Help Select Menu â Hel p . Help pr ovides usage information for many applications on the phone. Move the joystick t o the left or to the right to toggle between the he lp category list or a list of keywords . Select a category or a keyword by scrolling or use the text input field, to jump to t he desired c ategory or key word. Press the joystick t o display the related helpt ext.
36 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 3. Ca ll funct ion s â Ma king a voic e call 1. In the standby mode, e nter the phone number, including t he area code. To remove a number press the clear key. For international calls, press the * key twice for the charact er (replaces the international ac cess c ode), and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading ze ro if necessa ry), and phone number. 2. Press the call key to call the number. 3. Press the end key to end the call (or to ca ncel the call at tempt). Pressing the end key will a lways end a call, eve n if anot her application is act i v e. Tip: To incr ease or de crease th e volume during a c all, move t he joystick to the lef t or to th e rig ht. Making a call from the Contacts application - Press and select Contacts . Scroll to the desired name; or enter the f irst letters of the name to t he Search field. Matc hing contacts ar e listed. Press the cal l key to call. Calling your voice mailbox (network service) - To call your voice mailbox, press and hold k ey 1 in the st andby mode. Tip: To change the phone number of your voice mailbox, pr ess and sele ct T ools â Voice mailbox and select Options â Change number . E nter the number (obtained f rom your service provider) and press OK .
37 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Calling a recently dialled number - In the s tandby mode, pr ess the ca ll ke y to acces s a list of the 20 last numbers you called or attempted to call. Scroll to the number you wa nt, and pres s the call key to call the number. Speed diallin g a phon e number To as sign a phone numbe r to one of t he speed dialling keys ( 2 - 9 ), press and sel ect Tools â Speed dial . Key 1 is reserved for the voice mailbox . To ca ll: In standby mode, press the r elated key and then the call key or pres s and hold the related ke y. Making a conference call (network ser vice) 1. Make a call to the f irst participant. 2. To mak e a call t o another part icipant, select O ptions â N ew call . T he first call is automat ically put on hold. 3. When the new call is answered, join the first participant in the conference call. Select Options â Conference . ⢠To add a new person t o the call, repeat step 2, and select Options â Conference â Add to conference . The phone supports conference calls between a maximum of six par ticipants, including yourself. ⢠To have a priv ate conversation with one of the par ticipants, select Options â Conference â Pr ivate . Selec t a participant and press Private . The c onference call is put on hold on your phone. The ot her participant s can still cont inue the confe rence call. Once you have f inished the privat e
38 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . conversation, selec t O ptions â A dd t o con f er en ce to retur n to the con f er en ce ca l l. ⢠To drop a participant, select Options â Conference â Drop participant , scroll to t he participant, and press Drop . 4. To end the active conference call, press the end key. â An swer ing or rejec ting a call ⢠To ans wer the c all, press the cal l key. ⢠To mut e the ringing tone when a call comes in, pr ess Silence . Ti p: If a compatible headset is connect ed to the phone, pres s the heads et key to a nswer a nd end a call. ⢠If you do not want to answer a call, press the end key t o reject it. The caller w ill hear a line bus y ton e. If y ou have activ ated the Call divert â If busy function to di vert calls, r ejecting an incoming call w ill also divert the call. Ca ll wa iti ng (net wo rk se rv ic e) You can a nswer a call while you have another call in progress if you have activat ed the Call wait ing function in Settings â Call settings â C all waiting . ⢠To ans wer the wa iting call, press the call key. The fir st call is put on hold. ⢠To s witch between the two calls, press Swap . Select Options â Tr a n s fe r to connect an incoming c all or a call on hold wit h an act ive call a nd to dis connect yourself f rom the ca lls. To end the active call, pre ss the end key. T o end both calls, select Options â End all c alls .
39 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Opt ion s durin g a call Many of t he options that y ou can use during a cal l are network services. Select Options during a call for some of the following options: Mut e or Unmu te , Answer , Reject , Swap , Hold or Unhold , Activate handset , Act ivate loudsp. , or A cti vate handsfree (if a compat ible Bluetooth headset is attached), End act ive call or End all calls , New call , Con f er en ce , and Tr a n sf e r . Select: ⢠Replace - t o end an act ive call and replace it by answering t he wait ing call. ⢠Send DTMF - to send DTMF tone strings , for example , a passwor d. Enter the DTMF string o r searc h for it in Co ntacts . To ente r a wait char acter ( w ) or a pause charact er ( p ), press * repeated ly. Press OK to send th e tone . Tip: You can add DTMF tones to the Phone number or DTM F fields in a contact car d. â Pus h to t al k Select Menu â Push to talk . Push to t alk over cellular is a two-way r adio service (network service) available over a G SM/GPRS cellular network. Pu sh to talk provides dir ect voice communication connec ted with pr essing the P us h to ta l k key. You can us e push to t alk to have a conve rsation with one person or with a group of people having compatible devices. When your call is connected, the person or group you ar e calling doe s not have to ans wer the phone. Besides the GPRS counters, t he phone register s only one-to- one calls in the recent ca lls lists in Log . The part icipants should c onfirm the re ception of any communications where
40 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . appropriate a s there is no other confirmation of w hether the recipient(s) has(have) heard t he call. To che ck availability and costs , and to subs cribe to th e service , contact y our network operator or service provider. Note that roaming services may be more limited than for normal calls. Before y ou can use the push to talk service, you must define t he required push t o talk se rvice settings. While c onnected to the pus h to talk se rvice, you can us e the other f unctions of the phone. The push to talk s ervice is not c onnected to t raditional voice communication, and therefore ma ny of the s ervices av ailable for tr aditional voice calls (for example, voice mailbox) are not available for push to t alk communications. Sett ing s fo r push t o ta lk Select Options â S etting s . For push to talk se rvice settings, c ontact your net work operator or service provider. You may receiv e the set tings over the air. ⢠Notif icat io n tone - A tone for inc oming push to talk cal ls. ⢠Default nickname - Your nickname s hown to other u sers. ⢠Show my PTT addres s - Selec t No if you want to hide your pus h to talk a ddress from the r eceivers of your push to talk group or one-to-one calls. ⢠Domain - The default domain name. ⢠Access point name - The acc ess point name for the push to talk service.
41 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Server address - The push to t alk server a ddress. ⢠User name - Your user name used t o enter the push t o talk service. ⢠PTT password - Your pas swo rd u sed to ente r the push to tal k serv ice . ⢠Realm - The name of t he domain used for group user auth entication. After modifying t he settings, r estart the pus h to talk ap plication. Conne ctin g to the pus h to talk ser vic e Select Me nu â P ush to ta lk . Alternatively, press and hold the Pu sh t o ta lk key for a few sec onds to c onnect to the servi ce. The push to talk application automatic ally attempts to connect to the push to talk service . If the login is successful, the push to talk sessions view opens. indicates the push t o talk connection. If you have added group(s) to the phone, you are automatically joined to the active groups, and t he name of t he default group is dis played in standby mode. indicat es that the service is t emporarily unava ilable. The phone automatically tries to reconnect to the service until you disconnect from the push to talk se rvice. If the login fails, you get an error note such as Unable to switch Pus h to talk on . Select Options â Switch PTT on to try to log in again, Se ttings to open the settings vi ew, or Exit to clos e the err or note. To dis connect from t he push to t alk service , select Options â De acti va te . Options in the sessions view are: Deactivate loudsp. / Ac ti va te l o udsp . , Active members , PTT contact s , PTT log , Settings , Hel p , Deac tiv ate , and Exi t .
42 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Making a push to talk call Select Options â Deactivate loudsp. / Activate loudsp. to us e either louds peaker or earpiece f or push t o talk communicat ion. When the e arpiece is selected, you can use the phone normally to your ear. War ni ng: Do not hold the de vice near your ear wh en the loudspeake r is in use, because th e volume may be extr emely lo ud. To make a push to talk call 1. Select Options â PTT co ntacts and search for a cont act person or a group. To open the Push to talk groups view, press the joystick to the right. 2. Press the Push t o talk key or the ca ll k ey. This starts a pus h to talk call immediately. OR Select Options â Send callback req. . This sends a callback request to the selected push to talk contact or group. A tone sounds indicating that the access is granted, and the phone displays your nickname and group na me. 3. To r equest a sp eech turn, pres s the Push to talk key. The phone sends your request. W ait until your phone receives a speech t urn signal. Wh en the phone displays Talk , you have 30 s econds to talk on your speech turn. Press and hold the Push t o talk key the entire time you ar e talking, and hold the phone in front of you so that you can see t he display . When you have finished, r elease the key. Talk ing is allowed on a firs t-come, firs t-served basis. When someone stops talking, the first pers on to press the Push to talk k ey can talk next .
43 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 4. T o s witc h bet ween sev er al act ive se ssio ns, selec t Swap . 5. To end the active session, select Deact iv. . If you have other act ive sessions , the phone moves to the nex t session. If there a re no other sessions, the phone displays a not e stating that there are no a ctiv e s ess io ns. 6. To exi t the push to talk application, selec t Option s â Exit . Receiv in g a pus h to tal k call A short tone notifies you of an inc oming group or a one-to-one call. Press Accept to receive the call or Sil ence to reject it. When receiving a group call , the gr oup name and the nic kname of the caller a re displaye d. When receiving a one-to-one call f rom a person whose information you have s aved in Contacts , the save d name is displaye d if identif ied; otherwise, only the nickname of the caller is displaye d. Callback requests Select Options â PTT contacts or PTT log . Sending a cal lback req uest If you make a one-t o-one call and do not get a response, you can s end a request for th e person to cal l you back. You can send a ca llback request in different ways: ⢠To s end a callback request from t he contacts lis t in the Push to talk menu, sel ect Options â PTT contacts . Scroll t o a cont act and select Options â Send callback req. .
44 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠To s end a callback request from the Contacts , move the joystick down in standby mode , and scroll t o the desired c ontact. Press Detai ls , scroll to th e push to t alk address and s elect Options â Send callback req. . ⢠To s end a callback request from t he group list in t he Push to talk menu, select Options â PTT contacts and move the joystick to the r ight. Scroll to the desired group and select Options â Send callback req. . ⢠To s end a callback request from the callback request l ist in the P us h to ta l k menu, s elect Options â PTT log . Select Received callbac k reqs. and s elect Options â Op en . Scroll to a co ntact an d select Options â Send callbac k req. . Saving t he call ba ck reque st send er When you receive a callback reques t from someone who is not in y our contact s list, you can save the name to your contacts. 1. To open the request, select Options â PT T log â Received c allback reqs. . 2. Scroll to the a c ontact and select Opt ions â Add to Contacts . Usi ng gr oups Select Options â PTT contacts . When you call a group, all membe rs joined to the group hear the c all simultaneously. Each member in the groups is identified by a user name given by t he service provider. G roup members can choose a nick name for wit hin each group, whic h is shown a s a caller identification.
45 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Groups are registered with a URL addres s. One user registers the group U RL in the network by joining the group session the f irst time. Adding a gr oup 1. Select Options â PTT co ntacts and then move the joystick to the right. This opens the Push to t alk groups view. 2. Select Options â A dd group â Create new . 3. Ent e r a Group name , and press OK . 4. Select a Group privacy leve l. 5. Enter your own nic kname in Nickname in group . 6. To add a thumbnail image to the group, s elect Options â A dd thumbnail . 7. Press Do ne . To add members and to s end an invitati on to the group, pr ess Ye s when t he phone requests for Send group invit ation to all members now? . This opens a view where you ca n select members for the group. The membe rs you invit e to the ope n groups can also invit e more member s to the group. Jo inin g a n ex ist in g gr ou p For gr oup detail informatio n, contact yo ur network operator or service provide r. You may receive the details over the air. 1. Press Me nu â Push to talk â PTT contacts and then move the joys tick to t he right. Th is opens the Push to talk groups view. 2. Select Options â A dd group â Join existing .
46 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 3. Enter the Group address , Group name , and Nickname in group . You can als o add a Gr oup thumbnail . 4. Press Do ne . Receiv in g an in vitat ion When you receive a text message inv itation to a group, you get following information: ⢠Fro m - View the c ontact information of the per son who sent the invitation. ⢠Nickname - View the nickname of the person who sent the invitation. ⢠Group name - View the name of the group if the gr oup is not a s ecured group. ⢠Group address - View the group addr ess if the group is not a secured group. Select Options â Save group to add t he group t o your phone. After the group is save d, the phone asks whether you want to c onnect to t he saved g roup. To rejec t the invit ation, press Back and Ye s .
47 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Call re gist er and ge nera l log Select Menu â Log . In the log, you can monitor phone calls, t ext me ssages, packet data connections, and fax and dat a calls registered by the phone. You can filt er the log to vi ew just one t ype of eve nt and creat e new contact cards based on the log information. Connections to your remote mailbox, multimedia messaging c entre, or br owser pages are shown as dat a calls or p acket data connections in the general communications log. Recent calls regi ster Select Menu â Log â Recent calls . The phone registers the phone numbers of miss ed, received, and dialled ca lls, and the approximate duration of your calls. The phone registers missed and re ceived calls only if the network supports these f unctions, and th e phone is sw itched on and is within the net workâÂÂs s ervice area. Options in the Missed, Receive d, and Dialle d views: Call , Create message , Use number , Del ete , Clear list , A dd to Contacts , Help , and Exit . Miss ed calls and rece ived calls To vie w a list of t he last 20 phone numbers from whic h somebody has tr ied to ca ll you with out success (networ k service) , go to Log â Recent callsâ Missed calls . To vie w a list of t he 20 numbers or name s from whic h you have most recently accept ed calls ( network se rvice), g o to Log â Recent calls â Receiv ed calls .
48 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Dialled numbers To view the 20 phone numbers that you have most re cently called or attempted t o call, go to Log â Recent calls â Dialled nos. . Erasing recent call lists ⢠To cle ar all rec ent call lists, select Options â Clear recent calls in the Recent calls main view. ⢠To c lear one of the c all registers, op en the r egister you want to er ase a nd select Options â Clear list . ⢠To cle ar an individual ev ent, open a register, scroll t o the event, and press the cle ar key . Ca ll du rati on Select Menu â Lo g â Call duration . Allows you t o view the dur ation of your inc oming and outgoing calls. Note : The actual time invoiced for calls by your s ervice prov ider may vary , dependi ng on netwo rk features , roundin g off for billi ng, and so forth. Erasing call duration timers - Selec t Options â Cle ar timers . For this, you need the lock code. See âÂÂSecurityâ on page 149. Viewing the general log Select Menu â Lo g and move the joystick to the r ight.
49 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . In the general log, f or each communicat ion event, you can see t he sender or recipient name, phone number, na me of the s ervice pro vider, or acces s point. Sub-events, such as a t ext messa ge sent in more t han one part and packet dat a connections, are logged as one communication event. Filtering t he log 1. Select Options â Filter . A list of filters opens . 2. Scroll t o a filter and pr ess Select . Erasing the contents of the log ⢠To er ase all the log contents, Recent calls register, and Messaging delivery reports permanently , select Options â Clear log . Confirm by pressing Ye s . Packet data counter and connection timer ⢠To vie w how much dat a, measured in kilobytes, ha s been transfer red and the approximate length of a certain GPRS connect ion, scroll to an Incoming or Outgoing ev ent with the access point icon and s elect Options â View details . Log set tings â¢S e l e c t Options â Settings . The list of settings opens. ⢠Log durat ion - The log events remain in the phone memory for a s et number of days after which they are automatically erased to free memory. ⢠If you select No log , all t he log contents , Recent calls register, and Messaging delive ry reports ar e permanently deleted. ⢠Show call duration . See âÂÂCall durationâ on page 48.
50 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . GPR S data co unte r Select Menu â Lo g â GPRS count er . The GPRS dat a counter a llows you to che ck the amount of data se nt and receiv ed during packet data (GPRS) connections.
51 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 4. Wr iting tex t You can e nter text, for example, when writing message s, using tradit ional or predictiv e text input. â Us ing tra ditio nal t ext inpu t The indicator is shown on the top right of the display when you are writing text us ing traditional t ext input. ⢠Press a number ke y ( 1 - 9 ), repeatedly until the desired charact er appears. Note that t here are more character s available for a number k ey than a re printed on the key. ⢠To ins ert a number, pres s and hold the numbe r key. To switc h between let ter and number mode, press and hold the # key. ⢠If th e next let ter is locate d on the same key as the pre sent one, wait unt il the cursor appear s (or move the joystic k to the right to end the time-out per iod), and then e nter th e le tter . ⢠To insert a space, pres s the ke y 0 . To move the cursor to th e next line, pre ss the key 0 three times . ⢠To s witch between upper and lower case, p ress the # key .
52 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Us ing pre dictiv e text input You can e nter any let ter with a single keypr ess using predic tive text input . To acti vate predictive text input, press the edit key and select Dictionar y on . This activat es predictive text input for all e ditors in the phone. The indicator is shown at the top of the display. 1. Write t he desired wor d by pressi ng the keys 2 - 9 . Pr ess each ke y only once for on e le tt er . T he wo rd c h an ge s a fte r e v er y k ey p re s s. 2. When you have fini shed the word, c heck that it is cor rect. ⢠If the w ord is correct, you c an confirm it by moving the joy stick to the right or by pr essing the key 0 to insert a space. The underlining dis appears and you can begin to w rite a new word. ⢠If the word is not corr ect, you have the following options: â¢P r e s s t h e * key repeate dly to v iew the matching words the dictionary has found o ne by one. â¢P r e s s t h e edit key an d s e le ct Dictionary â Matches to view a list of matching wor ds. Scroll to t he word you want to use a nd press t he joyst ick to select it. â¢I f t h e ? character is shown after the word, the word you intended to write is not in the dictionary. T o add a wor d to the dictionary, pres s Spell , ente r th e word (max. 32 letters) using t raditional text input, and pres s OK . The word is adde d to the dict ionary. When the dictionar y becomes full , a new wor d replaces the oldest added word.
53 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠To r emove the ? and c lear charac ters one by one from the w ord, press the cle ar key. â Tips for wri ting te xt ⢠To cha nge between the different c haracter cas es Abc , abc , and ABC , press t he # key. N ote that if you press t he # key twice quickly the pr edictive text input is turned off. ⢠To ins ert a number in l etter mode, pr ess and hold th e desired number k ey, or press the edit k ey and se lect number mode, enter the number s you want, and press OK . ⢠The mos t common punctuation mar ks are available under t he key 1 . Pr ess key 1 repeatedly to reach the desired punctuation mark. Press the * key to open a list of special characters. Use the joystick to scroll through the lis t and pres s Select to select a charact er, or press th e edit key and sel ect Insert sy mbol . The predic tive text input tries to gues s which c ommonly used punctuation mark ( .,?!â ) is neede d. The order and av ailability of t he punctua tion marks depend on th e language of t he dictionary . When a w ord has been entered with pr edictive text on, you c an press the ed it key, sel ect Dictionary and select: ⢠Matches - To view a list of w ords that cor respond to your key presses. Scroll to the desired word and press the joystick.
54 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Insert wor d - To add a word (max. 32 le tters) to th e dictionary by using traditional t ext input. W hen the dictionary becomes fu ll, a new word replace s the oldest added word. ⢠Edit word - To open a vie w where you c an edit the wor d, availabl e only if the word is active (underlined). ⢠Off - To turn off pre dictive text input for all editors in the p hone Writing compound words ⢠Write the first half of a compound w ord and confirm it by moving the joystick to the right. Write the last part of t he compound word and complete the compound word by pressing the k ey 0 to add a space. â Cop ying t ext to the c lipbo ard To copy text to the clipboard, the following a re the eas iest methods: 1. To s elect letters a nd words, pr ess and hold t he edit key. At the same t ime, move the joystick to left or to t he right. As the selection moves, text is highlighted. To s elect lines of t ext, pres s and hold the edit key. At the s ame time move t he joystick up or down. 2. To end the select ion, release pres sing the joystick while still holding the edi t key. 3. To copy the text to the cl ipboard, while still holding the edit k ey, pre ss Copy . Or, r elease the edit key and then pr ess it once to open a list of editing commands, f or example, Copy or Cut .
55 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . If you want to remov e the select ed text fr om the document, press the cle ar key. 4. To insert the text into a document, press and hold the edit ke y and press Pa s t e . Or, pres s the edit ke y once and select Pa st e .
56 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 5. P erso na l info rm ati on â Cont acts Select Menu â Conta cts . In Contacts, you can store and manage contact information, such as names, phone numbers, and addresses. You can a lso add a pe rsonal ringing tone, voice ta g, or a thumbnail image to a contact card. You can c reate contact groups, which allow you t o send text messages or e-mail to many re cipients at the same time. Contact infor mation can only be sent t o or received from compatibl e devices. Options in the Contact s directory: Op en , Call , Create message , Ne w contact , Open con ver sa tion , Edit , Delete , Duplicate , Mark/U nmark , Copy t o SIM direct. , Send , Contacts info , SIM dir ectory , Settings , Help , an d Ex it . Managing cont acts Options when editing a contact: A dd thumbnail / Remove thumbnail , Add detail , Delete detail , Edit label , Hel p , and Exit . 1. Press the joystick in s tandby mode or go to Menu â Contacts . 2. Select Options â New contact . 3. Fill in the fields you want and press Don e . ⢠To edi t a co nt ac t, open i t and th en select Options â Edit .
57 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠To delete a contact , open it and select Options â De lete . ⢠To at tach a small thumbnail image t o a contact, open the contact card, selec t Options â Edit and then select Options â Add thumbnail . ⢠To as sign default numbers and a ddresses to a contact, open the contact card and se lect Options â Defa ult s . A pop-up window ope ns, listing the dif ferent options. ⢠To copy names and numbers from a SIM card to your phone , s el e ct Options â SIM directory , scroll to the name (s) you want to copy and s elect Options â Copy to Contacts . ⢠To copy a phone, fax, or pager number from Contacts to your SIM card , scroll to t he contact card you want to copy and select Options â Copy to SIM direct. Add i ng a ri ngi ng tone You can set a r inging tone for each contact card and group. When that contact or group member calls y ou, the phone plays the chos en ringing tone (if t he callerâÂÂs telephone number is sent with the call and your phone recognis es it). 1. Press the joystic k to open a cont act card or go to the G roups list and select a contact group. 2. Select Options â R in g in g t o ne . A list of ri nging tones opens. 3. Use the joystick to select the ringing tone you wis h to use f or the contact or group and press Select . ⢠To r emove the r inging tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones.
58 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Voice dialling Select Men u â Contacts . You can ma ke a phone c all by say ing a voic e tag that has been added to a contact card. Any s poken word(s) c an be a voic e tag. Before using voi ce tags, no te that: ⢠V oice tag s are not la ngua ge-depen dent. T hey are depe ndent on the speak er's voice. ⢠Y ou must say the n ame exactly as you said it when you recorded it. ⢠V oice tags a re sensiti ve to backgroun d noise. Record vo ice tags and us e them in a quiet environme nt. ⢠V ery sho rt names are n ot accepted . Use lon g names and avo id similar n ames for differen t num be rs . Note : Usin g voice tag s may be difficult in a noisy en vironmen t or during an emerge ncy, so you shoul d not rely solely u pon voice di alling in al l circumstance s. Adding a vo ice ta g to a phone number Voice tags c an only be added to phone numbe rs stored in the phoneâ s memory. See âÂÂManaging contactsâ on page 56. 1. In the Cont ac ts main view, scroll to the contact tha t you want to add a v oice tag to, and press th e joystick to open the c ontact car d. 2. Scrol l to the number t hat you want to add the v oice tag to, and select Options â A dd voice tag . 3. Press St a r t to rec ord a voic e tag. After t he starting t one, clear ly pronounce the word(s ) you want to recor d as a voice tag.
59 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 4. After r ecording, the phone plays the recor ded tag and t he note Playing voice tag is displayed. 5. When the voice tag has been succe ssfully saved, the note V oice tag saved is displaye d and a beep sounds. A symbol can be seen ne xt to the number in the conta ct card. Makin g a call by s aying a v oic e tag 1. In standby mode, press a nd hold the ri ght selection key. A short tone is played and the n ote Speak now is displayed. 2. To mak e a call by using a vo ice tag, hold the phone at a short dista nce away from your mouth and face and pronounce the voice tag clearly. 3. The phone plays the original voice tag, displays the name and number, and after a few seconds dials the number of the rec ognised voice tag. ⢠If th e phone plays an incorrect voice tag, or you want t o retry voic e dialling, press Retr y . Voice dialling cannot be used when a data call or a GPRS connection is active. Assignin g sp eed-dia lling k eys Speed dialling is a quick way to call f requently used numbers. You can assign speed-dialling k eys to eight phone numbers. T he number 1 is reserv ed for the voice mailbox. 1. Open the contact card for whic h you want a speed-dialling ke y and select Options â A ssign speed dial .
60 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 2. Scroll t o a number and pr ess As sign . When y ou retu rn to the cont act information vie w, you can see the speed-dial icon next to the number. ⢠To ca ll the contact by speed-dialling, go to standby mode and press t he speed- dialling ke y and the cal l key . â Pre sen ce Select Men u â Presence . Options in the Pr esence view: Open , My availability , Viewers , Update prese nce , Login , L ogout , Settings , Hel p , and Exit . Use Pr esence (network service) to inf orm others about your a vailability, that is, when, w here and how you w ant to be c ontacted. Presenc e allows you to view and create a dy namic profile of your cont act details, vis ible to other users of the service , to shar e information or control ser vices. P resence informa tion can include your availab ility, whether you pr efer people to c all or send me ssages, where y ou are and what you are doing. Before you can use Presence, you need to find a se rvice that you want to use and then save the s ettings of tha t service. You ma y receive t he settings in a special text me ssage, called a smart mes sage, from t he service provi der tha t offers the Presence servic e. See âÂÂReceiving smart mes sagesâ on page 101. For more information, c ontact your servic e provider. The Pres ence applicat ion allows you t o change your own published information and manage who is aut horised to see your prese nce. To vie w the pres ence information of others, you mus t use Contacts . See âÂÂContactsâ on page 56.
61 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Changing your avai lability infor matio n Select Options â My availability and select: ⢠A vailable - You are available for people to call or send you mes sages. For example, when you have chosen this option f or your general profile. Se e âÂÂProfilesâ on page 136. ⢠Busy - You may be available f or people to call or send you mes sages, for example, when your phone is in meeting profile. ⢠Not available - You ar e not available for people t o call or send you messages, for ex ample, when your phone is in s ilent profile. Changing who can view your P resence information Select Options â Viewers and select: ⢠Public pr es. - Displays limit ed information, fo r managing ways for people to contact you. This is available to anyone you have not blocked. ⢠My availability - Select A vailable , Busy , or Not available . ⢠Viewers - Op e ns th e Current view ers view of your Public pres. . See âÂÂPublic viewersâ on page 62. ⢠Update pr esence - Updates y our presence infor mation to the pre sence serve r. ⢠Login/ Logout - C onnect to or disconnect from t he presence server. See âÂÂChat and Presence serversâ on page 123. ⢠Settings - Manage the publis hing of your pres ence information.
62 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Private pres . - Displays private information, so you can share more personal information. T his is only available to t hose that y ou have authorised t o view your pr ivate information. You can select the following op tions: ⢠My availability - Select A vailable , Busy , or Not available . ⢠Private me ssage - Write a text me ssage of up to 40 character s to describe your current availability. ⢠My presence logo - Add a logo to your availability inf ormation. Logo files are stored in the Gallery. See âÂÂGaller yâ on page 71. ⢠Viewers - Op e ns th e Private list v iew of your Privat e pres. . See âÂÂPrivate viewersâ on page 63. ⢠Update pr esence - Updates y our presence infor mation on the prese nce serve r. ⢠Login/ Logout - C onnect to or disconnect from t he presence server. See âÂÂChat and Presence serversâ on page 123. ⢠Settings - Manage the publis hing of your pres ence. ⢠Blocked pres . - Displays a s creen containing no personal details. See â Blocked viewersâ on page 64. Public viewer s Select Public pres. and s elect Options â Viewers â Current vi ewers to see the names, phone numbers, or us er IDs of the v iewers whom y ou do not all ow to vie w your pr ivate presen ce messages, but who are currently viewi ng your public presence. You can sc roll to a v iewer, press Options , a nd select:
63 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Add to private list - Allows the v iewer to als o see y our private pr esence. ⢠Block - Prevents the viewer from seeing your presence information. ⢠Add to contacts - Adds t he viewer t o your Contacts direct ory. ⢠Reload lists - Connect to t he presence server to update the viewer lists. This option i s only available whe n you are offline. Priva te viewe rs Select Private pres . and select Opti ons â Viewe rs â Private list to se e the name s, phone numbers, or user IDs of the vie wers who you allow to view y our privat e presence messages. T o prevent a viewe r from seeing your private pr esence messages, scroll to the viewer and press the cl ear key. You can scroll to a vi ewer, press Option s , an d select: ⢠Add new - Adds a new viewer manually or f rom your Contacts direct ory. You can only select a c ontact who has a user ID in t he conta ct card. ⢠Block - Prevents the viewer from seeing your presence information. ⢠Add to contacts - Adds t he viewer t o your Contacts direct ory. ⢠Remove from list - Removes t he viewer from the pr ivate list . The option is available also when there are marked items selected. If the list is empty, the option i s not available. ⢠View details - Shows t he user ID inf ormation of the viewer. ⢠Reload lists - Connect to t he presence server to update the viewer lists. This option i s only available whe n you are offline.
64 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Blocke d viewer s Select Options â Viewers â Blocked pr es. to s ee the viewers you prevented fr om seeing your public and pr ivate pres ence messages . To allow a viewer t o see your presence information, scr oll to a viewer and pr ess the clear key. You can s croll to a viewer , press Options , and select: ⢠Add to private list - Allows the v iewer to als o see y our private pr esence. ⢠Add new - Add a new vie wer manually or from your Contacts direc tory. You can only select a c ontact who has a user ID in t he conta ct card. ⢠Add to contacts - Adds t he viewer t o your Contacts direct ory. ⢠View details - Shows t he user ID inf ormation of the viewer. ⢠Reload lists - Connect to t he presence server to update the viewer lists. This option i s only available whe n you are offline. Updating yo ur Presence informat ion Select Men u â Presence . Once the connection has been esta blished: 1. Enter y our user ID and password and pre ss the joystick t o login. You obtain t he user ID and pas sword from your service provider. 2. Select O ptions â Update presence . The opt ion is available when y ou are logged into the server a nd have changed your presence inf ormation in either the Private pres . or Public pr es. view and not updated it. 3. To log out, select Options â Logout .
65 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Presence set tings Select Options â Settings . See âÂÂChat and Presence serversâ on page 123. ⢠Show presence to - Select : ⢠Private & public - Both public and privat e presence is published. ⢠Private v iewers - Only pr ivate vie wers can see y our presence inf ormation. ⢠Public view ers - Both public a nd private vi ewers see your public presence information. ⢠No on e - Your pres ence information is not published. ⢠New v iewer status - Specif ies what leve l of prese nce new view ers a re allowed to s ee. ⢠Sync. w ith Profiles - Defines whic h Presence att ributes are ch anged when you change y our profile. Selec t: ⢠Off - The presence attributes are not changed, even if you change your profile. ⢠On - B oth My availability and Private message are changed when you change y our profile. ⢠A vailability only - Private mes sage is not changed when you change your profile. ⢠Private msg. only - My availability is not changed whe n you change y our profile.
66 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â P osition ing Select Men u â P ositioning . Positioning (net work service) allows the net work to detect the approximate position of your phone. By enabling or disabling positioning, you choose when your position infor mation is provided t o the network. To enable positioning in your phone, select Settings â P os itioning â On . When you receiv e a P osition request , a me ssage is displayed s howing the service that is making the request. Press Ac cept to allow your position information t o be sent, or pr ess Re je ct to d eny the re qu est . Position request messages are logged in t he Recv . requests list. To vie w them, selec t Menu â Positioning â Recv . requests . T he icon beside each request indicat es whether the reques t is new, rejected, or ac cepted. To see de tails of a r equest, s croll to the request and press the joy stick. To clear the Recv . requests list, s elect Options â Clear list . â Calenda r Select Men u â Calendar . In the Calendar, you can keep track of your ap pointments, meetings, birthdays, anniv ersaries, and other events. You can also set a calendar alarm to remind you of upcoming eve nts. The Calendar f unction uses shared memory. See âÂÂShared memoryâ on page 17.
67 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Creati ng ca lendar e ntries 1. Select Options â New entr y and select: ⢠Meeting - Reminds you of an appoint ment that has a specific da te and time. ⢠Memo - Write a ge neral entry for a day. ⢠Anniversary - Reminds you of birthdays or special dates. Anniversary ent ries are repeated ev ery ye ar. 2. Fill in the fields. Use the joystick to move between fields. ⢠Subject/ Occa sion - Write a description of the event. ⢠Locat ion - The place of a meeting, optional. ⢠Start time , End time , Start date , and End date . ⢠Alarm - Press t he joystick to acti vate the fi elds for Alar m time and Alarm date . ⢠Repeat - Press the joystick to change the entry to be repeated . Shown with in the Day view. ⢠Repeat until - Set an ending date for the repea ted entry, for example, th e last dat e of a week ly course you ar e taking. This option is show n only if you have selected to repeat the event. ⢠Synchronisation - Private - After synchronisation the calendar entry can be seen only by you a nd it will not be shown to ot hers even if th ey have online acces s to view the calendar. Public - The calendar entry is s hown to others
68 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . who have access t o view your c alendar online. No ne - T he calendar entry will not be copied w hen you synchronise y our calendar. 3. To save the entry, press Do ne . To edit or delete a r epeated ent ry, choose how you w ant the changes to take ef fe ct: All occurr ences - all repeated e ntries are changed T his entry only - only the current ent ry is c hanged. Calend ar views Options in the different calendar views: Open , New e ntry , W eek view / Month view , Delete , G o to date , Send , Settings , Help , and Exit . Press the # k ey in the Month, Week, or Day views to a utomatically highlight todayâÂÂs date. To writ e a calendar entry, press any number key ( 1 - 0 ) in any calendar view. A Meeting entry is opened and t he characters you keyed in are added t o the Subject field. ⢠To go to a cert ain date, select Options â Go to da te . Write the dat e and press OK . ⢠Icons in Day and Week views: - Memo and - Anniv ersary . ⢠Synchronisation icons in Month view: - Private , - P ublic , - None , and - the day ha s more than one ent ry .
69 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â To-do Select Men u â To -d o . In To- do, you can keep a list of t asks that you need to do. The To- do list uses shared memory. Se e âÂÂShared memoryâ on page 17. 1. To s tart to writ e a to-do not e, press any number key ( 1 - 0 ). T he editor opens and t he cursor blinks after the letters you have keyed in. 2. Write the tas k in the Subject field. Press the * key to a dd special c haracters. ⢠To s et the due date for the task , scroll to t he Due date field and enter a date. ⢠To s et a priority f or the to-do note, scroll to the Priority field and pres s the joyst ick. 3. To s ave the to-do note, pres s Done . If you remove all characters and press Done , the note is deleted, even if you edit a previously saved note. ⢠To open a to-do note , s croll to it and press the joystick. ⢠To delete a to-do note , s croll to it and select Options â Del ete or press t he cle ar key. ⢠To mark a to-do note as completed , s croll to it and select Options â Mar k as done . ⢠To restore a to-do note , select Options â Mark as not done.
70 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Impo rting d ata from co mpatible phone s You can mov e calendar, co ntacts, and to-do data f rom compatible Nokia phones to your phone using the N okia PC Suite Cont ent Copier applicat ion on a compatible PC.
71 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 6. Me dia â Galle ry Select Menu â Gallery . Use t he Gallery to s tore and organis e your images, sound clips, playlists , video clips, s treaming links and RAM files. The Galler y uses sha red memory. See âÂÂShar ed memoryâ on page 17. Open the Gallery to se e a list of the folders in the phone memory. Move t he joystick to the right to see the folders on the memory card, if you use one. Select a folder Images , Sound clips , or Video clips (or other folder that you have created) and press the joystick t o open it. In the open folder you can see: ⢠an icon depicting t he type of each file in t he folder, or in the cas e of an image, a sma ll thumbnail pictur e which is a pr eview of t he image ⢠the name of the file ⢠the date and time a file wa s saved or t he size of the file ⢠subfolder s, if pr esent. Options: Open (folder or item), Gallery downloads , Send , Delete , Create new , Move to folder , New fol d er , Mark/Unmark , Rename , Image uploader , Rece ive via infrared , View details , Add to 'Go to' , Settings , Help , and Exit .
72 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . You can browse, open, and creat e folders, as well as mark, co py and move items to folders. See âÂÂActions common to all applicationsâ on page 32. Co pyright prot ections may preven t some ima ges, ri ngin g tones , and o ther conte nt from bei ng c opi ed, mo di fie d, tr ans fe rr ed or fo rwa r de d. Opening f iles Select any file and press the joystick to open it. Each file opens in it s corresponding application as follows: ⢠Ima ges - open in t he Image viewe r. See âÂÂViewing imagesâ on page 78. ⢠Sound clips - open and play in the RealPlayer application. See âÂÂRealPlayerâ¢â on page 88. ⢠Video clips , RAM files, and s treaming links - Open and play in t he RealPlayer applicat ion. See âÂÂRe alPlayerâ¢â on page 88. ⢠Subfolders - open to dis play contents. Oth er defau lt fol der s Pictur e mes sages folder Use t his folder to store pictures sent to you in pict ure message s. ⢠Sel ect the folder Images â Picture msgs. . Options in the Pic ture messages folder: Open , Send , Delete , Mark/Unmark , Rename , View detail s , Help , and Exit .
73 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . To s ave a pictu re that you ha ve rece ived in a pic ture mess age, go to Messaging â Inbox , open the message, and select Options â Save picture . Wa ll pa p er s fol d e r Use t his folder to store pictures that you want to use as background images for multimedia messages. ⢠Sel ect the folder Images â Wallpapers . Presen ce logos fol der Use this folder to store logos for Presence. See âÂÂPresenceâ on page 60. ⢠Sel ect the folder Images â Presence logos . D own lo ad i ng f i les Select Options â Gallery do wnloads . Choose from Graphic downloads , Video do wnloads , o r T one downloads . T he browser opens and you ca n choose a bookmark for t he site t o download from. See âÂÂViewing bookmarksâ on page 173. To downloa d files, you must first configur e your default a ccess point. See âÂÂAcces s pointsâ on page 143. For more information on downloadi ng, See âÂÂDownloadingâ on page 176. . Once items have be en downloaded, t he browser clos es and the phone returns to Gallery view.
74 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Uploading images t o an ima ge server Select Options â Image uploader . You can s end your pict ures to an image server to a llow others to s hare your pictures online (n etwork service). Before y ou can upload image s, you must enter the settings for the ima ge server. You can ge t these set tings from your s ervice provider . Setting up the image server 1. Select Settings â Image servers and press the lef t selection ke y. Fill in the details for each field. S ee âÂÂAcce ss pointsâ on page 143. 2. Press the right se lection key . Uploading images 1. To begin an upload, mar k the images and select Upload . 2. Enter t he name of t he folder on the image s erver that t he images are stored in and pr ess the left selection key. â Camera Select Menu â Ca mera . You can t ake photos a nd record vid eo clips with th e phoneâÂÂs built- in Camera applicat ion. The ima ges are aut omatically saved in the Gallery applicat ion, where you c an rename and or ganise them in folder s. See âÂÂGalleryâ on page 71. The phone memory or memory card is used t o store the ima ge or vid eo, depending on the Memory in use setti ng. See âÂÂCamera sett ingsâ on page 76.
75 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . You can a lso send images in a multimedia message, as an e-mail atta chment, or via Bluetoot h technology or infrared connect ion. The came ra produces images in JPEG and video clips in 3GP file format. Taki ng a picture or record ing a video clip Options availabl e before taki ng a pictur e / a video clip: Capture / Record , New , Activate night mode , Sel f-timer / Mute , Go to Ga ller y , Settings , Help , an d Exi t . 1. Move t he joystick t o left to s elect the still image mode or to the right to activat e the vide o mode . 2. Move t he joystick up to zoom i n on your subject before or while taking the picture or recording a v ideo clip. Move the joystic k down to zoom out. The zoom indicator on the dis play shows the zoom level. 3. To t ake a pict ure, p ress the joys tick ( Capture ). When you are taking a picture, do not move the p hone before the Camer a application star ts to save t he image. The camera s hows the image and sav es it automatically in Galler y. To return to the v iewfinder, press Ba ck . To take a nother picture, pr ess the joys tick ( Capture ) aga in . 4. To s tart recording a video clip, make sur e you have f irst selected the video mode. T hen press th e joystick ( Reco rd ) quickly to start recording. To pause recording at any t ime, press Pa us e . To resume recording, press Continue . When recording, you can see t he recording counter, whic h shows the rec orded time. 5. To s top recording, pres s Stop .
76 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . The c amera goes int o battery sa ving mode if the re has been no key pr esses within a minut e. To continue t aking pictures, pr ess the joystick. You can insert an image into a contact card. See âÂÂManaging contact sâ on page 56. Night mode If the lighting is dim and t he camera need s a longer exposure time f or the pic ture to be of good quality use the option A ctivate night mode . No te that, in dim conditions, a ny movement while taking a pic ture may ca use it to be blurred. Self ti mer To tr igger the camera in image mode automatically after a cer tain time selec t Options â Self-timer and select a trigger time of 10, 20 or 30 seconds. To start the Self-timer press Activ ate . A beep is played once in a second and during the last t hree seconds bef ore trigger twi ce a second. Camer a setti ngs Select Options â S etting s . In the Ca mera application settings, y ou can adjust t he Image a n d Video settings. Image settings ⢠Show captured image : Select No to be able to make pict ures with a short repetition r ate. The ca ptured image is not displayed. ⢠Image quality - High , N ormal , and Basic . The better the image quality , the more memor y the ima ge consumes.
77 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Default image name - By default, the came ra names images in the format âÂÂImage.jpgâÂÂ. Default image name allow s you to se t a name for the images stor ed. ⢠Memory in use - Select whether you want to stor e your images in the phone memory or on t he memory car d, if you us e one. Video set tings ⢠Leng th - With Maximum t he length of the record ed video is only restricted by the available memory. With Short the r ecording time is opt imized for MMS- sending. ⢠Video resolution - Select be tween two v ideo resolutions: - 128x96 for s tandard resolution - 176x144 for high resolution ⢠Default video name - By default, th e camera names video clips in the format âÂÂVideo.3gpâÂÂ. Default video name allows y ou to set a name for the video clips stor ed. ⢠Memory in use - Select whether y ou want to stor e your video c lips in the phone memory or on t he memory car d, if you us e one.
78 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Viewing i mages Select Menu â Gallery . Pictures taken with the Camera application are stored as images in the Gallery. See âÂÂGalleryâ on page 71. Images can be sent to you in a multimedia or picture message, a s an e- mail attachment, or via a Bluetooth connection. After r eceiving an image in the Inbox, you need t o save it in the phone memory or on a memory card. You can s ave graphics sent to you in picture message s to the Picture messages folder. See âÂÂPicture messages folderâ on page 72. Options when viewing a n image: Send , Set as wallpaper , R ota te , Zoom in , Zoom out , Full screen , Dele te , Rename , View details , Add to 'Go to' , He lp , and Exit . Select an image from t he list of images in the Images folder in the Ga llery to start the image viewer and display th e image. When viewing an image, moving the joystick to right or t o the left takes you to the next or previous image in the current folder. In the images thumbnail view: 1. Move t he joystick r ight or left to move bet ween the phone and memory ca rd. 2. To brows e the list of images, move the joyst ick up and down. 3. Press the joystic k to open an image. When t he image is open, you can see the name of t he image. You can v iew animate d GIF files in t he same w ay as other images .
79 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Zooming on a saved i mage 1. Select Options â Zoom in or Zoom out . You can s ee the zooming r atio at the top of the display. See âÂÂShortcut s during zoomingâ on page 79. 2. Press Ba c k to r eturn to the initial view. T he zooming ratio is not stored permanently. When you select Options â Full screen , the panes around th e image are removed so that you can s ee more of the image. Press the right selection key to return to the initial view. When you are zooming in on an image, us e the joy stick to move the focus to the left, right , up, or down, so that y ou can take a closer look at one part of the image, for ex ample, its upper right corner . Shortcu ts d uri ng z ooming â¢P r e s s k e y 1 to rot ate by 90ð anticlockwise, press key 3 to ro tate by 90ð clockw ise. The rotation status is n ot stored permanently. â¢P r e s s k e y 5 to zoom in and key 0 to zoom out, press and hold key 0 to retur n to normal view. â¢P r e s s t h e * key to c hange betwee n full screen and normal view. â Visual Radio You can use t he Visual Radio TM application as a traditional FM radio with automatic tuning and pr eset channels , or with pa rallel visual information r elated to the radio program on t he display, if you tune in to st ations that offer Visual Radio service. T he Visual Radio ser vice uses GPRS
80 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . (network service). You can lis ten to the FM r adio while using ot her device applications. To use t he Visual Radio s ervice, the following conditions are required: ⢠The s tation you listen to and the network operator you use must support this servi ce. ⢠The dev ice must be s witched on. ⢠The dev ice must have a valid SIM ca rd fitted. ⢠Your Inter net access point must be def ined for ac cess to the operatorâÂÂs vis ual radio server. ⢠The pres et radio channe l must have the c orrect Visual Radio service ID def ined and have Visual Radio se rvice enabled. See â Visual Radio settings â on page 86. for details . If you do not have acces s to the Visual Radio service, t he opera tors and radio stations in y our area may not support Visual Radio. The Visual Radio service may not be avail able in all areas and c ountries. Note : The radio uses th e wire of the hea dset as an ante nna. A compat ible head set needs to be attached to the devi ce for the ra dio to funct ion prop erly. You can li sten to FM radio on your phone by the built- in loudspeaker or a compatible heads et. When us ing the loudspeaker, keep the headset plugged into the phone. The lead of the heads et functions as t he antenna of the radio, s o let it hang freely. War ni ng: L isten to music at a moder ate level. Conti nuous expo sure to high volume may damage your h earing.
81 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . You can normally make a c all or answer an incoming c all while listening to the radio. The radio is turned off when there is an active call. When the call is finished, you may need to tur n the radio ba ck o n manually. Note, t hat the qualit y of the radio broadcast depends on the r adio stationâÂÂs coverage in that particular area. Tur nin g on th e ra dio Select Menu â Vis. Radio . The phone displays: ⢠Channel location number a nd the name of the radio channe l. ⢠Frequency of the last used radio channel. ⢠Six gr aphic buttons: - and . Select to s croll to the next or previous saved channel. The buttons are inactive if there are no s aved channels. - and . Select to s tart automatic tuning upwards or downwards. - Starts Visual Radio content feed if the Vis ual Service ID is defined or asks f or Visual Radio ID if the Visual Service ID is not defined. See â Access to Channel Directory through Visual Radio buttonâ on page 87. If you have previousl y saved ra dio channels, scroll t o the ch annel you want t o listen t o, or selec t the memory loca tion of a channe l by pressing the corresponding k ey 1 to 9 . When using a compatible headset, press the headset key t o scroll to t he desired save d radio channel.
82 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Adjust the volume by pus hing the joyst ick to the right or to t he left. To turn the radio off, pr ess Exit . Tunin g and sa ving a radio c hanne l To s tart the cha nnel search when the radio is on, select or . Searching stops w hen a channel is found. To s ave the channel, select Options â Save channel . Select a location for the channel with the joystick and press Select . Enter the name of the c hannel and press OK . Usi ng the r adi o When the r adio is on, select Options and se lect from the following options: ⢠Start visual service - Launch v iewing of visual c ontent. See âÂÂVie w Visual Contentâ on page 85. . ⢠Save channel - Save the radio channel you have found. See âÂÂTuning and saving a radio cha nnelâ on page 82. Up to 20 radio channels can be saved. ⢠Channels - Open th e channel list. See âÂÂUsing the c hannel listâ on page 83. ⢠Manual tuning - Set the cha nnel fr equency manually. To move th e channel sea rch 0.05 MHz upwards or downwards, press briefly the joystick up or down.
83 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . To sear ch quickly upw ards or downwards for a channel press and hold the joystick up or down. If you know the frequency of the radio channel you would like t o listen to (between 87.5 MH z and 108.0 MHz), enter it and press OK . ⢠Activate loudsp. - Listen to t he radio using the int egrated handsfree (IHF). The integrated hands free allows you to speak and listen to radio or audio files without having to hold the phone to the ear. When the integrat ed handsfree is activa ted, the h eadse t is mute d. ⢠De ac tiv ate l o udsp . - Listen to t he radio using th e headset. ⢠Settings - to control Visual Radio settings. See â Visual Radio settings â on page 86. . ⢠Help - Open the c ontext-sensitive help. ⢠Exi t - Turn off the radio. Using the ch annel list When the radio is on, select Options â Channels . The c hannel list is used f or managing the saved radio channels. The list c ontains 20 channels . When you open the lis t, the currently active cha nnel is highlighted if it i s saved. Otherwis e, the first saved channel is highlighted. Select Options and select fr om the following options: ⢠Channel â Liste n - L ist en to th e sele cte d chan nel .
84 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Channel â Edit - Views the s ettings of the highlight ed channel. See âÂÂChannel setupâ on page 84. ⢠Channel â Move - Moves a channe l to another posit ion within the channel list: Highli ght the channel t o be moved, press Mov e and then highlight t he position where the selected channel is to be moved. Press OK to move the channel. ⢠Channel â Delete - Delete the hig hlighted channel from the channel lis t. ⢠Channel directory - Act ivates C hannel dir ectory (n etwork ser vice) to seek available Visual Radio Stations f rom network and save them for later use. See âÂÂChannel Directoryâ on page 86. . ⢠Activate loudsp. - Listen to t he radio using the int egrated handsfree (IHF). ⢠De ac tiv ate l o udsp . - Listen to t he radio using th e headset. ⢠Help - Open the c ontext-sensitive help. ⢠Exi t - Turn off the radio. Channel set up Highlight a channel in the c hannel list, s elect Options â Edit to change following channel paramet ers: ⢠Name - Select Options â Change to ed it the name of the chan nel . ⢠Locat ion - Select Options â Change to edit the loc ation of the r adio station. ⢠Frequency - Sel ect Options â Change to edit the frequency of the channel. ⢠Visual s ervice ID - Select Options â Change to edit the Visual Servi ce ID.
85 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Enable vis ual service - Select O ptions â Change to allow ( Yes ) or prevent ( No ) the viewing of visua l content of the current radio channel. Press Bac k to return t o the ch anne l list. View Visual Content Visual Content can be vie wed if the relating channel is s aved in t he channel list and Visual Service is enabled for this channel. See âÂÂUsing the channel listâ on page 83. . To che ck availability and costs , and to subs cribe to th e service , contact y our network operator or service provider. To view Visual Cont ent of the current channel select the Visual Radio but ton or select O ptions â St art visual service . If the Visual Service ID was not saved in the c hannel list, you are asked fo r the Visual Se rvice ID. E nter the Visual Se rvice ID a nd press OK . If you do not have the Vis ual Service ID, pr ess Retrieve to ac ces s the Chan nel Directory (network servic e). See âÂÂChannel Directoryâ on page 86. . When the connection t o the Visual Ser vice is es tablished, the display shows the current Vis ual Content and t he GPRS signal icon . T he Visual Cont ent can consist of images, text , buttons and entry fields and is designed by the content provider. To nav igate through the displayed content, pus h the joyst ick up or down. The focus wi ll jump from it em to item.
86 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . If no valid Visual Content is available from the service the radio station logo or the Visual Radio background is dis played. Options in the Visual Content view: Activate loudsp. , Deactivate loudsp. , Display settings , Help , and Exit . To terminate the Visual Content fee d but not the FM r adio press Close . To terminate bot h select Options â Exit . To s et the mode of lights and the screensaver timeout select Options â Display settings . Visu al Radi o sett in gs When the r adio is on, selec t Options â Settings to c ontrol following Visual Radio settings: ⢠Auto-sta rt se rvice - Select Options â Change to enable ( Ye s ) or disable ( No ) the automatic start of Visual content. ⢠Access point - Select Options â C hange to edit the acces s point address. Channel Dir ecto ry With the Channel Directory (networ k service) you can select Visual Radio enabled or tradit ional radio stations fr om a list, grouped in several folder s. A folder may represent geographical locations, for example continents, countries, regions or cities a nd can contain ot her folders or da ta of radio stat ions. To che ck availability and costs , and to subs cribe to th e service , contact y our network operator or service provider.
87 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . To ac cess the Channel Directory select th e button and pre ss the joystic k or sel ect Options in the channe l list (see Using the channe l list, 83 ) and select Channel directory . Access to Channel Direc tory th roug h Visual Rad io butt on To fe tch the V is ual se rvi ce ID an d t o sta rt V is ual con ten t fo r t he c urre n tly tune d in radio st ation, select t he but ton and p ress the joys tick. After the connection to the Channel Direct ory you ar e requested to select t he nearest locat ion to your current pos ition from a lis t of folders marked by . Highlight t he desired location and pr ess the joy stick. The device compares the frequencies of the listed radio stations with the currently tuned in frequency. If a matching frequency is found, the Vis ual Service ID of the tuned radio station is dis played. Press OK to st art vie win g the Visua l cont e nt. See âÂÂView Visual C ontentâ on page 85. . If there a re more t han one radi o stations with matching frequencies, t he relating radio stations and their Visual Service ID are displayed in a list. Highlight th e desired radio sta tion in the list and press Select . The tuned radio station and the Visual Ser vice ID are dis played. Pres s OK to s ta rt vi e win g th e Visual content. See â View Visual Contentâ on page 85. . Access to Channel Direc tor y throug h opt ions Li st To ac cess the Channel Directory (network service) select Options in t he channel list (see Using the channel lis t, 83 ) and select Channel directory . After the connection to the Channel Direct ory you ar e requested t o select t he nearest loca tion to your cur rent position from a li st of folder s marked by .
88 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Highlight the de sired location and press the joystick. Repeat this process until you reach t he list of r adio stations near t o your current pos ition. Note : Radio st ations, which provi de Visu al co ntent ar e mark ed with , t rad itional radio stations are m arked with . Highlight t he desired radio s tation by pushing t he joystick up or down a nd press the joystick to open t he selection menu for radio s tations: â¢S e l e c t List en to tune t o the highlighted radio station. To confir m the frequency setting pres s Yes or t he joystick. Press No to go back to prev iously tuned fre quency. The l ist of radio sta tions is displayed a gain and you may select an ot her radio st ation. â¢S e l e c t Start visual ser vice to open the Vis ual Content of the selected r adio station (if available). See âÂÂView Visual Contentâ on page 85. â¢S e l e c t Save t o save the de tails of the s elected radio stat ion to the c hannel list. â Re alPlay er⢠Select Menu â RealPlayer . With RealPlay erâ¢, you ca n play local me dia files stored in the phone memory, or memor y car d, or stre am media files over the air from a streaming link. The s treaming link can be activat ed during a browsing session or store d in the phone memory or memory car d. Media files are vide o, music or audio clips. File s with the extensions .3gp, .aac, .amr, .mp3, .mp4, .rm and .ram are supported by RealPlaye r.
89 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . RealPlayer does not nec essarily support all file format s or all th e variations of a file f ormats. For e xample, RealPlayer attempts to ope n all .mp4 f iles. However, some . mp4 files may include content that is not compliant with 3GPP sta ndards and, t herefore, is not supported by this phone. In t his case, t he operation might fail and r esult in partia l playback or in an error message. RealPlayer uses shared memory. See âÂÂShared memoryâ on page 17. Options in RealPlayer when a clip has been selected: Play , Continue , Sto p , Mute , Unmu te , Clip details , Send , Settings , Help , and Exit . Playing me di a fi le s To play a media file s tored in your phone âÂÂs memory or memory car d, scroll to t he file and pr ess the joystick t o play it, or go to RealPla yer and selec t Option s â Open and : ⢠Saved clip - To play a file sav ed in the Galle ry. See âÂÂGalleryâ on page 71. ⢠Mem. card sound c lips - To play s ound clips stored on the memory card. To s tream content over the air: ⢠Select a streaming link saved in th e Gallery. Bef ore your live cont ent begins streaming, your phone connec ts to the s ite and loads the f ile. ⢠Open the link to a file in the browser. To stream live conte nt, you must firs t configure your def ault access point . See âÂÂAccess pointsâ on page 143.
90 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Many service pr oviders require y ou to use an Inter net Access Point (IAP) for your default a ccess point. Other service providers allow y ou to use a WAP acc ess point. Contact y our service provider for more infor mation. Note : In RealPlaye r, you c an only o pen a n rtsp:// UR L add ress. You ca nnot ope n an http:// U RL addres s; however, R ealPl ayer recognis es an http link to a .ram file since a .ram file i s a text file contain ing an rtsp link. War ni ng: Do not hold the de vice near your ear wh en the loudspeake r is in use, because th e volume may be extr emely lo ud. Short cuts dur i ng play When a media file is playing use the joystick to seek (mov e quickly th rough the media file), and to mut e the sound, as follows: Move the joys tick up to seek fo rwards, or down t o seek backward s through the media file. Move the joys tick l eft, until the indicat or is displayed t o mute the sound. Move the joys tick right unt il you see the indicator to tur n on the sound. Ch angin g the setti ngs Select Options â S etting s â Video or Connection . Move the joys tick to t he right or t o the l eft to move betwee n the diffe rent setting tabs for Video and Connection . Select Video to change the following list of s ettings: ⢠Contrast - Ope n the slid er vie w to ch ang e the con tra st .
91 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Repeat - Choose On to have the curr ently playing video or audio file restart automatically once it has finished. Select Connection to ch ange the connection se ttings. â Movi e Dir ec tor "muvee s" are short, edited vide o clips that can contain video, music and text. An Quick muvee is cr eated automatically by the Movie directo r after you have selecte d the s tyle for the muvee. Movie director uses the defaul t music and text as sociated with the chos en style. Ev ery styl e has, for example, it s own font style, colour , music, and pace. With Custom muvee you can select your own video and music clips, image s and style, and you can also add an opening and closing message. muvees can be sent using M MS. Select Me nu â Movie and move the joystick to the right or t o the left to move between the director and muvee-clip views. To return to the main view from th e muve e-clip view, press Done . The muvee-clip view cont ains a list of muvee video c lips that you can Play , Send , Rename , and Dele te . Tip : To download new styles to y our phone, s elect Style downloads from the Movie direct or main view. ⢠To cr eate a quick muvee , select Quick muv ee , and pr ess the joy stick. Select a style f or the muv ee from th e style lis t, and press th e joystick . The creat ed muvee will be saved in the Movie director muv ee list. The muvee will be played automatically after sav ing.
92 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠To cr eate a cus tom muvee, select Custom muvee . W ith Video , Image , Style , or Music , choose the clips you want t o include in your muvee. Wit h Message you can add an opening t ext and a closing text to a muvee. Select Create muvee and se lect the lengt h of the muv ee: ⢠Multimedia message - the length of the muvee is optimised for MMS sending. ⢠Same as music - to set the muvee duration to be the s ame as the music clip cho se n. Options in the muv ee list options me nu: Play , Send , Rename , Dele te , Hel p and Exi t . ⢠User defined - to defi ne the length of t he muvee. Press OK to st art the muv ee cre atio n. ⢠To pr eview the cus tom muvee before saving it , in Preview muvee view, select Options â Play . ⢠To cr eate a new custom muvee by using the same style se ttings, select Options â Re create . ⢠To add an opening t ext and a closing text to a custom muvee when you are cr eat i ng it , i n Create muvee view se lect Message . Enter the opening message and t he closing message , and select Don e .
93 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Sett ings Select Settin gs to edit the following options: ⢠Memory in use - Select where to store your muve es. ⢠Resolution - Select the resolution of your muve es. ⢠Default muvee name - Set a de fault name for the muvees.
94 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 7. Messaging Select Menu â Messaging . In Messa ging you can creat e, send, receiv e, view, edit, a nd organise text messages, multimedia messages, e-mail messages, presentat ions, documents, smart messages, and special text messages containing data. You can also receive messages and data via an infrared or Bluetooth technology connection, receive service messages, c ell broadcast mes sages, and send service c ommands. Note that only devices that offer picture message fea tures can receive and display picture messages . Text mes sages and multime dia messages use s hared memory. See âÂÂShared memoryâ on page 17. Your d evice support s the sending of t ext mess ages beyond the norma l 160-cha racter limit . If yo ur m ess age ex ceed s 1 60 c har acte rs, it w ill be s en t as a se ries of t wo o r m ore me ssage s. Note that each me ssage will b e invoiced se parate ly according to your service providerâ s rates. In the navigat ion bar, you can see the me ssage leng th indicato r counting backw ards from 160. For e xample, 10 ( 2) means that you ca n still add 1 0 characters for the text to be sent as two message s. No te that u sin g sp ecia l (U nico de) c har acte rs such as ë , â, á, ì tak e up mor e sp ace . If there a re speci al characters in your mes sage, the indicato r may not sho w the message length correct ly. Befo re the mes sage is sen t, the device te lls you if the me ssage exce eds the
95 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . max imum leng th allow ed for one message . You ca n cance l sending by p ressing Cancel or you can save the mes sage in th e inbox. Options in the Mes saging main view ar e: Create message , Connect (shown if you hav e defined set tings for the mailbox ), or Dis conn ect (s hown if t here is an active c onnection to the mailbox), SIM messages , Cell broadcast , Service command , Settings , Help , an d Ex i t . When you open Messaging, you can see the New message function and a list of default folders : Inbox - Contains receiv ed messages e xcept e-mail and cell broadcast messages. E-mail messages are stored in the Mailbox . You can read ce ll broadcast messages by selecting Options â Cell broadcast . My f old ers - For or ganising your me ssages into folders. Mailbox - When you open t his folder, you can e ither connect t o your remote mailbox t o retrieve y our new e-mail me ssages or view your pr eviously retr ieved e- mail mes sages offline. Aft er you have def ined settings for a new ma ilbox, the name give n to that mailbox replaces Mailbox in the ma in view. See âÂÂE -mail messagesâ on page 111. Dra fts - Stores dr aft messages that have not be en sent. Sent - Stores the last 20 messages that have been s ent. You can change the number of messages to be sa ved. See â Settings for the Other folderâ on page 114. Messages or data that have been sent via an infrared or Bluet ooth technology connection ar e not saved in the Dr aft or Sent folders. Out box - Is a temporary storage place f or messag es waiting to be s ent.
96 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Reports ( network service) - You c an request the network t o send you a delivery report of t he text mes sages, smart messages, a nd multimedia mes sages you have sent. To t urn on deliver y report r eception, selec t Options â Settings â Text message or Multimedia message , scroll to Receive report , and select Ye s . Receiving a delivery repor t of a multimedia message that has been sent to an e- mail addres s might not be possible. â Wri ting a nd se nd ing me ssag es Select Menu â Messaging . Options in the t ext message editor: Send , A dd r ecipient , Insert , Del ete , Chec k contacts , Message details , Sending options , Hel p , and Exit . Before y ou can creat e a multimedi a message, or wr ite an e-mail, or connec t to your remote mailbox, you must have t he correct connection settings in place. See âÂÂSettings for e- mailâ on page 98. See â Settings for mult imediaâ on page 98. 1. Select New message . A list of mess age options opens. Selec t: ⢠Create: â Text message to cr eate a text message. To send a picture message, select O ptions â Insert â Picture . Each pic ture message is made up of several text messages. Therefore, sending one picture message may cost more than sending one text message. ⢠Create: â Multimedia message to se nd a multimedia message (MMS).
97 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Copyright protect ion may prevent some images, ringing t ones, and ot her content from being copied, modified, transferr ed or forwarded. ⢠Create: â E-mail to send e-mail. If you hav e not set up your e-mail account, you are pr ompted to do so. To add a media object to an e-mail, select O ptions â In se r t â Image , Sound clip , Video clip , Note or Template . 2. Press the joystick to select the recipient(s) from the Contacts directory or write the phone number or e -mail address of the recipient in the To: field if you are sending an MMS or e-mail to t he recipient. Press the # k ey to a dd a semicolon ( ; ) to separate eac h recipient. 3. Move t he joystick do wn to move to the message fie ld. 4. Write the m ess age . ⢠To add a media object to a multimedia message, select Options â Insert object â Image , Sound clip or Vide o clip . To add a new media object , select Options â Ins ert new â Image , Sound clip , Video clip or Sl ide . Select t he item you wish to add. When sound has been added, th e icon is shown in the navigation bar. If you select I nsert new â Sound clip , Recor der opens and you can record a new sound. The sound is aut omatically saved and a copy is inserted in t he message. 5. To send the m ess ag e, se lec t Options â Send or press the call key.
98 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Note : Pic ture m essage f unction c an be u sed o nly if it i s suppo rted by your ne twork opera tor o r ser vice p rovi der. O nly de vices that offer pict ure me ssag e fea ture s can receive a nd displa y pictur e messages . Only devices that off er compatib le mult imedia mess age or e-mail feature s can receive a nd displa y multimedi a message s. Settings for multimedia Select Options â S etting s â Multimedia message . Open Access point in use and sele ct the access point you created. See âÂÂMultimedia messagesâ on page 109. You may rec eive the settings as a smart message from your net work opera tor or service provider. Se e âÂÂReceiving smart mes sagesâ on page 101. For availa bility of and s ubscription to da ta services, cont act your networ k opera tor or service provider. The defaul t setting of the multi media mess age serv ice is gen erally on. The appearance o f a multim edia messag e may vary depend ing on the receiving d evice. Sett ing s fo r e- mail Before y ou can send, r eceive, ret rieve, re ply to, an d forward e-mail to a separate e-mail a ccount, you must: ⢠Configure an Internet Access Point (IAP) correctly. See âÂÂConnection se ttingsâ on page 143. ⢠Define your e-mai l settings corre ctly. See âÂÂE-mail messages â on page 111.
99 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Follow the i nstructions give n by your remote mailbox and Int ernet service provider.
100 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Inb ox - re ce ivin g messa ge s Select Menu â Messagingâ Inbox . Options in the Inbox: Op en , Create message , Reply , Delete , Message det ails , Move to folder , Mark/ Unmark , Help , and Exit . When there are unr ead messages in Inbox, the icon cha nges to . In Inbox, t he message icons tell you what k ind of a message it is. Here are some of the icons that you may see: indicates a n unread text mes sage and indicates an unread smart message indicates an unread multimedia message indicat es an unread WA P service message indicates data received via infrared indicates data received via Bluetooth technology indicates a n unknown message t ype. Viewing mul timedi a object s Options in the Objects view are: Open , Save , Send , Call , and Exit . To s ee what kinds of media obj ects have bee n included in t he multimedia message, ope n the mes sage and select Options â Objects . In the Objects view you can view files that have been included in the multimedia message. You can choose to save the file in your phone or to send it, for example, via infrared or Bluet ooth technol ogy to another compa tible devic e.
101 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Imp ort an t: Exer cise caution openi ng messages. Mess ages may contain mal icious software or otherwis e be harmful to you r device or PC. Receiving smart messages Your phone can receive ma ny kinds of smar t messages, text mes sages that contain data (also called Over-The-Air (OTA) messages). See âÂÂSettings for multimediaâ on page 98. and See âÂÂSet tings for e- mailâ on page 98. for more information on your phone se ttings. To open a received smart message, open t he Inbox, s croll to the smart message ( ), and press the joystick. ⢠Picture me ssage - To save the pictur e in the Picture messages folder in the Gallery for later use, select O ptions â Save pict ure . ⢠Business card - To sav e the contact information, s elect Options â Save busin ess ca rd . ⢠Ringing tone - To save the rin gin g ton e to th e Gal l ery, sele ct Options â Save . ⢠Operator logo - To save the logo, select Options â Save . The oper ator logo can now be seen in standby mode instead of t he network operatorâÂÂs own identification. ⢠Calendar entry - To sav e the invitation t o the Cale ndar, select O ptions â Save to Calendar . ⢠Web message - To save the book mark, selec t Opt ions â Save to bookmarks . Th e bookmar k is added to the Bookmarks list in browser s ervices. If the message contains bot h browser acce ss point settings and bookmarks, to save the da ta se lec t Options â Save all . O r, select Options â View details to
102 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . view the book mark and acc ess point information separate ly. If you do not wa nt to save all the da ta, select a setting or bookmark, open the details, a nd sel ect Options â Save to Settings or Save to bookmarks depending on w hat you are viewing. ⢠E-mail notification - Tells you how many new e-mails you have in your remot e mailbox. An e xtended notificat ion may list more de tailed information such as subject, sender, attachme nts, and so on. ⢠In addition, you can receive a text message se rvice number, voice mailbox number, profile settings for remote synchronisation, access point settings for the browser, multimedia messaging or e-mail, access point login script settings, or e -mail settings. To save the se tt ings, selec t Option s â Save to SM S sett. , Save to Voice mail , Save to Set tings , or Save t o e-mail sett. . Receiving service messages Service me ssages ( network serv ice) are notifi cations of, f or exampl e, news headlines, and they may contain a t ext messa ge or the addres s of a br owser service . For availabilit y and subscr iption, contact y our service pr ovider. â My fo l der s Select Menu â Messagingâ My fo lde rs . In My f olders, you c an organise your mes sages into folders, crea te new folders, and rename and delete folders.
103 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Ma ilbox Select Menu â Messagingâ Mailbox . When you open this folder , you can connect to yo ur remote mailbox (network serv ice) to: ⢠retr ieve new e-mail headings or messages, or ⢠view y our previousl y retrieved e -mail headings or messages offline. When you scroll to your mailbox and press the joys tick, the phone asks you if you want to Connect to mailbox? Sele ct Ye s to connect to your mailbox or No to view previously retrieved e- mail messages off line. Another way to start a c onnection is to select O ptions â Connect . If you select New message â Cre ate: â E-mail or Mailbox in the Messa ging main view and y ou have not set up your e-mail account , you are prompted t o do so. See âÂÂSettings for e- mailâ on page 98. When you create a new mailbox, the name you give to t he mailbox automatically replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have several mailboxes (max . six). When you are onli ne, select Options â Disconnect to end t he data call or GPRS connection t o the remot e mailbox.
104 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Retrievin g e-mail messages from the mailb ox Select Options â Connect . This starts a connect ion to a remote mailbox. 1. When you have an ope n connection to a remote mailbox, select Options â Retrieve e-mail â : ⢠New - To ret rieve all new e -mail messages to your phone. ⢠Select ed - To r etrieve only the e-mail messages that have been marked. Use the Mark/Unmar k â Mark / Unmark commands to select messages one by one. See âÂÂA ctions common to all applicationsâ on page 32. ⢠All - To retriev e all messages from the mailbox. To ca ncel ret rieving, press Cancel . 2. After you have retrieved the e-mail messages, you can continue viewing them online. Sele ct Options â Disconnect to close the connection and to view the e- mail mes sages offline. 3. To open an e-mail message, scroll to the e-mail you want to view and press the joystick. If th e e-mail message has not been r etrieved (arrow in the icon is pointing o utwards) and you are of fline and sele ct Ope n , you are asked i f you want to retrieve t his message fr om the mailbox. ⢠To vie w e-mail att achments, open a message that has the at tachment indicat or and select Options â A ttach men ts . In the Attachme nts view, you can retrieve, open, or save at tachments, in s upported formats. You can also send a ttachments via infrared or Bluetoot h technology.
105 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . If your mailbox uses t he IMAP4 protocol, you can de cide wh ether to retrieve e-mail headings only, messages only, or messages and attachments. With the POP3 protocol, the options are e-mail headings only or messages and attachments. See âÂÂE-mail messagesâ on page 111. Imp ort an t: Exer cise caution openi ng messages. Mess ages may contain mal icious software or otherwis e be harmful to you r device or PC. Del eting e-ma il messages ⢠To dele te an e-mail f rom the phone while still r etaining it in th e remote mailbox: Select Options â Del ete â Phone only . The phone mirrors the e-ma il headings in the remote mailbox. So , although you delete the message content, the e-mail heading stays in your phone. To remove t he heading as well, delete t he e-mail me ssage from your r emote mailbox first and then make a connection from your phone to the remote mailbox again to update t he status. ⢠To dele te an e-mail f rom both the phone and the remot e mailbox: Select Options â Del ete â Phone and server . If you ar e offline, the e-mail is deleted first f rom your phone. During the next connection t o the remot e mailbox, it is automatically deleted fr om the remote mailbox. If you ar e using the POP3 protocol, mes sages marked to be deleted ar e removed only after you have closed t he connect ion to the remot e mailbox.
106 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠To ca ncel deleting an e-mail from bot h the phone and server, s croll to an e- mail that has been marked to be dele ted during the next connection, a nd select Options â Undelete . â Outbox Select Menu â Messagingâ Ou tb ox . The O utbox is a t emporary storage place f or messages t hat are waiting to be sent. Status of the messages in the Outbox: ⢠Sending - A connect ion is being made and the mes sage is being s ent. ⢠Waiting/ Queued - For example, if ther e are two similar types of me ssages in the Outbox, one of t hem waits unt il the first one is sent. ⢠Resend at ... (time ) - Sending has f ailed. The phone t ries to send the me ssage again aft er a time-out pe riod. Press Send if you want to r estart the sending immediately. ⢠Deferred - You can set doc uments to be âÂÂon holdâ while they are in the Outbox. Scroll t o a message t hat is being s ent and select Options â De fer se ndi ng . ⢠Failed - The maximum n umber of sending att empts has been reached. If you were t rying to send a t ext me ssage, open t he message and c heck that the Sending se ttings are correct .
107 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Note : When sendin g messages, your de vice may display the words âÂÂMes sage SentâÂÂ. This is an in dicati on th at t he m essag e has be en s ent by you r de vice t o th e mes sage centre number progr ammed into yo ur device. Thi s is not an ind ication tha t the messag e has been rece ived at the i ntende d destinati on. For more details about messag ing service s, check with your s ervice pro vider. â Vi ewin g mess ages on a SIM card Before y ou can view SIM messages, y ou need to copy them to a folder in y our phone. See âÂÂA ctions common to all applicationsâ on page 32. â Cell b road cast Select Menu â Messagingâ Opt ions â Cell broadcast . You may b e able to receive mes sages on var ious topics, such a s weather or traffic c onditions from your s ervice provider (network ser vice). For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service pr ovider. In the main view , you can s ee: ⢠the status of the topic: - for ne w, subscribe d messages and - for new, unsubscribed messages. Options in Cell broadcast: Ope n , Subscribe / Unsubscribe , H otmark / Remo ve hotmark , T opic , Settings , Help , and Exit . ⢠the topic number, topic name , and whet her it has been flagged ( ) for follow- up. You wi ll be notified w hen messages bel onging to a f lagged topic have ar ri ved .
108 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . A packet data (GPRS) connection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Cont act your netw ork ope rator for the correc t GPR S s etting s. â Serv ice co mma nd edit or Select Menu â Messagingâ Opt ions â Service command . Enter and se nd service request s (also known as USSD commands) such as activat ion commands, for network ser vices, to your service pr ovider. â Messa ging s et ting s Select Menu â Messagingâ Opt ions â Settings . Tex t m ess ages Select Text messa ge . The following list of settings opens: ⢠Message cent res - List s all the def ined message c entres. Options when editing message centre settings: New msg. centre , Edit , Delete , Help , and Exit . ⢠Msg. centre in use (Message centre in use) - Defines which message centre is used for delivering t ext messages and smart mes sages such as picture messages. ⢠Receive report (delivery repor t) - When this network service is set to Ye s , the stat us of th e se nt me ssa ge ( P ending , Failed , Delivered ) is show n in the Reports (Network Serv ice).
109 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Receiving a delivery repor t of a multimedia message that has been sent t o an e-mail address might not be possible. ⢠Message validit y - If the recipie nt of a message cannot be reached within the validity per iod, the message is remov ed from th e message se rvice centre. Note that t he network must support this feature. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network for which the message remains valid. ⢠Message sent as - The opt ions are Text , Fa x , P aging , a nd E-mail . For further information, c ontact your network operator . ⢠Preferr ed connection - You can send text messages via the normal GSM network or via GPRS, if s upported by the network. ⢠Reply via s ame ctr . (network service ) - By setting this option to Ye s , if t he recipient replies to your message, the r eturn message i s sent using the same message servic e centre number. Note that not all network services provide this option. For availability, c ontact your network operator or service provider. Multimedia mess ages Select Multimedia message . The following lis t of settings opens: ⢠Access point in use ( Must be defined ) - Select which access point is use d as the preferr ed connection for the multimedia message centre. Se e âÂÂSettings for multimediaâ on page 98. If you r eceive multimedia message set tings in a sma rt message and save them, t he received settings are automatically used f or the Acc ess point. See âÂÂRec eiving smart messagesâ on page 101.
110 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Multimedia rece ption - Select: ⢠Only i n home net. - To receive multimedia message s only when you are in your home network. When you are outside your home network, multimedia message r eception is tur ned off. ⢠Always on - To always receive multimedia messages. ⢠Off - Not to receiv e multimedia mess ages or advert isements at all. ⢠On rece iving msg. - Select: ⢠Retr . immediately - To let the phone try t o retrieve mult imedia messages instantly . If there ar e messages with Deferred status, they are ret rieved as well. ⢠Defer retr ieva l - To let the multime dia messaging cent re save the message to be retrieved later . To retrie ve the mess age, set On receiving msg. to Retr. immediately . ⢠Reject message - To reject mult imedia messages. The multimedi a message centre deletes the messages. ⢠Allow anon. messages - Select No to reject messages coming from an anonymous sender. ⢠Receive adverts - De fine whether you want to allow reception of multimedia message adv ertisements or not. ⢠Reports - Se t to Yes , if you want the stat us of the sent mes sage ( Pending , Failed , Deliv ered ) to be shown in the Repor ts.
111 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Deny report sending - Choose Ye s , if you do not want your phone to se nd delivery report s of r eceived multimedia messages. ⢠Message validit y (network service) - I f the recipient of a mes sage cannot be reached wit hin the validity period, the message is removed fr om the multimedia message centre . Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network f or which t he message r emains valid. ⢠Image s ize - Define the size of the image in a multimedia mess age. The options ar e: Small (max. of 160x120 pixels) a nd Larg e (max. 640x480 p ixels). The defaul t setting of the multi media mess age serv ice is gen erally on. The appearance o f a multim edia messag e may vary depend ing on the receiving d evice. E-ma il m essa ge s Select E-mail . Open Mailbox in use to select which mailbox yo u want to use. Setti ngs f or M ail boxes Options when editing e-mail settings: Editing options , New mailbox , Delete , Help , and Exit . Select Mailboxes to open a list of defined mailboxes. If no mailboxe s have been defined, you are prompted t o do so. Th e following list of s ettings is shown (this information is available f rom your e-mail s ervice pr ovider): ⢠Mailbox name - Write a desc riptive name for the mailbox.
112 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Access point i n use ( Must be defined ) - The Internet Access Point (IAP) used f or the mailbox. Choose an IA P from the list. See âÂÂConnection settingsâ on page 143. ⢠My e-mail address ( Must be def ined ) - Wr ite the e- mail address given t o you by your s ervice pr ovider. The addres s must contain t he @ character. Replies to your mess ages are sent to this a ddress. ⢠Outgoing ma il server: ( Must be defined ) - Write the IP address or host name of the computer that sends your e-mail. ⢠Send message (network service) - Define how e-mail is s ent from your phone. Immediately - The phone tries to connect to the mailbox immediately aft er you have s elected Send . During next conn. - E- mail is sent the next time y ou connect t o your remote ma ilbox. ⢠Send copy to self - Select Ye s to save a c opy of the e -mail to your remote mailbox and to the address defined in My e-mail address . ⢠Include signature - Selec t Ye s to attach a signature to your e-mail messages and t o start to wr ite or edit a signature t ext. ⢠User name: - Write yo ur user name, provide d by your service provide r. ⢠Pas s wo rd : - Write your pass word. For increasing sec urity, you c an leave th is field blank, so that every t ime you try t o connect to your remote mailbox, you are prompted for the password Otherwise the password is s ent automatically. ⢠Incoming mail s erver: ( Must be defined ) - The IP address or host name of the computer that receives your e-mail.
113 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Mailbox type: - Defines the e-mail protocol your remote mailbox service provi der recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . This setting can be s elected only once and cannot be changed if you have saved or exited from t he mailbox s ettings. ⢠Secur ity - Used with the POP3, IMAP4, and SMTP protocols to secure t he connection t o the remot e mailbox. ⢠APOP secure login - Used with the PO P3 protocol to encrypt the sending of password s to the remote e -mail server. Not shown if IMAP4 is selected for Mailbox type: . ⢠Retrieve attachment s (not shown if the e-mail prot ocol is set to POP3) - To retrieve e-mail with or without attachments. ⢠Retrieve headers - To limit the number of e-mail hea ders you want t o retrieve to your phone. The options are All and User defined . Used with the IM AP4 protocol only. Serv ice messages Select Service message . The following list of set tings opens: ⢠Service mes sages - Choose whether or not you want to allow reception of service messages. ⢠Download messages - Choose t o download mes sages automatically or after your agreement.
114 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Cell broad cast Check w ith your service pr ovider whet her Cell broadcast (network service) i s available and what the available topics and related topic nu mbers are. Select Cell broadcast t o c hang e the s etti ngs : ⢠Reception - On or Off . ⢠Language - All allows you t o receive ce ll broadcast messages in ev ery possible language. Selected allows y ou to choose in which languages you wish to receive cell broadcast messages. If the language you prefer could not be found in the list, select Other . ⢠Topic detection - If you receive a me ssage that does not belong to a ny of t he existing topics , Topic detection â On allows you to s ave the topic number automatically . The topic number is saved t o the topic list and shown wit hout a name. Choos e Off if you do not w ant to save new topic numbers automatically . Sett ing s for t he O th er fol der Select Oth er . The following list of settings open s: ⢠Save se nt messages - Choose to save a copy of ev ery text message, multimedia message, or e-mail that you have sent to t he Sent items f older. ⢠No. of s aved msgs. - Define how many sent mes sages are sa ved to the Se nt items folder at a time. The default limit is 20 mes sages. When the limit is reached, t he oldest mes sage is delet ed.
115 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Chat Select Menu â Chat . Options in the Chat main view are: Op en , Lo gin , Logout , Settings , Help , and Exit . Chat (network service) allows you to conver se with ot her people using instant messages, and join discussio n forums (chat groups ) with specif ic topics. Once you have regis tered with a c hat servic e, you can log into the s ervice provider âÂÂs chat server . Check th e availability of chat se rvices, pricing, and tariffs with your net work operator and/or service provider. Service pr oviders also give you inst ructions on how to use their services. To ac cess a chat service you need to save the s ettings for tha t service. You ma y receive the sett ings from the ne twork operator or service pr ovider that of fers the servi ce. See âÂÂReceiving smart messagesâ on page 101. You c an also enter t he settings manually . See âÂÂChat and Presence serversâ on pa ge 123. Connect ing to a chat s erver Select Menu â Chat . 1. The phone automatically t ries to connect to a chat server . You can cha nge the chat serve r to connect to. See âÂÂChat and Presence serversâ on page 123. 2. Once the connection has been established, enter your user ID and password and pr ess the joy stick, or pr ess Cance l to stay offline. When you are offline,
116 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . your phone is not connected to t he chat server and you c annot send or receive messages. To log in later, select Options â Login . You obtain t he user ID and pas sword from your service provider. To log out, select Options â Logout . Modifyin g your cha t settin gs Select Options â S etting s â Chat settings . ⢠Use sc reen name - Select Ye s to enter a nickname (max. 10 characters). ⢠Chat prese nce - Prevent others from seeing if you are online, select Not a ctiv e . ⢠Allow messages from - Select All , From c hat contacts or None . ⢠Allow invitations from - Select All , From chat cont acts or Non e . ⢠Message spee d - Select the s peed at which new messages are display ed. ⢠A vailability reloading - Choose how to update information about whether your chat contacts are online or offline. Select Automatic or Manual . ⢠Reload availab. for - Select Al l con ta cts or Select ed contacts. Joining an d leaving a cha t g roup Select Menu â Chatâ Chat groups . A list of chat groups that you have saved or are currently joined to is shown. T he icon next t o a gr oup indicates what t ype it is: Options in the Chat groups view are: Open , Join group , Create new group , Leave chat group , Chat group , Search , Settings , Help , and Exit .
117 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠- A group t hat you have creat ed and are cur rently joined to. ⢠- A gr oup that you have creat ed but are not c urrently jo ined to. ⢠- A group t hat you have saved and a re curr ently joined to. ⢠- A gr oup that you have save d but are not c urrently joined t o. ⢠- A group that you are currently joined to but have not saved. To join a chat group: Scroll to a group on the list and press the joys tick. To join a chat gr oup not on the lis t but for which y ou know the group ID, s elect Options â Join group . Enter the group ID and press the joystick. You can s croll to a group, select Options â Chat group and then select: Save group , Dele te , View members to see which me mbers are cur rently joined t o the group, Chat group details to see the group ID, topic, members, editing rights in the group, and whe ther sending priva te messages is allowed in the group, a nd Chat group settings to vie w and edit the chat groupâÂÂs se ttings. See âÂÂEditing chat group settingsâ on page 122. To leave the chat group: Select O ptions â Leave chat group . Searc hing for ch at gr oup s and us ers Select Chat groups â O ptions â Se a rc h â Groups or User s . ⢠You can search for Groups by Group name , Topic , and Members (user ID). For groups that you hav e found you can select New sea rch , J oin and Save group . ⢠You can search for Us ers by User's name , Use r ID , Phone number , and E-mail address . For users that you have found you can select Ne w se arch , Open
118 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . conversat ion , Add to Chat contact to save the con tact , Send invitation , and Add to blocked list to block (or unblock) messages from the contact. When the search result is displayed, you can s elect Options â New sea rch , More result s from the same s earch, and Pr evious results to see your previous search result . Chat ting in a chat gro up Select Menu â Chatâ Chat groups . Once you have joine d a chat group, you can v iew the me ssages that ar e exchanged in the group, a nd send your own messages . Options while chatting: Send , Send priva te msg. , Reply , Send invitation , Leave chat group , Save group , Record convers. / Stop recording , Help , and Exit . ⢠To send a message, write the message and press the joystick. ⢠To s end a private message to a member (if allowed in the group), select Options â Send private msg. , select the recipient, write the message, and pres s the joystick . To reply to a private message sent to you, select Options â Reply . To invite chat cont acts who are online to join t he chat gr oup (if allowed in t he group), select O ptions â Send invitation , select the contacts you want to invite, write the invitation message, and press Done .
119 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Recordi ng messa ges To record the messages that are exchanged in a chat group or during an individual conversat ion, select O ptions â Re cor d conv er s . . Enter th e name for the message file and pr ess the joystick. To stop recording, select Options â Stop recording . The recor ded message files are saved to N otes. See âÂÂNotesâ on page 156. Blocki ng mes sages To preve nt receiving me ssages from certain chat us ers, selec t O ptions â Blocking options and then selec t: ⢠Add to blocked list - To block messages f rom the curr ently select ed user. ⢠Add ID to list manually - Enter the user ID of the user and press the joys tick. ⢠View block ed list - To see the use rs whose me ssages are block ed. ⢠Unblock - Select the user that you w ant to re move from the bloc ked list and press the joystic k. Starting and viewing individual conversati ons Select Menu â Chatâ Conversations . This shows a list of the chat users with whom y ou have an ongoing conversation. Options in the Conver sations view ar e: Send , Add to chat contact , Fo r war d , Record conv ers. / Stop recording , Blocking options , End conversation , Help , and Exi t . To s tart a new co nversation, s elect Options â New con ver sati on and then select:
120 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Select recipient - To see a lis t of your s aved ch at contact s that are curre ntly online. Scroll to the contact and press the joystick. ⢠Ent e r u se r I D - Enter t he user ID and pr ess the joystick. T he user ID is provided by th e service provider to those who register to the service . To vie w an ongoing conv ersation, scroll t o the user and press the joystick. To continue the conversation, write your mess age and press the joy stick. To r eturn to the conversa tions list wit hout closing the conversation, press Ba ck . To clos e the conversation, sele ct Options â End convers ation . Icon: next to a user indicat es that you have receiv ed a new me ssage from that us er. Ongoing conver sations are aut omatically clos ed when you e xit Chat. To save a us er to your ch at contacts, scroll to th e user and select Options â Add t o Chat contact . To s end automatic replies to inco ming messages, s elect Options â Set auto reply on . Ent er the text and press Don e . Chat contacts Select Menu â Chatâ Chat contacts . Options in the C hat contacts view ar e: Open , Op en conversation , Switch tracking on , Belongs to groups , N ew Chat contact , Edit , Dele te , Reload user availab. , Blocking opt ions , Search , Sett ings , Hel p , and Exit . This shows a list of your saved chat contacts. is shown n ext to contacts that are currently online, and indicates contacts that are offline.
121 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . To cr eate a n ew cont act, select Options â New chat cont act . Fil l in the N ame and User ID fiel ds and press Don e . You can s croll to a contact and press the joys tick to vie w contact de tails. Press Options and select: ⢠Edit - Edit the contactâÂÂs de tails. ⢠Open c onversation - Start a new conversa tion or continue an ongoi ng co nve rsat io n with the c ont act . ⢠Switch track ing on - Be notified ev ery time the c hat contact goes online or offline. ⢠Belongs to groups - See which groups t he chat cont act has joined. ⢠Reload user avai lab . - Update information a bout whether contact s are online or offline. This option is not available if you have s et the Availability reloading to Automatic in Chat setti ng s . Creating a n ew ch at gr oup Select Chat groups â Optionsâ Cr eate new group . Enter th e sett in gs for t he group: ⢠Group name , Group topic , and a W elcome note that the participants s ee when they join the group. ⢠Group size - Maximum number of members allowed to join the group. ⢠Allow search - Define if others can f ind the chat group by searching.
122 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Editing rights - Scroll to the chat group members to whom you want to give editing rights and permission to invite contacts to join the group. ⢠Group members - See âÂÂRestricti ng access to a c hat groupâ on page 122. ⢠Banned - Dis plays a lis t of banned users. ⢠Allow private msgs. - Allow or prevent private messaging between members. ⢠Group ID - Is crea ted automatically and cannot be changed. Editi ng chat gr oup set tings Select Men u â Chat â Chat groups . You can e dit the sett ings for a chat group if y ou have creat ed the group or if the creator of the group has given you editing rights. In the Chat groups view, scroll to the desired group and select Options â Chat group â Chat group se ttings . See âÂÂCreating a new chat groupâ on page 121. Re str ic ting ac cess t o a c ha t gr oup You can ma ke a chat group closed by crea ting a Group members li st. Onl y the users on the list are allowed t o join the group. Select the Chat groups view, scroll to the group and select Options â Chat group â Chat group settings â Group members â Selected only . ⢠To add a user t o the list, select Add and Chat cont act or Enter use r ID . ⢠To remove a user from the list, scroll to the user and sele ct Remo ve . ⢠To cle ar the list a nd allow all cha t users to join the group aga in select Remov e all .
123 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Chat and P resence se rvers Select Options â Settings â Server sett ings . You may receive the settings as a sma rt message f rom the serv ice provider that offers the chat s ervice. ⢠To ch ange t he chat or presence serve r you w ish to c onnect t o, select De fault serve r . ⢠To c hange the Presence login type, select Login type and select Automatic , Aut. in home net. , or Manual . ⢠To cha nge the Chat login t ype, select Login t ype and selec t Automatic or Manual . ⢠To add a new server, select Options â New ser ver . Enter or sele ct th e set ti ngs: Server name and Access point in us e to conne ct to the se rver, Web address of the chat server, your Us er ID and login Pa s s w o r d . See âÂÂConnection settingsâ on page 143. You obtain t he user ID and pas sword from your service provider w hen you register for the servic e. If you do not k now your us er ID or pas sword, contact your service provider.
124 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 8. Tools â App licat ions Select Menu â Tools â Manager . You can ins tall new compat ible Symbian operat ing system applications (SIS files) and Java⢠applications (Java MIDlets and MIDlet suites) on your phone. You can also update and uninstall applications from the phone, and monitor the ins tallation history. Your phone support s J2MEâ¢Java applica tions. Do not downloa d PersonalJava⢠applicat ions to your phone as they cannot be inst alled. Options in the Applicat ion manager main v iew are: Install , View details , View cert ificate , Update , Go to web addres s , Rem ove , View log , Send log , Settings , App. downloads , Help , and Exit . Applications in the Applicat ion manager use shar ed memory. See âÂÂShared memoryâ on page 17. When you open the Application manager, you can se e a list of: ⢠Applications s aved in t he Application manager. ⢠Partially installed applic ations (indicated by ). ⢠Fully ins talled applications t hat you can r emove (indicated by ). You can only use Symbia n operating system applic ations with a .SIS e xtension.
125 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Dow nload ing an app licati on Your phone supports J2ME TM Java applic ations. Make su re that the application is compatible wit h your phone bef ore downloading it . You can downloa d new Java applications in different ways: â¢S e l e c t Menu â Tools â M anager â App. downloads and the lis t of availa ble bookmar ks is s hown. Select t he appropriat e bookmark to connec t to the desired page. If the connect ion fails, you may not be able to acces s the page from the s ervice whose connection set tings are cu rrently act ive. In this case, enter the Web menu and ac tivate another se t of service s ettings. See â Making a connectionâ on page 172. Try again to connect to the pa ge. For the availability of different services, pricing and tariffs, contact your network operator and/or the service provider. â¢S e l e c t Menu â We b â Download . Select to download an appropriate application or game. ⢠Use t he Nokia Application installer from PC Suite to download t he applications to your phone. Imp ort an t: Only ins tall and use applica tions and other soft ware from source s that offer adequate security and pro tection against harmful software. Note t hat when downloading an application, it ma y be saved in the Games menu instead of the Web menu.
126 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Installin g an applica tion You can ins tall applications t hat are specif ically intended f or this phone and suitable f or the Symbi an operating system. If you ins tall an application that is not intended specifically f or this phone, it may function a nd look different f rom what was or iginally intended. ⢠Open the Application manager, scroll to the application, and s elect Options â Ins tall to star t the in stal latio n. ⢠Alter natively, sea rch the phone me mory or t he memory car d, selec t the applicat ion, and press t he joystick to start the ins tallation. Applications may be downloaded to y our phone during brows ing, received a s attachments in multimedia messages or e-mails, or r eceived via infrared or Bluetooth technology from another device , for example, a phone or a compat ible PC. Imp ort an t: Use only servi ces that you trus t and that offer adequate se curity and protection against harmful software. To increas e protection, t he applicat ion installation syste m uses digital signat ures and cert ificates for appl ications. Do not install the appl ication if t he Application manager gives a sec urity warning during ins tallation. If you ins tall an application that contains an update or repair to an existing applicat ion, you can only restore the original application if you hav e the original applicat ion or a full backup copy of the removed application. To restore the original applicat ion, first remov e the updated or repaired applica tion and then r e- install it from the original appl ication or t he backup copy .
127 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . During ins tallation, the phone c hecks th e integrity of t he application to be installed. T he phone shows information about the chec ks being carried out and you are giv en options whet her to cont inue or cancel the installation. O nce the phone has checked the int egrity of th e application, it is installe d on your phone. Insta ll ing a Ja vaâ¢a pplic ati on The .JAR f ile is required f or installation. If it is miss ing, the phone may a sk you t o download it . If there is no acces s point defined f or the Application mana ger, you are ask ed to select one. When downloading the .J AR file, you may need t o enter a user name and passwo rd to acces s the serve r. You obtain thes e from the suppl ier or manufac turer of the a pplication. ⢠To s tart a data connection a nd to view ext ra information about the application, s croll to it and select Options â Go to web addres s . ⢠To s tart a data connection a nd to chec k if there is an update availa ble for the application, s croll to it and select Options â Update . Java set tin gs ⢠To cha nge the default access point that a Java application us es for downloading ex tra data, sele ct Options â Settings â A ccess point . See âÂÂAccess pointsâ on page 143. ⢠To cha nge the s ecurity settings that determine the actions that a Java application is permitted to perform, select Option s â Settin gs . Not all J ava applications permit you t o change the s ecurity set tings.
128 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Launchin g an applica tion 1. Select Menu â We b â Applications â Select application: . 2. Scroll t o an applicat ion or an a pplicat ion set (the name depe nds on the application). 3. Select Options â Ope n or pr ess the call ke y. If the s election is a single application it is launched. Otherwise, a list of applications in the selected application set is displayed. To launch a s ingle application, s croll to the des ired application and select Options â Open , or press the call key. Note that running some applic ations may consume the phoneâÂÂs battery faster (and you may need to conn ect the phone to t he charger) . Other opt io ns avai labl e for an appli ca tion or appli catio n set ⢠Delete - Delete th e application or application se t from the phone . ⢠Application acces s - Restrict the appli cation from acce ssing the net work. Select Ask fi rst and th e phone asks for net a ccess, Al ways allowed t o allow the net access, or Not allo wed not to allow the net access. ⢠Update - Check if a new ver sion of the applic ation is available for download from the se rvices (network servic e). ⢠Go to web address - P rovide further informat ion or additional data for the applicat ion from an Internet page. This feature needs to be supported by the network. It is only sh own if an Inte rnet address has been provided wit h the application.
129 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Details - G ive additional inf ormation about t he application. Memo ry st atu s f or ap pl i cat io ns Select Menu â Extrasâ Memo ry . This shows the amount of me mory availa ble for game and application installations. The applic ations use shar ed memory. See âÂÂShared memoryâ on page 17. Rem oving an appli cation 1. To remove an applicat ion, scroll to it and s elect Options â Remo ve . 2. Press Ye s to confirm the removal. If you r emove an applic ation, you can only re-install it if you have th e original applicat ion or a full backup of the removed applicat ion. If you r emove an applicat ion, you may no longer be able t o open document s created wit h that applicat ion. If another applic ation depends on t he application t hat you remove d, the other application may stop worki ng. Refer to t he documentation of t he installed appli cation for details. â File ma nag er Select Menu â Tool s â File manager . In the File manager, you can br owse, open, a nd manage files a nd folders in t he phone memor y or on the memory car d, if you use one.
130 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Options in the Fi le manager main view ar e: Open , Send , Dele te , Move to folder , Copy to folder , New folder , Mark/Unmark , Rename , Find , Rec eive via infrared , View details , Memor y details , Help , and Exi t . Open the File manager to see a list of t he folders in t he phone memor y. Move th e joystick to the right to see the folders on the memory card, if you use one. You can browse, open, and create folders , mark, copy a nd move items to folders . See âÂÂActions c ommon to all applicat ionsâ on page 32. Co pyright prot ections may preven t some ima ges, ri ngin g tones , and o ther conte nt from bei ng c opi ed, mo di fie d, tr ans fe rr ed or fo rwa r de d. Receiving files via I nfrared Select Options â Receive via infrared . Files are automatically receive d into the r oot level of the folder str ucture and c an be moved or copied to ot her folders. See âÂÂInfrared connectionâ on page 186. View ing memo ry cons umptio n Select Options â Memory details . If you have a memory card installed in your phone, you have a choice of two memory view s, one for the phone memory and one f or the memory card. Move the joys tick to t he right or t o the l eft to move f rom one memory t ab to ano t he r. To che ck memory cons umption of the cur rent memory s elect Options â Memory details .
131 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . The phone calculates t he approximate amount of free memory for s toring data and installing new applicati ons. In the memory views, you can view the memory consumption of the different data groups: Calendar , Contacts , Documents , Images , Sound f iles , Video clips , Messages , A pplications , Mem. in use , a nd Free memory . If the phone memory is getting low, remove some f iles, or move them to t he memory car d. See âÂÂTroubleshootingâ on page 193. â V oice c omm and s Select Menu â Tool s â Vo i c e c o m. . You can us e Voice comma nds to start applicati ons and profiles, a nd to dial number s from Contacts, without having to look at yo ur phoneâÂÂs display. You record a word, or words ( voice command) and then pronounce this voice command to open an application, activate a profile, or dial a number. You can ha ve only one v oice command per item. Options in the Voice commands main view ar e: Add voice command , Open , New appl ication , Playbac k , Change , Delete , Delete all , He lp , and Exit . Any spoken wor d(s) can be a voice command. ⢠When recording, hold the phone at a short dis tance away from your mouth. After the starting tone, cle arly prono unce the word, or words, y ou want to record as a voice command. Before using voi ce tags, no te that: ⢠V oice tag s are not la ngua ge-depen dent. T hey are depe ndent on the speak er's voice.
132 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Y ou must say the n ame exactly as you said it when you recorded it. ⢠V oice tags a re sensiti ve to backgroun d noise. Record vo ice tags and us e them in a quiet environme nt. ⢠V ery sho rt names are n ot accepted . Use lon g names and avo id similar n ames for differen t num be rs . Note : Usin g voice tag s may be difficult in a noisy en vironmen t or during an emerge ncy, so you shoul d not rely solely u pon voice di alling in al l circumstance s. Add ing a voice com mand to an appl icat ion 1. In the Voice commands main view, scr oll to the a pplication that you want to add a v oice command t o, and se lect Options â A dd voice tag . To add a voice co mmand to a prof ile, the Pr ofiles folder must be opened and a specific pr ofile selected. To add an application to the list of a pplications in the Voice commands main view, sele ct Options â New application , scroll to t he application that you want to a dd and press Select . 2. The t ext Press 'Start', t hen speak after t one is displayed. â¢P r e s s Start to r ecord a voice command. The phone sounds a starting tone and th e note Speak now is displayed. 3. Pronounce the voice command. The phone stops recording after approximately 5 seconds.
133 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 4. After r ecording, the phone plays the recor ded command a nd the note Playing voice c ommand is displayed. If you do not want to save the recor ding, press Quit . 5. When the voice command has be en successfully saved, the not e V oic e command saved is displayed and a beep s ounds. A symbol can be se en next to the application. Star ti ng a n ap pli cat io n u sin g a voi c e co mma nd 1. In standby mode, press a nd hold the ri ght selection key. A short tone is played and the n ote Speak now is displayed. 2. When you are st arting an application by saying a voice command, hold the phone a short distance away from yo ur mouth and pronounce the voice command cl early. 3. The phone plays th e original voice command and star ts the applicatio n. If the phone plays an incorre ct voice command, press Retry . Replay ing, e ras ing , or ch angin g a voice comm and To replay, erase, or change a voice command, scroll to t he item that has a voice command (indica ted by ), select Options , and then either: ⢠Playback - L isten to the v oice command aga in. ⢠Delete - Erase t he voice c ommand. ⢠Change - Rec ord a new voic e command. Pr ess Start to recor d.
134 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Dev ice man ager Select Menu â Tool s â Device mgr . . Device ma nager allows a third part y, such as your servi ce provider, to assist you directly with phone settings. To allow device ma nagement, your phone must es tablish a connec tion and synchronise with the t hird partyâÂÂs server. You can start the s ynchronisation session from your phone, and you can accept or reject server-initiat ed synchronisation attempts. Options in the D evice manager main view are: St art configuration , Ne w server prof ile , E dit profile , De le te , Enable config. / Disable conf ig. , View log , He lp , and Exit . This feature is operator dependent and may not be av ailable on all phones . Contact y our service provider for information and availability. A device manager profile mus t be de fined before you can connect t o a server. T he third party who is assisting you can help define the pr ofile settings: ⢠Server name - Display name of the server. ⢠Server ID - Remote de vice manager s erver ID. ⢠Server password - Password used in server aler ts. Enter the pas sword that must be provided by the de vice manager server when synchronising with y our phone. ⢠Access point - Internet ac cess point y our phone uses to establish the s erver connection. Choos e from the lis t of acces s points defined in your phone . ⢠Host addres s - Device manageme nt server URL.
135 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Por t - Device manageme nt server port. ⢠User name - Your user name f or this profile. ⢠Pas s wo rd - Your password for this profile. ⢠Allow configuration - Device management allowed on this server. Select Ye s or No . ⢠Auto-accept all reqs. - Automatic or ap proved device mana gement on this server . Select Ye s to allow synchronisation w ithout your ver ification, or select No to verify each synchronisation at tempt.
136 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 9. P e rsonalising your phone â Pro fil es Select Menu â Profiles . Options in the Prof iles main v iew are: Acti v ate , Personalise , Create new , D elete profile , Hel p , and Exit . In Profiles, y ou can adjust and customise t he phone tones for different event s, enviro nments, or caller gr oups. You can se e the current ly selected profile at the top of the display in standby mode. If the General profile is in use, only the current date is shown. To cha nge the profile, s croll to a profile and s elect Options â A cti vate . To modify a profile, s croll to the pr ofile in the Profiles list and s elect Options â P ers onalise . To cr eate a new pr ofile, select O ptions â Create new . A lis t of profile settings opens. Scroll to th e setting you want t o change and press the joysti ck to open the choices: ⢠Ringing tone - Set the ringing tone fo r voice calls , choose a ringing tone f rom the list. Press a ny key t o stop the sound. If a memory card is used, tones stored on it have t he ic on next to t he tone name. R inging tones use shared memory. See âÂÂSha red memoryâ on page 17. You c an also change ringing t ones in Contacts. See âÂÂAdding a r inging toneâ on page 57. ⢠Ringing type - When Ascending is selec ted, the ringing vo lume starts fr om level o ne and increases level by level to the set volume le vel.
137 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Ringing volume - Set t he volume leve l for the ringing and message ale rt tones . ⢠Message aler t tone - Set the tone for messa ges . ⢠Chat alert tone - Set the tone fo r inst an t mes sag es. ⢠Vibrating alert - Set the phone to vibrate at incoming voice calls and messages. ⢠Keypad tones - Set the volume level f or keypad t ones. ⢠Warning tones - The phone sounds a warning tone, for example, when the battery is running low. ⢠Alert for - Set the phone t o ring only upon ca lls from phone numbers that belong to a s elected cont act group. Phone calls coming from people outside the selected group have a silent alert. The choices are All calls or (a list of contact groups, if you hav e created th em). â Theme s Select Menu â Th emes . Options in the Themes main v iew are: Preview , Apply , Edit , He lp , and Exit . You can c hange the look of your phoneâÂÂs display by activating a theme. A theme can include the idle screen wallpape r, colour palett e, screen saver, and background image in âÂÂGo t oâÂÂ. Edit a t heme for more detailed pers onalisation. When you open Themes you s ee a list of the available themes. The cur rently active theme is indicated by a check mark. Move the joys tick to the r ight to s ee the themes on the memor y card, if you use one.
138 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . To previe w a theme, scroll t o the th eme and select Options â Prev iew to vie w the theme. Press Apply to acti vate the th eme . You c an activ ate the the me with out previewing it by select ing Options â Apply from the main view. Group toget her elements from other themes , or images from the Gallery to personalis e themes further . Editing a theme: 1. Scrol l to a theme, select O ptions â Edit , and select: ⢠Wallpaper - Select an image from one of t he available themes, or select your own image from the Gallery, to us e as a backgr ound image in standby mode. ⢠Colour palette - Change the c olour palette used on the dis play. ⢠Screen sav er - Select what i s shown on the screen sav er bar: the t ime and date or a text th at you have w ritten yours elf. The location and background colour of the screen s aver bar c hanges in 1-minute intervals. Also, t he screen saver changes to indicate the number of new messages or missed calls. You can set the t ime that elaps es before the screen saver is activated. See âÂÂPhone settingsâ on page 139. ⢠Image in 'G o to' - Select an image from one of the avai lable themes, or select y our own image from th e Gallery, t o use as a back ground image in Go to. 2. Scroll to the eleme nt to be edited a nd select O ptions â Change . 3. Select Options â Set to select t he current setting. To preview t he selected element , select Options â Preview . N ote that you cannot pr eview all elements.
139 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . To res tore the currently selec ted theme to its original se ttings, select Options â Res tore orig. t heme when editing a theme. â Sett i ngs Ch angin g gene ral setti ngs Select Menu â Setting s 1. Scroll to a setting group and press the j oystick to open it. 2. Scrol l to a setting you want to c hange and pr ess the joyst ick to: ⢠switch between options if there are only t wo ( On /Off ), ⢠open a li st of options or an editor, ⢠open a s lider view and move the joystick to the right or to the lef t to increase or decreas e the value r espectively . You may b e able to receive some settings from y our service provider in a shor t message. See âÂÂReceiving smart mes sagesâ on page 101. Ph one set tin gs Select Phone . Gene ral ⢠Phone language - Change the l anguage for t he display text s in yo ur phone. This change may als o affect th e format used for date and t ime and t he separato rs used, for ex ample, in calculations. If y ou select Automatic , the
140 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . phone select s the language ac cording to t he information on your SIM car d. After you ha ve changed t he display text language, you mus t restart the phone . Changing the settings f or Phone language or Wr iting language affect s e very application in y our phone and the change remains effective unt il you change these s ettings again. ⢠Writing language - Change the writing langua ge of your phone . Changing the language affects: ⢠the characters a vailable when y ou press any key 1 - key 9 ⢠the predictive text dictionary used ⢠the s pecial charact ers that are available when you pres s the * key and key 1 . ⢠Dictionar y - Set predictive text input On or Off f or all editors in the p hone. Select a language for entering predictive text from the lis t available. You can also c hange this setting when you are in an editor. Press the # key a nd se lect Dictionary â Dictionary on or Of f . ⢠Welcome note or lo go - The welcome note or logo is dis played br iefly each t ime you switch on the phone. Selec t Default if you want to us e the default image or animation. Select T ext to write a welcome not e (max. 50 lett ers). Select Image to select a p hoto or picture from the Gallery. ⢠Orig. phone s ettings - Reset some o f the settings to t heir original values. To do this, you need the l ock c ode. See âÂÂSecurityâ on page 149. After res ettin g the settings, t he phone may take a longer time to powe r up. All documents and files t hat you have created are left as they a re.
141 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Standby mode ⢠Left selec tion key an d Right selection key - Change the shortcuts t hat appear over the left and right se lection keys in s tandby mode. In addition to the applications, you c an have the s hortcut point to a function, for example, New me ssage . You can only have shortcut s to pre-installed applications and f unctions. Disp lay ⢠Brightness - Adjust the br ightness of the dis play. ⢠Screen sav er timeout - T he screen s aver is act ivated when the s creen save r time-out period is over. When the screen saver is active, the dis play is cleared and you can see t he screen saver bar . ⢠To deac tivate the sc reen s aver pres s an y key. Call s ett ings Select Call . Send my caller ID (n etwo rk se rvic e) ⢠Set your phone number t o be displayed ( Yes ) or hidden ( No ) from the person whom you are calling. Or, the value may be s et by your network operator or service provider whe n you make a subscripti on. Call waiting ( ne twork se rvic e) ⢠The net work notifies you of a new incoming call whil e you have a call in progres s. Select A cti vate to reques t the networ k to activ ate call wait ing,
142 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Cancel to request the network to deac tivate call waiting, or Check status to check if the function is active or not. Auto mati c red ial ⢠When this setting is act ivated, your phone makes a maximum of ten at tempts to co nnect the ca ll after an uns uccessful c all attempt. Pr ess the end ke y to stop automatic redialling. Summary after call ⢠Activa te this s etting if you want the phone t o briefly dis play the approximate duration of t he last cal l. Speed dialling â¢S e l e c t On , and the number s assigned to t he speed-dial ling keys ( 2 - 9 ) can be dialled by pressing and holding th e key. See âÂÂAssigning speed- dialling keysâ on page 59. Anykey answer â¢S e l e c t On , and you c an answer an inc oming call by brief ly press ing any key, exc e pt the right selection key , the power key, a nd the end key. Line in use ( netw ork s erv ice ) ⢠This setting is shown only if the SI M card supports two subscriber numbers, that is , two phone lines . Select which p hone line ( Line 1 or Li ne 2 ) you want to use for mak ing calls and sending short mes sages. Calls on both line s can be answered irres pective of the selected line. Note : You cannot make calls if yo u select Line 2 and have not subscr ibed to this network service.
143 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . To preve nt line selection, s elect Line change â Disable i f supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Conne ction se ttin gs Select Connection settings . Access p oin ts Here y ou can see a short explanat ion for every setting t hat may be needed for different data connecti ons and acce ss points. If you have not yet us ed your phone to ma ke a WAP connection, you may need to c ontact your service provid er for a ssi sta nce w ith th e fi rst- ti me conn ec tion . Many service pr oviders require y ou to use an IAP f or your default access point. Other service provide rs allow you to use a W AP access point. Contact your s ervice provider for more information. Start t o fill in the settings from the t op since, depending on the data connection you select ( Data bear er ), only certain f ields are available. ⢠Connection name - Give a descriptive name for t he connection. ⢠Data bear er - The options are GPRS or Data call . De pending on what data connection you select, only certa in setting fields ar e available. Fill in all f ields marked wit h Must be defined , or with an asterisk. O ther fields c an be left empty, unles s you have been instructe d otherwise by y our service provider . To be able t o use a data connect ion, the net work operator or service provider must support this feature, and if necessary, activate it for y our SIM card
144 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Access point name (for packet dat a only) - T he access point name is needed to establish a connection to the GPRS network. You obtain the access point name from your network operator or service provider. ⢠Dial-up number (for data call only) - T he modem telephone number of the acces s point. ⢠User name - Write a user name if requir ed by the s ervice prov ider. The user name may be needed t o make a data co nnection, and is usually provided by the service provider. The us er name is often case-sensi tive. ⢠Prompt pas sword - If you must enter a new password eve ry time y ou log onto a server, or if you do not want t o save y our password to t he phone, choos e Yes . ⢠Pas s wo rd - A password may be nee ded to make a data connect ion, and is usually provided by th e service p rovider. The pass word is ofte n case-sensitive . When you are writing the password, the characters you enter are shown briefly and t hen changed to asterisks ( * ). The e asiest way to ent er numbers is t o press and hold t he digit you want to enter, and then continue e ntering letters. ⢠Authenti cat ion - Normal / Secur e. ⢠Homepage - Depending on what you ar e setting up, ent er either: ⢠the service address, or ⢠the address of the mult imedia messaging ce ntre. ⢠Data call t ype (for data call only) - Analogue , ISDN v .1 1 0 , or ISDN v .120 de fines whether the phone uses an analogue or digit al connection. This setting depends on both your GSM net work operator and Internet Service Pr ovider (ISP), becaus e some GSM networ ks do not support c ertain types of ISDN
145 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . connections. For details , contact y our ISP. If ISDN connections ar e available, they establish connections more quickly than analogue me thods. ⢠Maximum data speed (for data c all only) - T he options are Aut omatic , 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 38 400or 43200, de pending on the chosen Data call type . This option allow s you to limit t he maximum connec tion speed when GSM data are used. Higher data rates may cost more, dep ending on the service provi der. The s peeds above represent the ma ximum speed at which your c onnection operates . During the conne ction, th e operating speed may be less , depending on network conditions. Options â A dvanced settings ⢠Netwo rk ty pe â The internet pr otocol (IP) version of t he network. ⢠Phone IP address - The IP address of your phone. ⢠Name s ervers - The IP a ddress of the pr imary and secondary D NS servers. ⢠Proxy serv. address - The IP address of t he proxy server. ⢠Proxy por t number - T he port number of the proxy server. To enter these se ttings, contact your Internet se rvice provide r. The following settings are shown if you have selected data call as the connection type: ⢠Use callbac k - This option allows a server to call y ou back once you have made the initial call. Contact your service provider to s ubscribe to this service.
146 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . The phone expects t he callback call to us e the same data call settings th at were us ed in the callback-requesting c all. The networ k must suppo rt that type of call in both dir ections, to and from the phone. ⢠Callback type - T he options are Use s erver no./ Use other no. . Ask your servi ce provi der for t he correct setting to use. ⢠Callback number - Ent er your phoneâÂÂs dat a phone number which the dial-back server us es. Usually, t his number is the data-call phone number of your phone. ⢠Use PPP compr ession - Whe n set to Ye s , t his option speed s up data transf er, if supported by the remote PPP server. If you have problems with establishing a connection, t ry set ting this to No . Contact your service provider for guidance. ⢠Use login s cript - The options are Ye s / No. ⢠Login script - Insert the l ogin script. ⢠Modem initialisation (Modem initialisation s tring) - Controls your phone using modem AT c ommands. If required, enter characters s pecified by your service provi der or Internet s ervice provider . GPRS Select GPRS . The GPRS s ettings affect all access poi nts using a pac ket data c onnection. GPRS connection - If you select When available and you ar e in a net work that supports pac ket data, the phone registers to the GPRS netw ork and short messages are sent via GPRS. Als o, start ing an acti ve packet dat a connect ion, for example, to send and r eceive e-mail, is quicker. If you select When needed , th e phone uses a pac ket data connection only if you start an application or action t hat
147 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . needs it. The GPRS c onnection can be c losed when it is not neede d by any applicat ion. If there i s no GPRS coverage and you have chosen When available , the phone periodically tries to es tablish a packe t data connection. Access point - The access point name is needed when you want t o use your phone as a packet data modem to your computer. Data c all Select Data c all . The Data call settings af fect all access points t hat use a GSM dat a call. Online time - If t here are no actions the data call is dropped automati cally after a time-out period. In the option Change sel ect User defined to enter a time, or Unlimited .
148 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Date an d ti me Select Date and time . The Date and time settings allow you to define the date and time used in your phone, as well as change the dat e and time format and separator s. ⢠Time and Dat e - to s et the time and date. ⢠Date forma t - to choose be tween European, US and Japanes e format. ⢠Date separa tor - to choos e betwee n several separators . ⢠Time for mat - to choose between 24-hour and 12- hour time form at. ⢠Time s eparator - to choose betwee n several separ ators. ⢠Clock t ype â Analogue or D igital - To ch ange the clock show n in standby mode. See âÂÂClockâ on page 160. ⢠Clock alarm t one - To change the t one played when the c lock alarm time is reached. ⢠Auto time update - To a llow the network to update time, date, and time zo ne information t o your phone (network service). For the Auto time update se tting to take effect , the phone ne eds to be r estarted. Ch eck any al arms as t hese may be aff ected by Auto time update . ⢠GMT offs et - To change t he time zone f or the clock time. ⢠Daylight-sa ving - To turn daylight saving time on or off.
149 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Secur it y Select Security . Phone and SI M You can c hange the following codes: lock code, PIN code, and PIN 2 code. These codes can only include t he numbers from 0 to 9 . Avoid using acce ss codes similar t o emergency numbers, such as 112, t o prevent accident al dialling of t he emergency number. PIN code request - When the PIN code request is a ctive, the c ode is request ed each time the phone is s witched on. Note t hat some SIM cards may not allow the PIN code request to be deactivated. PIN code /PIN2 code / Lock code - Open this s etting if you want to change t he code. Autolock period - You can set an autolock per iod, a time-out after whic h the phone is automatically locked and can be used only if the corr ect lock code is entered. Enter a number for the time-out in minutes or select None to tur n off t he autolock per iod. ⢠To unlock the phone, enter the lock code. Lock if SIM changed - Select Ye s if you w ant the phone t o prompt for the lock c ode when an unknow n, new SIM card is ins erted into your phone. The phone maintains a list of SI M cards that are recognised as t he ownerâÂÂs cards. Options in the Fi xed dialling view are: Open , Call , Activ . f ixed dialling , Deact. fixed dialling , New contac t , Edit , Delete , Add to Contacts , A dd f rom Contacts , Find , M ark/Unmark , Help , and Exit .
150 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Fixed dialling - You can res trict your outgoing calls to s elected phone numbers, if supported by y our SIM card. You need the PIN2 code for this function. When this function is active, y ou can only ca ll those phone numbers that a re included in t he fixed-dialling list or which begin w ith the same digit(s) as a phone number on the list. ⢠Press t he joy sti ck to set Fixed dialling on. ⢠To add new numbers t o the Fix ed dialling list, selec t Opt ions â New contact or Add from Contacts . Closed user group (network service) - You can specify a group of people whom you can ca ll and who can call you. F or more information, contact your network opera tor or service provider. Sel ect: Default to activate th e default group agreed on with the netw ork opera tor, On if you want to us e another group (you need to know th e group index number ), or Of f . When security features that restrict calls are in use (such as call ba rring, clos ed user group and fixed dia ling) calls still ma y be possib le to the offi cial emergency n umber progra mmed into your device. Confirm SIM services (network service) - To set th e phone to display confirmation messages when you are us ing a SIM card service. Ce rtif ica te ma nag eme nt Options in the ce rtificate mana gement main v iew are: Ce rtificate details , Delete , T rust settings , Mark/U nmark , Hel p , an d Ex i t .
151 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . In the certificate manageme nt main view , you can s ee a lis t of authority certificat es that have been stored in your phone. Move the joystick to t he right to see a list of personal certificates, if available. Authority certificates a re used by some browser s ervices, su ch as banking s ervices, for checking signatures or server certificates or other authority certificate s. Server certificates a re used to improve securit y in the connect ion between t he phone and t he gateway. T he phone receives the s erver cert ificate fr om the service provider before the connec tion is establis hed and its validit y is checked using the authorit y certificates saved in the phone. Server certificate s are not saved. Server certificates ma y be needed when yo u, for example : ⢠want to connect to an online bank or another site or remote serve r for actions that involv e transferr ing confidential information, or ⢠want to be sure of the authenti city of software when downloading and installing s oftware. Imp ort an t: Note that even if the u se of cert ifica tes cons iderably r educes the risks involve d in remote co nnection s and softw are instal latio n, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any pro tection by itself; th e certific ate ma nager must con tain correct, a uthentic, or trusted certificat es for increased se curity to be available. Certif icates have a restri cted lifet ime. I f Expired certif icate or Ce rtifica te not vali d yet is shown even i f the cert ificate sh ould be val id, check that the curren t date and time in your d evice are correct. Before changing any certificate settings, you mus t make sure that yo u actually trust the own er of the certific ate and that the certifi cate reall y belongs to the liste d owner.
152 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Changing the trust settings of an authority certificate ⢠Scrol l to an authority certificate and select Options â Trust settings . Depending on the certificate, a list of t he applications that can use the selected certificate is shown. For example: Application manager / Yes - The certificate is able to certify the origin of new soft war e. Internet / Yes - T he certificat e is able to certify e-mail and imagi ng servers. Call ba rring Select Call barring . Call barring (network service) all ows you t o restrict t he making and rec eiving of calls wit h your phone. For this function, y ou need the barring password obt ainable from y our service provider. 1. Scroll t o one of the barring options. 2. Select Options â Activ ate to request t he network to set call r estriction on, Cancel to set the selected call restrict ion off, or C heck status to che ck if the calls ar e barred or not. â¢S e l e c t Options â Edit barrings passw . to change the barring password. â¢S e l e c t Options â Cancel all barrings to cancel all active call barrings. Call barr ing and call di verting cann ot be active a t the same time . When calls are barre d, calls stil l may be possible to ce rtain official eme rgency numbers.
153 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Netw ork Select Network . Operator selection ⢠Automatic - Set th e phone to automaticall y sear ch for and selec t one of t he cellular net works avai lable in your area. ⢠Manual - Select the desired networ k manually from a lis t of net works. If th e connection t o the ma nually selected network is los t, the phone sounds an error tone and a sks you to select a network again. The selec ted network must have a roaming agr eement with your home network, that is, t he operator whos e SIM card is in your phone. Cell info display ⢠On - Set the phone to indicate w hen it is used in a cellular network based on Micro Cellular Network (MCN) technology a nd to activat e cell info r eception (network s erv ice). En ha nce me nt Select Enhancement . Scroll t o an enhancement f older and open t he settings: ⢠Default profile - Select the profile y ou want t o activate each time you c onnect a certain enhanc ement to your phone. ⢠Automatic answer - Set the phone to answer an incoming call automatically after 5 seconds after you connect this enhancement to y our phone. If the
154 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Ringing type is se t to Beep once or Silent , automatic ans wer cannot be used, and you must answer t he phone manually. â Go t o Select Menu â Go to or pr ess Go t o in stan dby mode. Options in the G o to main view are: Open , Edit shortcut name , Shortcut icon , D elete shortcut , Move , List vi ew / Grid view , Help , and Exit . Use G o to for storing s hortcuts, links to your favourit e photos, video clips, notes, Recorder sound files, and browser bookmarks. The default shortcuts ar e: - opens the Note s editor, - opens the Calendar at the current date, and - opens t he Messaging Inbox. Shortcuts can be added only from some of the functions. Applications do not have this functi onality. Adding and using shortcuts: 1. Open the application and scroll to the item that you want to a dd as a sh ortcut. 2. Select Options â Ad d t o ' Go t o ' and press OK . ⢠To open a shortcut , scroll to th e icon and pres s the jo ystick. The file is opened in the corresponding application. ⢠To delete a shortcut , scroll t o the shortcut t hat you want to remove and sel ect Options â Delete shortcut . Removing a shor tcut does not a ffect the file it is r eferring to.
155 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠To change the shortcut name , s el ec t O ptions â Edit shortcut name . Wri te the new name. This change aff ects only t he shortcut, not the file or the item tha t the shortcu t refe rs to.
156 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 10 . E x t r a s â Notes Select Menu â Extrasâ Note s . You can li nk notes to Go to and s end them to other devices. Plain t ext files (TXT f ormat) you receiv e can be save d to Notes. ⢠Pr ess ke ys 1 - 9 to s tart to wr ite . Pre ss th e cle ar key t o clear letters. Pres s Do ne to sav e. â Calc ulator Select Menu â Extrasâ Calculator . 1. Enter th e first numbe r of your cal culation. If you make a mis take, press the cle ar key to erase it. 2. Scrol l to an arithmet ic function and press the joys tick to select it. 3. Enter the se cond number. 4. To exe cute the ca lculation, s croll to and press the joyst ick. Options in Calculator ar e: L ast resu lt , Memory , C lear screen , Help , and Exit . Note : This calculator has limit ed accuracy and is design ed for simpl e calculation s. â¢To add a decimal, pr ess the # key. ⢠Press and hold the clear key to clear t he result of the previous calculati on.
157 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Use and to view previous calculations and move in t he sheet.
158 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Conv erte r Select Menu â Extrasâ Con ve rt er . In Converter, you can conv ert measurement parameters such as Len gth f rom one unit to anot her, for exa mple, Ya r d s to Metre s . The Conve rter has limited ac curacy and rounding error s may occur. Conver ting un its Options in Converter: Conversion type , Curren cy rates (not applicable to other units), Hel p , and Exit . To mak e curr ency conver sion you must f irst se t the exchange rate. See âÂÂSetting a base currency and exchange ratesâ on page 159. 1. Scroll to th e Typ e field and pr ess the joy stick to open a list of meas urement parameters. Scr oll to the measurement pa rameter you want t o use and press OK . 2. Scroll to th e first Uni t field and pres s joystick to open a list of a vailable units . Select the unit fro m which you want to convert and press OK . 3. Scroll to th e nex t Un it field and select the unit to which you want to convert. 4. Scroll to th e first Amount f ield an d ente r the val ue tha t you want to c onver t. The oth er Amount field change s automatically to show th e converted value. Press the # k ey to ad d a decimal and press the * key f or the , - (for temperature), and E (expone nt) symbols.
159 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . The c onversion order changes if you write a va lue in the second Amount field. The result is shown in the first Amount f ield. Set ting a base currency and exchan ge rates Before you can carry out currency conversions, you ne ed to choose a base currency (us ually your domestic currency) and add exchange rat es. The rat e of the ba se currenc y is always 1. The bas e currency det ermines the conversion rates of the ot her currencie s. 1. Select Curren cy as the me asurement paramet er type and select Options â Curr ency rat es . A list of c urrencies o pens and you can see the current bas e currency at the t op. 2. To cha nge the base c urrency, scr oll to the curr ency (usually your domes tic cur re ncy ), a nd sel ect Options â Set as base curr . . 3. Add exchange rates, scroll t o the c urrency, and ent er a new r ate, that is, how many units of t he currency equal one unit of the base currency you have sel ect ed . 4. After you have ins erted all t he required exchange rates, you can make currency conversions . See âÂÂConverting unitsâ on page 158.
160 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Recor der Select Menu â Extrasâ Re cord e r . The v oice recorder allows you to r ecord tele phone conversations and voice memos. If you ar e recording a t elephone conv ersation, both par ties hear a tone every 5 s econds during r ecording. Recorded f iles are s tored in the G allery. See âÂÂGalleryâ on page 71. Options in Recorder ar e: Record sound clip , Dele te , Re name sound clip , Send , G o to Gallery , Se tting s , A dd to 'Go to' , Help , and Exi t . â¢S e l e c t Options â Record sound clip and scroll to a function and pres s the joyst ick to select it. Use: - to reco rd, - t o pause, - to stop, - to fas t forward, - to r ewind, or - to play an opened sound file. The recorder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS connection is active. â Clock Select Menu â Extrasâ Clock . Ch angin g cl ock se ttin gs Options in Clock: Set alarm , Res et alarm , Remo ve alarm , Setti ngs , He lp , and Exi t . ⢠To cha nge the t ime or date, select Options â Settings in Clock.
161 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Set ting an alar m 1. To s et a new alar m, select Options â Set alarm . 2. Enter th e alarm ti me and press OK . When the alarm is active, the indicator is shown. ⢠To ca ncel an alarm, go to Clock a nd select Options â Remove alarm . Turning off the alarm â¢P r e s s Stop to turn o ff the al arm. â¢P r e s s Snooze to stop t he alarm for 5 mi nutes, after which it resumes. You can do this a maximum of fiv e times. If the alarm tim e is re ached while the device is switche d off, the device switc hes itsel f on and s tart s sou ndi ng th e al arm to ne. If yo u pres s Stop , the device asks whether you want to activate the device for calls . Press No to switch off the device or Yes to make and receive call s. Do n ot pr es s Yes when wireles s phone u se may caus e interf eren ce or dang er. Persona lising the al arm tone 1. To pers onalise the alarm tone, selec t Options â S ettin gs . 2. Scroll to Clock alarm tone and press t he joystick. 3. When you scroll through the list of tones , you can st op on a tone to listen to it before you make your s election. Press Selec t to sele ct the curre nt tone .
162 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Mem ory card Select Menu â Extrasâ Mem ory c ard . Options in the memor y card: Remove mem. c ard , Backup phone mem. , Res tore from card , Format mem. card , M emory card name , Set password , Change password , Remove password , Unlock memory car d , Memor y details , Hel p , and Exit . For details on inserting a memory card into t he phone, see the G etting Started section. You can use it to store your multimedia files such as video clips and sound files, photos , and messaging dat a, and t o back up informat ion from your phoneâÂÂs memory. Included with y our Nokia phone is a Reduced Size MultiMedia Card (RS-MMC) that may contain add-on applic ations from independent developers. These applicat ions are designed by the devel ope rs to be compatible wi th your phone. Use only compatibl e Multi MediaCard ( MMC) with th is device . Th e compati ble MMC f or your phone is Reduced Size Dual Voltage Mult iMediaCa rd. Other memory cards , such as Secu re Digital (SD) ca rds, do not fit in the MMC card slot and are not compa tible with th is device. Using an in compatible memo ry car d may damage the mem ory car d as well as t he device, and data stored on the incompatib le card may be corrupte d. Details of how you ca n use the memor y card wit h other feat ures and applications of your phone are given in the se ctions describing thes e features and applications. Keep all memory ca rds out of the r each of small childr en.
163 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . For matti ng the m emo ry ca rd When a memory car d is formatt ed, all data on t he card are permanen tly lost. Some memor y cards are supplied pre-for matted and other s require format ting. Consult your r etailer to fi nd out if you must format the memory card bef ore you can use it . â¢S e l e c t Options â Format mem. card . Select Ye s to conf irm. When for matting is complete, e nter a name for t he memory card (max . 11 letter s or numbers). Backing up and r est oring info rmat ion To bac k up information fr om your phoneâÂÂs me mory to the memor y card, s elect Options â Backup phone mem. To res tore information f rom the memory c ard to t he phoneâÂÂs memory, select Options â Restor e from card . You can only back up the phone memory and restore it t o the same p hone. Locki ng th e memory card To s et a password to lock your memory car d to help prev ent unauthorised use, sel ect Options â Set password . You are as ked to enter and confir m your password. The password ca n be up to eight characters long.
164 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . The passw ord is stored in y our phone and you do not have t o enter it aga in while you are using the memory card on the same phone. If you want to use the memory card on anot her phone, you a re asked for the password. Unlo cking a me mory c ard If you ins ert another passw ord-protected memory c ard into your phone, you are prompted to enter the password of the ca rd. To unlock t he card: â¢S e l e c t Options â Unlock memory c ard . Note : Once th e password is removed, th e memory card is unlocked and c an be used on ano ther phone withou t a p assw ord. Checking me mory consu mptio n You can c heck the memory consumption of dif ferent data gr oups and the available memory for ins talling new a pplications or softw are on your memor y card : â¢S e l e c t Options â Memory details . â Walle t Select Menu â Extrasâ Wallet . Options in the wa llet main vi ew are: Ope n , Sett ings , Hel p , and Exi t . Wallet provide s you with a storage ar ea for your personal informat ion, such as credit and debit card number s, addresses and other useful data, for example , user names and passwords.
165 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . The infor mation stored in the wallet ca n be easily retrieved while browsing to automatically complete online forms on br owser pages, f or example, when the service asks for c redit card det ails. Dat a in the wallet are encry pted and protect ed with a wallet code t hat you define. You can group wallet dat a into profiles that can be access ed, for exa mple, when making purchas es online. Due to the nature of t he wallet, it automatically closes after 5 minutes. Enter the wallet code t o regain access to the contents. You can change this automatic time- out period, if required. Se e âÂÂPresence settingsâ on page 65. Ente ring th e wall et c ode Each t ime you open the wallet yo u are prompt ed for a w allet code. When you open the wallet for t he first t ime, you must create your own acce ss code: 1. Enter a code of your choice (4 - 10 alphanumeric char acters), and pres s OK . 2. You are prompted to ve rify the code. Enter the same code and press OK . Do not give y our wallet code to anyone else. 3. Enter t he code t hat you have create d and press OK . If you en ter the wallet code incorrectly on three c onsecutive occas ions, the wallet applicat ion is blocked f or 5 minutes. The block time increases if further incorr ect wallet codes are entered.
166 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . If you f orget your walle t code, you have to r eset the code, and you will lose a ll information s tored in the wallet . See âÂÂResetting t he wallet and wallet codeâ on page 170. Stor ing p ers ona l c ard de tails 1. Select the Cards category fr om the main wallet menu and pr ess the joy stick. 2. Select a type of card from t he list and pr ess the joystick. ⢠Payment cards - Credit and debit cards. ⢠Loyalt y cards - Member ship and store ca rds. ⢠Online ac c. cards - Personal user names and pass words to online s ervices. ⢠Address cards - Basic cont act details f or home/office. ⢠Us er i nfo card s - Customise d personal prefe rences for online s ervices. 3. Select Options â New card . A blank form opens . 4. Fill in the fields a nd press Done . You can a lso receive card infor mation directly to the phone from a card issuer or service provider (if t hey offer th is service). You are notified which category t he card belongs to. Either save or discard the card. You can view a nd rename a saved card, but you cannot edit it. You can ope n, edit or de lete the f ields in the c ard. Any changes are saved upon exiting. Options when viewing or editing card details: Delete , Help , and Exit .
167 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Creat ing p ers onal no tes Personal notes are a means of storing s ensitive information, f or example, a bank account number. You can acces s the dat a in a personal not e from the br owser. You can a lso send a note as a message. ⢠Selec t the P e rsonal notes cat egory from the main w allet menu a nd press the joyst ick. â¢S e l e c t Options â New note . A blank note opens . â¢P r e s s k e y 1 - 9 to s tart writing. Pres s the clear key to clear char acters. Press Done to sa ve . Creating a wallet profile Once you have stored your personal details, you can combine t hem together into a wallet pr ofile. Use a w allet profile t o retrieve wal let data from different cards and categories to t he browser. 1. Select the Wallet profiles category from the main wallet menu and press the joyst ick. 2. Select Options â New profile . A new wallet profile form opens . 3. Fill in the fields a s indicated below and press Done . Some of t he fields must c ontain dat a selected from t he wallet. Save the dat a under the relevant category before creating a wallet profile, or the profile can no t b e cr e at ed . ⢠Profile name - Choose and enter a name for the prof ile.
168 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Payment card - Select a card from t he Payment card cate gory. ⢠Loyalt y card - Select a card from the Loyalty card category. ⢠Online ac cess card - Select a card from the Online access card category. ⢠Shipping address - Select an address from the Address car d category. ⢠Billing address - By def ault this is the s ame as the Shipp ing address. If y ou require a different address, select one from the A ddress card category. ⢠Us er i nfo card - Select a card f rom the U ser info ca rd category. ⢠Receive e-receipt - Selec t a des tination from the Addres s card cat egory. ⢠Deliver e-receipt - Select To phone , To e-mail , or T o pho. & e-mail . ⢠RFID sending - Se t to On or Of f . Defines whe ther or no t your unique phone identification is sent wit h the wal let profile (for fut ure development dependent on RFID -based tick eting). Retrieving information from the wallet to yo ur brows er When using online mobile service s supporting the wallet funct ionality, you can upload t he data stored in your wallet t o automatically e nter your details into an online form. For example, by uploading your payment card detai ls you do not need to enter t he card number and ex piry date each time y ou need them (depending on the content being brows ed). Also, you can retrieve your user name and password stored as an acces s card when c onnecting to a mobile ser vice that requires authenticat ion. See â Purchasing an itemâ on page 177. A cache is a memory location th at is us ed to store data temporaril y. If yo u have tried to access or have acces sed confide ntial informatio n requiring passwords, em pty the cache
169 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . after each use. The in formation or service s you have access ed is stored i n the cache. To empty the cache, s elec t Menu â Web â Options â Nav igation opt ions â Cl ea r C a che . Viewing ticket detai ls Options in the T ickets main view ar e: Vi e w , Dele te , Rename , Mark/Unmark , Help , and Exit . You can rec eive notificat ions of ti ckets purchase d online via the br owser. Received notifications ar e stored in t he wallet. To view the notifica tions: 1. Select the Tickets category f rom the main wallet menu and press the joy stick. 2. Select Options â View . Wallet setting s Select Options â Settings from the main w allet menu: ⢠Wallet code - Change your wallet code. You are prompted to enter th e current code, c reate a new code, and verify th e new code. ⢠RFID - Set the phone ID code, type, a nd sending options (for f uture development depe ndent on RFID-bas ed ticke ting). ⢠Automatic close - Change the a utomatic time-out period (1 - 60 minut es). After the t ime-out period has ela psed, the wallet code mus t be re-entered to gain ac cess to the c onte nts.
170 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Resetting the wa llet and wallet co de To res et both the cont ents of the w allet and the wallet code : 1. Enter *#7370925 538# in standby mode. 2. Enter th e phone lock code, and pres s OK . See âÂÂSecurityâ on page 149. 3. You are asked to confirm the erasing of data. Press OK . When opening the wal let again, you mus t enter a new wallet code . See âÂÂE ntering the wallet codeâ on page 165.
171 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 1 1. Service s and Ap plications â Web ( Mobile brows er) Select Menu â We b or press and hold key 0 in standby mode. Various service providers maintain pages specifically designed for mobile phones , offering se rvices that can be, fo r example, news , weather reports, banking, t ravel information, e ntertainment, and games. Wi th the mobile brows er, you can view the se services a s WAP pages writ ten in HTML, WML, and XHTML pages writt en in XHTML, or a mixt ure of WML and XHTML. If you have not ye t used your phone t o make a WAP connection, you may need to contact y our service provider for assistance with the first-time connection. Check the a vailability of services, pricing, and tariff s with your network ope rator and/or ser vice provider. Ser vice providers also give you instructions on how to use their serv ice s. Basic st eps fo r acc essing ⢠Save t he settings t hat are nee ded to ac cess the br owser s ervice that you want to use. See â Setting up the phone for the browser s erviceâ on page 172. ⢠Mak e a connection t o the s ervice. See âÂÂMaking a c onnectionâ on page 172. ⢠Start browsing t he web pages. See âÂÂBrowsingâ on page 174. ⢠End the connection to the service. See âÂÂEnding a connectionâ on page 178.
172 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Setting up the phone for the browser service Receiv in g set tings in a smar t messag e You may rec eive servic e settings in a special t ext message, a so-called s mart message, f rom the network oper ator or service provider that offers the service. See âÂÂReceiving smart me ssagesâ on page 101. For more information, cont act your network operator or service provider. Enteri ng th e sett ing s manu ally Follow the i nstructions give n to you by your service provider. 1. Select Menu â Settings â Connection â A ccess points and define the settings for an access point. See â Connection settingsâ on page 143. 2. Select Menu â We b â Options â Bookmark manager â Add bookmark . W ri te a name for the bookmark and the addres s of the br owser page defined for the current ac cess point. Ma ki ng a co nn ecti on Once you have stored all the required connection s ettings, you c an access browser pages. There ar e three different way s to acces s browser page s: ⢠Select the homepag e ( ) of yo ur service provider. ⢠Select a bookmar k from the Bookma rks view.
173 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â¢P r e s s t h e k e y s 2 - 9 to start to write the address of a brow ser service. The Go to field at the bottom of the display is immediately activated a nd you can continue writing the address there. After you have selected a page or written the address, press the joystick to start to download t he page. Viewing bo okmarks Your device may have s ome bookmark s loade d for site s not a ffiliated with Nokia . Nokia d oes not guarantee or endorse th ese sites . If you choos e to access them, yo u should take the same precautions, for security or con tent, as you would with an y Internet site. Options in the Bookmarks view (whe n a bookmark or folder is s elected): Open , D ownload , Back to page , Bookmark manager , Mark/Unmark , Navigation options , Advanced opt ions , Send , Find bookmar k , D etails , Setti ngs , Help , and Exit . In the Bookmarks view, you can see bookmarks pointing to different kinds of browser pages . Bookmarks are in dicated by t he following icons: - The st arting page defined for the brows er access point . If you us e another browser ac cess point f or browsing, t he starting page is changed accordingly. - T he last vis ited page. When the phone is disconnected from the ser vice, the address of the last visited page is kept in memor y until a new page is vis ited during the next connection. When you scroll through bookmarks, you can s ee the address of t he highlighted bookmar k in the Go to field at t he bottom of the display. - A book mark showing the t itle.
174 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Adding bookmar ks manually 1. In the Bookmarks view, select Opt ions â Bookmark manager â A dd bookmark . 2. Start to fill in the fields. Only the addr ess must be def ined. The default acces s point i s assigned to t he bookmark if no other one is selected. Pr ess the * key t o enter s pecial charact ers such as / , . , : , and @ . Press the clear key to clear char acters. 3. Select Options â Save to save the bookmar k. Browsi ng On a brows er page, new links appe ar underlined in blue and previous ly visited links in purple. Image s that act as links ha ve a blue border around them. Options when browsing: Open , Service options , Bookmarks , Save as bookmark , View image , N avigation options , Advanced options , Send bookmark , Fin d , Det ails , Settings , Help , and Exit . Keys and c ommands use d in brows ing ⢠To open a link, pr ess the joy stick. ⢠To s croll the vie w, use the joy stick. ⢠To ent er letter s and numbers in a f ield, pr ess the ke ys 0 - 9 . Press the * key t o enter s pecial charact ers such as / , . , : , a n d @ . Press the clear key to cle ar char acters. ⢠To go to the pr evious page while browsing, press Back . If Back is not available, sel ect Options â Navigation options â His tory to view a chronological l ist of
175 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . the pa ges you have visited duri ng a browsing sessi on. The history list is cleared each time a session is closed. ⢠To che ck boxes and make se lections, pr ess the joys tick. ⢠To r etrieve the latest content from the server, se lect O ptions â Navigation options âÂÂReload . ⢠To open a sub-list of commands or actions for the currently open browser page, s elect Options â Service options . ⢠To dis connect from a browser service and to quit br owsing, pres s and hold the end key . Saving b ookmarks ⢠To save a bookmark while browsing, select O ptions â Save as bookmark . ⢠To s ave a bookmark receive d in a smart message, open the message in the Inbox in Mes saging and select Options â Save to bookmarks . See âÂÂReceiving smart messagesâ on page 101. Viewing s aved pa ges Options in the Sav ed pages v iew are: Op en , Back to page , Reload , Saved pages , M ark/Unmark , N avigation options , A dvanced options , D etails , Settings , Help , and Exit . If you r egularly browse pa ges containing inf ormation which doe snâÂÂt change very often, you can save and t hen browse them when offline. ⢠To s ave a page, while browsing s elect Options â A dvanced options â Save page .
176 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Saved pa ges are indicat ed by th e following icon: - The saved browser page. In the saved pages view you can also create folders to store your s aved browser pages. Folders are indicated b y the following icon: - Folder c ontaining saved br owser pages. ⢠To open the Saved pages view , move the joystick to t he right in t he Bookmarks view. In the Save d pages vie w, press the joystick to open a sa ved page. To s tart a connect ion to the br owser serv ice and to retrieve the page again, select Options â N avigati on opt ions â Reload . The phone stays online after you r eload the page. A cache is a memory location th at is us ed to store data temporaril y. If yo u have tried to access or have acces sed confide ntial informatio n requiring passwords, em pty the cache after each use. The in formation or service s you have access ed is stored i n the cache. To empty the cache, s elec t Menu â We b â Op tions â Nav igation opt ions â Cl ea r C a che . Dow nl o adi n g You can dow nload items suc h as ringing to nes, images, operato r logos, software, and video clips using the mobile browser. T hese items c an be provided fr ee or you can purchase them. Once downloaded, items ar e handled by the respective applications on your phone, for example, a downloaded photo is saved in th e Gallery.
177 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Importa nt: Only install and use appl ications and other s oftware from sources that offer adequate security and pro tection against harmful software. Purchas ing an i tem To downloa d the item: 1. Scrol l to the link and select Options â Ope n . 2. Choose the ap propriate option t o purchase the i tem, for example, Buy. Carefully read all the information provided. If the online content is compatible, you c an use your w allet informa tion to make the purchase: 1. Select Open wallet . You are prompt ed for your w allet code. See âÂÂEnter ing the wallet codeâ on page 165. 2. Select the appropriat e card cat egory from your wallet. 3. Select Fill in . This uploads t he selected wallet information. If the wallet does not contain a ll information neces sary for the pur chase, you ar e requested to enter the remaining details manually. Co pyright protec tion may prev ent som e images, rin ging tone s, and oth er content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. Checkin g an i tem befo re do wnlo ading You can s ee details a bout an item befor e you download it. Details about a n item may incl ude the pr ice, a brief de scription and size. ⢠Scrol l to the link and select Options â Ope n . Details about the item are displayed on y our phone.
178 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠If y ou want to c ontinue with the downloading, press Accept , or if you want to cancel the download, press Canc el . Ending a conn ectio n â¢S e l e c t Options â A dvanced options â Disconnect , or ⢠Press and hold the end key to quit browsing a nd to return to s tandby mode. Br owse r s etti ngs Select Options â Settings : ⢠Default access point - To change the default access point, pr ess the joystick to open a li st of ava ilable access poi nts. The cur rent default acce ss point is highlighted. See â Connection settingsâ on page 143. ⢠Show images - Choose whether to view pict ures when you are browsing. If you choose No , you can later load images dur ing browsing by selecting Options â Sho w images . ⢠Text wrapping - Choose Off if you do not want the text in a paragraph to automatically wrap, or On if you do. If text is not wrapped, the ends of lines may be truncated. ⢠Font si ze - Y ou can choose five text sizes in the browser: Smallest , Small , Normal , Larg e , and Large st . ⢠Default encoding - T o make sure your browse r pages display text charact ers correc tly, select t he appropriate language type.
179 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Automatic bookmarks - Choose On if you want the bookmarks to be automatically saved in the Auto. bookmarks folder when you visit a page. When you select Hide folder , the book marks ar e still automatical ly added to the folder. ⢠Screen siz e - Choose how to use t he display area for view ing pages. ⢠Rendering - Choose the image quality for the pages. With the high image quality, the page download speed is s lower, and vice versa. ⢠Cookies - Allow / Re ject . You can enable or disable the receiv ing and sending of cookies (a me ans for c ontent providers t o identify user s and their pr eferences for freque ntly use d conte nt). ⢠Securi ty warnings - Choose to hide or show security notif ications. ⢠Conf. DTMF sending - Always / First time only . Choose whether you want to confirm before the phone sends D TMF tones during a voice call. See âÂÂOptions during a callâ on page 39. For example, you can make a voice call while you are viewing a browser page, send DTMF tones while a voice call is in progress, and save a name and phone number from a br owser page into Contacts. ⢠Wallet - Choose On to open th e wallet aut omatically when a compatible browser page is opened. â Games Select Menu â Ga mes . To s tart a game, s croll to the ga me icon and press the joy stick. For instructions on how t o play the game, select Options â Help .
180 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 12. Connect ivi ty â PC Su ite You can us e your phone wit h a var iety of PC connectivity and data communications applications. With PC Suite you can synchronize contacts, calendar and to-do notes and notes between your phone and the compatible PC, or a remote Inte rnet serv er ( netwo rk se rvice). You may find more information a bout PC Suite and t he download link in the support area on the NokiaâÂÂs Web site, <www.nokia. com/support>.
181 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Blue toot h co nnec tio n Select Menu â Connectivityâ Bluet ooth . This device is co mpliant with Blu etooth wi reless tech nology Spec ification 1.1 s upport ing the fol lowing profiles: H ands-free, Obj ect Pus h Pro file, File Tra ns fer Prof ile, Dial U p Net working Pro fil e and F a x Pro fi l e. To en s ure in ter ope rabil i ty be t wee n othe r devices supporting Bluetoo th wirel ess techno logy, use Nokia appro ved enh ancement s for thi s model. Ch eck with th e manufacture rs of other devices to determine the ir compatibilit y with this device. There ma y be re stric tions on u sing Bl uetoo th techn ology in some locations . Check with your local aut horities or service pro vid er . Fea tures using B luetoot h wire less technol ogy, o r allo wing s uch features to run in t he backgro und whil e using othe r features, increase the dema nd on battery powe r and reduces the ba ttery life. Bluetooth technology enables wir eless connections between e lectronic devices within a maximum range of 10 me tres. A Bluetoot h connection can be used to send images, videos, texts, business cards, calendar notes, or to connect wirelessly to compa tible devices using Bluetooth tec hnology, suc h as computers. Please note that not all computers using Bluet oot h technology are necessarily compatible. Since dev ices using Bluetooth technology communicate using radio waves, your phone and th e other de vices do not ne ed to be in direct line-of-sight. T he two devices only need to be within a maximum of 10 metres of ea ch other, although the connection can be s ubject to int erference f rom obstructions such as walls or
182 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . from other ele ctronic devic es. Using Bl uetooth technology c onsumes the bat tery and t he phone's operating t ime is reduce d. Take th is into account w hen performing other operations with your phone. There may be restrictions on using devices using Bluetooth technology. Chec k with your local authorities. When you activa te Bluetooth technology for the first time, you ar e asked to give a name to your phone. Bluetoo th co nnect ion setti ngs ⢠Bluetooth - On / Off. ⢠My phone's visibility - Sho wn to all - Your phone can be found by other Bluetooth dev ices or Hidden - Your phone ca nnot be f ound by other d evices. For sec urity reasons it is advisable to use the hidden mode wheneve r possible. ⢠My phone's name - Define a name for your phone. After you ha ve set t he Bluetooth connection as active and c hanged My phon e's visibility to Shown to all , your phone and this name can be seen by other Bluetooth dev ice users. Sen din g da ta via Blu eto oth tec hn olo gy There ca n be only one active Bluet ooth connection at a time. 1. Open an applic ation where the item you wish to send is stored. For example, to send a photo to another devic e, open the Gallery applic ation. 2. Scroll t o the item you want to send and s elect Options â Send â V ia Bluetooth .
183 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 3. The phone starts to s earch for devi ces wit hin range. Dev ices using Bluetooth technology t hat are within range start to appear on th e display one by one. You can s ee a devic e icon, the devic eâÂÂs name, the devic e type, or a short na me. Paired devic es are show n with . A pair ed device is one where a Bluetooth connection alr eady exists between your phone and the ot her device. ⢠To inte r rupt the se arch, pre ss Stop . The device lis t freezes and you can star t to form a connection t o one of t he devices already found. 4. When searching for de vices, some de vices may show only the unique device addresses. To find out the unique address of y our phone, e nter the code *#2820# in standby mode when the Bluetooth connection is active. If you have search ed for devi ces earlier, a list of t he devices that were found previously is shown first. To start a new search, select More device s . If you switch off the phone, the list of devices is cleared and the device search needs to be star ted again bef ore sending dat a. 5. Scroll t o the device yo u want to connect wit h and press Select . The it em you are sending is copied to O utbox and the not e Connec ting is shown. 6. Pairing (if not required by t he other de vice, go to s tep 7.) ⢠If the other device requires pai ring before dat a can be tr ansmitted, a tone sounds and you are asked to ent er a passcode. ⢠Create y our own passc ode (1-16 charact ers long, numeric) a nd agree w ith the owner of the ot her device t o use the s ame code. This passcode is used only once and you do not hav e to memoris e it. ⢠Aft er pairing, the de vice is saved to the Paired de vices vie w.
184 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 7. When the connection has been successfully established, the note Sending data is shown. Data rec eived via Bluetoot h connection can be found in t he Inbox folder in Messaging. See "Inbox - rec eiving messages". Icons for differ ent device s: - Computer , - Phone , - Audio/video , and - Bluetooth device . If sending fails , the me ssage or data are deleted. The Drafts folder in Messaging does not s tore messages sent via Bluetoot h connection. Checking the status of the Bluetooth connection ⢠When is shown in s tandby mode, the Bluetooth connection is active. ⢠When is blinking, your phone is trying to connect to t he other dev ice. ⢠When is s hown continuously, the Bluetoot h connection is a ctive. Paired devices view Paired devices are easier to recognise, they are indica ted by in the sear ch result list. In t he Bluetooth main vie w, move the joys tick to the r ight to open a list of paired devices ( ). ⢠To pa ir wit h a dev ice: Select Options â New paired de vice . The phone starts a device search. Scroll t o the device you w ant to pair with and press Select . Exchange passcodes. The device is added to the Paired devices list. ⢠To c ancel pairing: Scroll to the device whose pairing you want to cancel and press the clear key or select O ptions â Del ete . If you want to cancel all pairings, s elect Options â Delete all .
185 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . If you ar e currently connected t o a devic e, and delete t he pairing with that device, the pairing is removed and t he device connection is terminated, but Bluetooth connection remains active on the hands et. ⢠To set a device to be authorised or unauthorised: Scroll t o the de vice and sel ect Options â Set as authorised - Connections between your phone and this device can be made without yo ur knowledge. N o separate acce ptance or authorisa tion is needed. Use this status only for your own devices t hat others do not have access to, for example your PC, or devices that belong t o someone you trust. The icon is added next to auth orised devices in the Pair ed devices view. Set as unauthorised - Connection request s from this device need to be accept ed separately every time. Receiving data via Bluetooth wireles s techn ology When you receive data v ia Bluetooth wir eless techno logy, a tone sound is played and you are asked if y ou want t o accept t he message. If you acce pt, the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messagin g. Mes sages received v ia Bluetooth tech nology are indicated by . See âÂÂInbox - receiving mes sagesâ on page 100. Discon nec ting Blu e toot h conn ectio n A Bluetooth conne ction is disconne cted automatically after sending or r eceiving data.
186 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Infr are d conn ecti on Select Menu â Connectivityâ I nfra red . Via infrared, you can s end or rece ive data such as business cards and calendar notes to and from a compatible phone or data device. Do not poi nt the IR (infrared) beam at anyone's eye o r allow it to interfere with other IR devices. This device i s a Class 1 las er product. Sending and receiving data via infrared 1. Make sure that the infrared ports of the sending and receiving devices are pointing at each other and that there are no obstructions betwe en the devices. The pref erable d istance between t he two d evices is 1 me tre at most. S e e âÂÂKey s and partsâ on page 26. 2. The us er of the r eceiving dev ice activat es the infrared port . To ac tivate the infrared port of your phone to r eceive da ta via infrar ed, go to Menu â Connectivityâ I nfra red . 3. The us er of the s ending device s elects the des ired infrared f unction to star t da ta tr ans fe r. To s end data via infr ared, select Options â Send â Via infrared in a n application. If data transfer is not s tarted within 1 minut e after the act ivation of the infrared port , the connect ion is cance lled and must be started again. All items t hat are receiv ed via infrared are place d in the Inbox folder in Messaging. New infrared message ar e indicated by .
187 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Tip : Microsoft Windows 2000: T o be able t o use infrared to transfer files between your phone and a compatible computer, go to Control Panel and select Wireless Link. In the Wireless Link File Transfer tab, check the Allow others to send files to your computer us ing infrared. After transferring the files, it is advisable to change ba ck the default settings to pr event unauthorized file transfer. Checking the status of the infrared c onnection ⢠When blinks, y our phone is t rying to connec t to the othe r device or a connection has been lost. ⢠When is shown continuously, the infrared connection is activ e and your phone is ready to send a nd receiv e data via it s infrared port. â Con nection mana ger Select Menu â Connectivityâ Connec tion manager . Options in the Connect ion manager main v iew wh en there are one or mor e connections a re: Details , Disc onnect , D isconnect all , Help and Exit . In the Connection manager, you can identify t he status of multiple data connections, view det ails on the amount of data sent and r eceived, and end unused connect ions. You can v iew details of data connect ions only. Voice calls are not listed. When you open the Connect ion manager, you ca n see a list of: ⢠Open data connections, - Data call , - GPRS . ⢠The s tatus of each connec tion.
188 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Amount of dat a uploaded and downloaded for e ach connection (GPRS connections only). ⢠The durat ion of each connec tion (Data call c onnections only). Note : The actual time invoiced for calls by your s ervice prov ider may vary , dependi ng on netwo rk features , roundin g off for billi ng, and so forth. Vie win g con ne ction det ails To vie w the details of a connect ion, scroll to a connection and select Options â Det ails . The following is displayed: ⢠Name - The name of the Internet Acc ess Point (IAP) in use. ⢠Bearer - The type of da ta connection: Dat a call or GP RS . ⢠Status - The current status of the connection. ⢠Received - The amount of dat a, in bytes , received t o the phone . ⢠Sent - The amount of data, in bytes, sent from the phone. ⢠Durati on - The length of time that the connect ion has been open. ⢠Speed - The current speed of both sending and receiving data in KB/s (kilobytes per second). ⢠Dial-up (GSM) - The dial-up number used, or Name (GPRS) - acces s point name used. ⢠Shared (not displayed if the connection is not shared) - The number of applicat ions using the same connection.
189 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Ending co nnect ions ⢠Scrol l to a connection and select Opti ons â Disconnect to end that co nnect ion only. â¢S e l e c t Options â Disconnect all to close all currently open connections. â Conn ecti ng y ou r ph one to a c o mpati ble co mput er For further information on how t o make a connection to a compatible computer via USB, inf rared or Bluetooth technology, and how to install N okia PC Suite , see the Quick Guide for Nokia PC Suite . For fur ther information on how to use N okia PC Suite, se e the help function on PC Suite or v isit the s upport pages at www.nok ia.com. â Us ing you r phon e as a m odem Select Menu â Connectivityâ Modem . Use your phone as a modem to connect to the Internet wit h a compatible PC, or to send and receive f axes. Detailed insta llation instructions can be found in the PC Suit e user guide. You can find more information about P C Suite and the dow nload link in t he support a rea on the NokiaâÂÂs Web site, <www.nokia.com/support>.
190 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . â Re mote synch ro nisati on Select Menu â Connectivityâ Sync . The Sy nc application enables you to synchronise your calendar or contacts wit h various c alendar and address book applications on a compati ble computer or on the Internet. Synchronisation takes place over a GSM data call or packet data con nection. The s ynchronisation application us es Sync ML technology f or synchronisation. For information on Sy ncML compatibility, cont act the s upplier of the c alendar or address book a pplication you want to sy nchronise your phone da ta with. Creat ing a ne w sync hron isat ion p rofi le Options in the Remot e sync main vie w are: Synchronise , New sy nc pr ofi le , Edit sync profile , Del ete , View log , Help , and Exit . 1. If no profiles have bee n defined, the phone asks you if you want t o create a new prof ile. Select Ye s . To creat e a new profile in addit ion to existing ones , select Options â New syn c profile . Choose whether you want to use t he default setting values or copy the values f rom an exist ing profile to be used as the basis for the new profile. 2. Define the following: Sync prof ile name - Wr ite a descripti ve name for the profile. Access point - Select an access point you want t o use for the dat a connection.
191 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Host addres s - Contact your service provider or s ystem administrator for the correc t values. Port - Contact your service provider or system a dministrator for t he correct val ue s . User name - Your user ID for the synchronisation server. Contact your service provi der or system adminis trator for your correct ID. Pas s wo rd - Write your pa ssword. Contact your s ervice provider or system administra tor for the co rrect v alue. Move t he joystick t o the right and select the applica tion that yo u wish to synchronise. The av ailable applications that you can synchronise may var y. Contact your service provider for mor e information. 3. Press Do ne to sav e the sett ing s. Sy nchr on isin g da ta In the Sync main view, you can see the diff erent profiles, and what kind of data are sy nchron ised: Calendar, Contacts, or both. 1. In the main view, s croll to a pr ofile and select O ptions â Synchronise . The status of t he synchronisa tion is shown at the bottom of the s creen. To cancel synchronisation before it is f inished, press Cance l . 2. You ar e notified when the synchroni sation has been complet ed.
192 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Aft er synchronisation is complete, select Options â View log to open a log file showing the synchronisation status ( Complete or Incomplete ) and how many calendar or contact entries have been added, updated, deleted, or discarded (not synchronise d) in the phone or on the server.
193 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 13. Troubleshooti ng Memory low When the f ollowing notes are s hown, the phone memory is low a nd you must start to delete some data: Not enough memory to per form operation. Delete s ome data first. or Memory low . Delete s ome data. To view w hat kind of data you have and how much memory the differ ent data groups consume, go to File manager an d sel ect Options â Memory details . You may want t o delete the following items regularly to avoid memory getting low: ⢠Message s from the Inbox, D rafts, and Sent folder s in Messaging. ⢠Retri eved e-mail messages from t he phone memory. ⢠Saved br owser pages. ⢠Images and photos in Images. To dele te contact inf ormation, calendar not es, call t imers, call c ost timers, game scores , or any ot her data, go to the respec tive applica tion to remove th e data. If you ar e deleting multipl e items and another of the following notes are shown: Not enough memor y to perform oper ation. Delete some data fir st. or Memory l ow . Delete some data. try de leting items one by one (starting f rom the smallest it em). Clearing the calendar memory - To remove more than one event at a time, go to the Month view and select O ptions â Dele te en try â and either:
194 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Before da te - to delete all calendar not es which take place bef ore a certain date. Ent er the date bef ore which all calendar notes are delet ed. or ⢠All entries - t o delete all calendar notes. Erasing log information - To eras e all the log contents, Recent calls regis ter, and Messaging deliver y reports permanently, go to Log s and select Options â Clear log or go to Settings â Log duration â No log . Different ways to store data : ⢠Use N okia PC Suite to make a backup copy of all data t o a compat ible computer. ⢠Send images to your e -mail address and t hen save the images t o your computer (network service). ⢠Send dat a via inf rared or Bluetooth tec hnology to a compatible devi ce. ⢠Store da ta on a c ompatible memory card. â Q&A Phone display ⢠Q. Why do missing, discoloured or bright dots appear on t he screen every time I turn on my phone? A. This is a charac teristic of this type of display. Some displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or of f. This is nor mal, not a f ault.
195 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Camera ⢠Q: Why do images look smudgy? A: Check t hat the ca mera lens protection window i s clean. Bluetooth ⢠Q: Why c anâÂÂt I end a Bluet ooth connection? A: If another device is connected to your phone, you can either end the connection us ing the other device or by deactiva ting Bluetooth. Sele ct Bluetooth and s elect the sett ing Bluetooth â Off . ⢠Q: Why c anâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs Bluetooth-enable d device. A: Check t hat both you and your friend hav e activated Bluetooth. Check th at the distanc e between the two devices is not over 10 metres or that there a re no wal ls or other obs tructions between the device s. Check that the other device is not in âÂÂHiddenâ mode. Check th at both devic es are compatible. Multimedia messaging ⢠Q: What should I do w hen the phone tells me that it cannot receive a multimedia message because the memory is full? A: The amount of memory needed is indicated in the error me ssage: Not enough memory t o retrieve mes sage. Delete some data fi rst. T o v i e w w h a t k i n d of data you have and how much memory t he different data groups consume , go to File manager and selec t Options â Memory details .
196 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . ⢠Q: Ho w can I end the data conne ction when the phone starts a data connection again and again? The brief not es on the displ ay state that t he phone is retrieving or try ing to retrieve a message. What is happening? A: The phone is trying to r etrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia messaging ce ntre. Check that the settings for multimedia mes saging have b een defined correctly and t hat there are no mistakes in phone numbers or a ddresses. Select Messaging and select Options â Settings â Multimedia message . To s top the phone fr om making a data c onnection, y ou have the f ollowing options. Sele ct Messa gi ng and select Options â Settings â Multimedia message , and then: â¢S e l e c t On receiving msg. â Defe r retr ieval if you want the multimedia messaging ce ntre to s ave the message to be retrieved la ter, for e xample, after you have check ed the s ettings. After this change, the phone still need s to send info rmation notes to the network . To retrieve t he message lat er, sel ect Retr . imme diately . â¢S e l e c t On receiving msg. â Reject message - if you want to reject a ll incoming multimedia messages. After this change, the phone needs to send information notes to the network and the multimedia-messaging centre deletes a ll multimedia messa ges that are waiting to be sent to you. â¢S e l e c t Multimedia reception â Off - if you want to ignore a ll incoming multimedia messages. After this change, the phone will not mak e any network connections relat ed to multimedia me ssaging.
197 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Messaging ⢠Q: W hy can âÂÂt I s elect a con tact? A: If you c anno t sele ct a con tact i n the C ontac ts dire ctory , the cont act ca rd does not ha ve a phone number or an e-ma il address. Add the missing information t o the contact card in th e Contacts applicat ion. Calendar ⢠Q: Wh y are the week numbers missing? A: If you have changed the Calendar s ettings so tha t the week starts on a day other than Monday, then the we ek numbers are not shown. Browser Services â¢Q : No valid acces s point defined. Define one in Web settings. A: Insert proper browser set tings. Contact your s ervice provider for instructions. Log ⢠Q: Wh y does the log appear to be empty? A: You may h ave activated a filter, and no communication events fitting that filter have been logged. To see all events , select Options â Filter â All communication . PC connectivity ⢠Q: Why do I have problems in connec ting the phone to my PC? A: Make sure that Nokia PC Suite is installed and running on your PC. See the Quick Guide for Nokia PC Suit e . For f urther information on how to use Nok ia
198 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . PC Suite, se e the help function on PC Suite or v isit the s upport pages at www.nok ia.com/support. Access c odes ⢠Q: What is my password for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes? A: The default lock c ode is 123 45 . If you forget or lose the lock code, cont act your phone dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PU K code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network s ervice pr ovider. For inf ormation about passwor ds, contact your ac cess point provide r, for example, a commercial Int ernet Service Provider (ISP), ser vice provider, or network operator. Application not responding ⢠Q: How do I close an application th at is not r esponding? A: Open the application swit ching window by pressing and holding . Then scroll to t he applicat ion, and press t he clear key to close t he application.
199 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 14. Battery in form ati on â Charg ing and Di schar gi ng Your phon e is powe red by a re cha rgeab le b atter y. Note that a new battery's full performance is achie ved only after two or three complete charge and discharg e cycles! The battery can be charged and di scharged hundreds o f times but it will eve ntu ally wear out. When the operatin g time (talk-ti me and standb y time) is noticeably s horter than normal , it is time to buy a new ba ttery. Use only batt eries approve d by the p hone manu facture r and rec harge your batte ry only with the c harge rs ap prove d by the m anufa cturer. U nplug the cha rger whe n not in use . Do no t leave the ba tter y connecte d to a charg er for l onger than a week, si nce ove rcharg ing may shorten its lifet ime. If l eft unus ed a fully ch arged ba ttery will discharg e itsel f over ti me. Temperature e xtremes ca n affect the abil ity of your batter y to charge. Use the battery only for its intended purpos e. Never use any charger or batte ry which is damaged. Do not short-circui t the battery. Ac cid ental short -circuiting can oc cur when a metalli c obj ect (coin, cl ip o r pen) cause s dire ct conn ecti on of t he and - term inals of t he bat tery (metal strips on the battery) for example when you ca rry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short- circuitin g the terminals may damage the battery o r the connect ing object. Leaving the batte ry in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in s ummer or winter conditions, w ill reduce the capacity and li fetime of the b attery. Alw ays try to keep the battery between 1 5ðC and 25ðC (5 9ðF and 77ðF). A phone with a hot or cold ba ttery may
200 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . temporarily not work, even wh en the battery is fully charged. Batteries' performance is particula rly lim ited in temp eratu res well below freez ing. Do not dis pos e of b atte ries in a fir e! Dispose of bat teries accordin g to local regula tions (e.g . recycling) . Do not dispose a s hous ehold w aste. â Nokia batter y authent icat ion guideli nes Always use orig inal Nokia b atteries for your safety. To check th at you are gett ing an original Nokia battery, purchase it from an autho rized Nokia dealer, look for the Nokia Original Enhancements logo on the p ackagi ng and inspect th e holo gram label us ing the fo llowin g ste ps: Successful completio n of the four step s is not a tota l assurance of the authenti city of the battery. If you have any reason to belie ve that your bat tery is not an authenti c original Nokia battery, yo u should refra in fr om using it and tak e it to the ne arest autho rized Noki a service point or dealer fo r assistance . Your authori zed Nokia servi ce point or de aler will in spect the battery for authentici ty. If a uthenticity cannot be verified , return the bat tery to the place of pur ch ase Auth enti ca te hol ogr am 1. When looki ng at the holo gram label , you shoul d see the Nokia connectin g hands symbol fr om one angle a nd the Nokia O riginal Enhanceme nts logo whe n look ing from ano ther ang le.
201 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 2. When you angle the hologram to the left, righ t, down, and up side s of t he logo , you should see 1, 2, 3, and 4 dots on eac h side respectively. 3. Sc rat ch the side o f th e label to re veal a 20-d igit code, fo r examp le 123456 789198765 43210. Turn the batte ry so that t he num bers are faci ng upwa rds. The 20-digi t cod e reads starti ng from the number at the top row follo wed by the bottom row. 4. C onfirm that the 20-d igit co de i s valid by fo llowin g the instructions at www.nokia.co m/batterychec k. To create a te xt messa ge, en ter the 20 -digit code for ex ample 123456 789198765 43210 and sen d to 44 7786 20027 6. Nat iona l and intern ati onal opera tor ch arge s wi ll apply . You s hould re ceive a message i ndicating whether t he cod e can be authentica ted. What if battery is not authentic? If you cannot confirm tha t your Nokia battery with the h ologram on the labe l is an authentic Nokia battery, please do not use th e battery. Ta ke it to the neares t author ized Nokia s ervice point or dealer fo r assista nce. The u se of a bat tery that is not approved by the manufa cturer
202 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . may be d ange rous an d ma y res ult i n poor perfo rmanc e a nd da mage t o your devi ce a nd its enhancements . It may also i nvalidat e any approva l or warranty appl ying to the device. To find out more about or iginal Nokia batteries, vi sit www.nok ia.com/ba ttery.
203 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Care and Mainte nance You r dev ice is a pr od uct of s upe ri or des i gn an d c raf ts ma nsh ip an d sho ul d be tre at e d wi th care. The suggestions below h elp you protect your warranty covera ge. ⢠Kee p the d evice dry. Precip itatio n, humidi ty a nd all types of liqu ids o r moist ure ca n contain mi nerals t hat corrode el ectronic ci rcuits . If yo ur device does g et wet, remove th e batt ery and a llo w the de vic e to dr y co mple tely be fore repl acing it. ⢠Do not us e or s tore the de vice i n du sty, d irty a reas . Its moving part s an d elect ron ic co mpon ents can be d ama ged. ⢠D o not store the d evice in hot a reas. High tempera tures can shorten th e lif e of elect ronic de vices, dama ge b atterie s, and war p or m elt ce rtai n pl astics. ⢠D o not store the devi ce in cold areas. When the de vice returns to its normal temperature, mo isture can form i nsid e the d evice and d ama ge el ectron ic ci rcuit boards . ⢠D o not attemp t to open the dev ice other than as instructe d in this guide. ⢠D o not drop, knock, o r shake the device. Ro ugh handling can brea k internal circuit b oards and fi ne mec han ics . ⢠Do not use harsh chem icals, cleaning s olvents , or stron g dete rgents to clean the devic e. ⢠Do not pa int t he dev ice. Paint c an cl og th e movi ng part s an d pr event pr oper ope ration. ⢠U se a soft, clean, dry cloth to clea n any lense s (such as camera, proximity se nsor, and light s ensor l enses). ⢠Use only the suppl ied or an a pprov ed re place ment antenn a. U naut horise d ant ennas, mo dificat ions , or at tachme nts co uld d amage the de vice a nd m ay viola te reg ulat ions gov ernin g radio devices.
204 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . All of the abov e suggesti ons apply equal ly to your device, b attery, ch arger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, t ake it to the nearest a uthorize d service facility for service.
205 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . Add itiona l safet y inform ation â Operat ing envi r onment Remember to f ollow any spe cial regula tions in fo rce in any are a and always switch off your device whe n its use is proh ibited or w hen it may cause i nterfere nce or d anger. Use the devic e only in its norma l opera ting posi tions. To maintain complian ce with rad io frequency exposur e guidel ines only u se enhan cements approved by Nokia for u se with this device. Wh en the device is on and being w orn on the body, alwa ys u se an a ppro ved hold er or carrying case. Parts of the device a re magnetic. Metalli c materials may be attract ed to the device , and pers o ns wi t h a hea r ing a i d sho ul d no t ho ld th e dev ic e to the ea r wit h th e h ear in g ai d. Alw ays secure the devi ce in its hold er, becaus e metalli c mate rials may be at tracted by th e earpi ece. Do n ot p la ce cr ed it c ar ds or o t her ma gn eti c s to rag e med ia ne ar th e de vic e, b eca use informatio n stored on them ma y be erased. â Medical devic es Ope ration of a ny ra dio tra nsmi tting e quipme nt, i nclud ing wir eles s phon es, may inter fere with the functi onality o f inadeq uately pr otected med ical device s. Con sult a physici an or the manufacturer of the med ical de vice to determin e if the y are adequ ately shi elded fr om external RF energ y or if you have any q uestions. Switch off your device in health care facilitie s when an y regulatio ns posted in thes e areas in struct yo u to do so. H ospital s or health care f aciliti es may be using equ ipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy . Pacemaker s Pacemaker manu facture rs recommend that a mini mum separatio n of 6 in. (15.3 cm) be mai ntaine d be tween a wi reless pho ne an d a pa cemak er to a void p ote ntial interfe renc e wit h
206 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . the pacemaker. These recommenda tions are consi stent with the i ndependen t research b y and recommendat ions of Wire less Tec hnology Re search. Persons wi th pacemaker s should: ⢠a lways keep the device more th an 6 in. (15. 3 cm) from their pacema ker when the device is switched on; ⢠not ca rry th e dev ice i n a bre ast pock et; an d ⢠hol d the devi ce t o the e ar opp os ite the pac emake r to m ini mise the pot enti al for interference. If you have any reason to sus pect that inte rference is tak ing place, switch off your device immediately. Hearing a ids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with so me hearing aids. If interference occurs, consu lt your servi ce provide r. â Vehicl es RF signals may affect impro perly inst alled or inadequate ly shie lded electro nic syste ms in motor vehicl es such as el ectronic fu el inje ction systems , elect ronic an tiskid (antilock) br aking sys tem s, ele ct ronic spe ed c ontrol sy stem s, ai r ba g sy stem s. Fo r mor e i nform atio n, check with the ma nufactur er or its rep resentati ve of your ve hicle or any equipmen t that has be en adde d. Only qualif ied perso nnel shoul d service th e device, or install the d evice in a vehicle. Fau lty installatio n or servi ce may be dangero us and may in validate any warranty that ma y apply to the device. Ch eck regula rly that all w ireless de vice equip ment in your vehic le is mounted and op eratin g pr operl y. Do n ot stor e or ca rry flam mabl e liq uids , gase s, or ex plosi ve ma ter ials in the same compar tment as th e device, it s parts, or enh ancemen ts. For vehicle s equippe d with an air b ag, remember that air bags inflate with great fo rce. Do not place objects, incl udin g inst alle d or po rt able w irel ess equipm ent in the area over the a ir b ag or in th e air
207 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . bag deploy ment area . If in- vehicl e wireles s equipmen t is imp roperl y installe d and the air b ag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your de vice while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operatio n of the airc raft, d isrupt the w ireless telepho ne network, and may be ille gal. â Potent iall y expl osive envi ronm ents Switch off your device when in any area with a pot entially ex plosive a tmosph ere and obey all signs and instr uctions. Po tentiall y explo sive atmos phere s include are as where yo u would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engin e. Sparks in s uch areas could cause an explosion or fire res ulting in bodily injury or even death. Sw itch off the device at refuelling poi nts such as near g as pum ps at serv ice sta tion s. O bserv e re stri ction s o n the use of ra dio eq uipmen t in fuel depots , sto rage, and distr ibuti on are as, ch emi cal pl ants o r wh ere b lasti ng operatio ns are in pr ogress . Areas wit h a potenti ally exp losive atmo sphere a re often but not always clea rly mark ed. They in clude b elow deck on bo ats, che mical tran sfer or s torag e fac ilities , vehi cles usi ng liqu efie d petro leum g as (s uch as prop ane o r butane ), and area s where the air co ntains chemicals or particle s such as grain , dust or me tal powders . â Safet y infor mati on about vi deo games About photosensitive seizures A ve ry s mall percen tage o f peop le ma y e xperie nce a sei zure whe n expo sed t o c ertai n visua l images, in cluding fla shing lig hts or patter ns that may a ppear in vide o games. Eve n people who have n o histor y of seizure s or epil epsy may have an und iagnosed co nditi on that c an cause pho tosens itive epi leptic seiz ures whil e watch ing video g ames. Th ese seizure s may have a variety of symp toms, i ncluding l ighthead edness, al tered vi sion, eye or face twitching , jerking or s haking of arms or legs, disorien tation , confusi on, or momenta ry loss of
208 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . awar enes s. Sei zur es may a lso cau se loss of con sci ou sne ss or co nvu lsi on s tha t c an l ead t o injury fr om falling down or stri king nearby o bjects. Immedi ately stop playing and consult a doct or if you exp erienc e any of thes e sympt oms. Adults who allo w teenagers (or chil dren) to pla y the games sho uld watch for or ask their children about these sy mptoms as they are more like ly than adu lts to expe rience the se seizure s. The ris k of photose nsitive ep ilept ic seizu res may be re duced by pla ying in a wel l-lit room and by no t playi ng whe n yo u are drowsy or fa tigued . If y ou or a ny of yo ur re lativ es have a history of s eizures or epile psy, consul t a doctor before pl aying. Play saf ely Take a bre ak f rom pla ying ga me s at l east ev ery ha lf hour . Stop play ing immedi ately if you begi n to feel tired of i f you exp erience an unp leasant sens ation o r pain i n your ha nds an d/or arms. If the co nditio n persist s, consult a docto r. Use o f vibration can aggr avate injurie s. Do not turn vib ration on if y ou have a ny ailment in the b ones or joi nts of yo ur fingers, hands, wri sts, or a rms. â Emergen cy ca lls Imp ort an t: Wireles s phon es, inc luding this de vic e, opera te u sing r adio si gnals, wireles s network s, landli ne networks , and u ser-prog rammed functions. Because of this, co nnections in all cond itions can not b e guarante ed. You s hould ne ver rely solely o n any wireles s device for es sential communicatio ns like med ical emerge ncies . To mak e an e mergency call: 1. I f the device is not on, switch it o n. Check for adequate signal streng th. Some network s may require that a valid SI M card is prop erly inserted in the device.
209 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . 2. Pr ess th e end key as many times as nee ded to clear the disp lay and ready the d evice for calls. 3. Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Eme rgency numbers vary by lo cat ion. 4. Pr ess th e ca ll ke y . If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency cal l. If the dev ice is in off line or fli ght mode you must cha nge the profil e to activate the phone function before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service pro vider for more information. When making an emergency call , give all the necessary i nformation as ac curately as possible. Y our wirel ess device ma y be the only mea ns of communica tion at th e scene of a n acc ident. Do no t end the call un til gi ven per miss ion to do so. â Ce rtif icat ion inf orm ati on (SAR ) THIS DEVICE MEETS INTE RNATIONAL GU IDELINES FOR EXPO SURE TO RADIO WAVES Your mobile device is a rad io trans mitter and receiver. It is designed and manu factu red not to exceed the lim its for exposur e to radio frequency (RF) recommen ded by intern atio nal guideli nes (ICNI RP). Thes e limi ts are part o f compreh ensive g uidelin es and esta blish permitte d levels of RF en ergy for th e genera l populati on. Th e guidel ines were deve loped by inde pe nd en t sc ien ti fi c or g anis at ions t hr oug h pe ri od ic an d t hor ou gh eva lu ati on of sci e nt ifi c studies. The guid elines inclu de a su bstanti al safet y margin de signed t o assure th e safety of all perso ns, regardless of age and health. The exposu re standard for mobile devices emplo ys a unit of measureme nt known as the Specifi c Absorpt ion Rate, or SAR. The S AR limit st ated in th e interna tion al guide lines is 2.0 W/kg*. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard op erating positi ons with the device tra nsmit ting a t its hi ghes t certi fied power level in all test ed fre quency b ands. Alth ough th e SA R is de termi ned at the high est c ertifi ed po wer l evel, t he a ctual SA R of the device whi le
210 Copyright é 2005 N okia. All rights reserved . operatin g can be well belo w the maxi mum value. Th is is becaus e the device is designed to operate at mu ltip le power leve ls so as to u se only the p ower requ ired to rea ch the networ k. In general, the clo ser you ar e to a base station, the low er the power output of the d evic e. T h e h i gh e st S AR valu e f or th is d ev ice wh en te s ted f or u s e at th e e ar is 0 . 39 W /k g. This device meets RF exp osure gui del ines when used eit her in the normal use positio n again st t he ear o r when pos iti oned at le ast 2.2 cm away f rom the bo dy. When a carr y cas e, bel t cl ip or h ol de r is us ed for bod y- wo rn ope ra tio n, it sh oul d n ot con ta in met al and s h ould pos ition the pr oduct at le ast 2.2 c m away fr om y our body . In order to transmit d ata files or me ssages, thi s device requires a qu ality connectio n to the network. In so me cases, tr ansmis sion of dat a files or messages may b e delayed un til such a connection is ava ilable. Ensure the above sepa ration dista nce instru ctions are followed until the trans mission is comp leted. * T he SAR limit for mobil e dev ices use d by the pu blic i s 2.0 w atts/ kilog ram ( W/kg) avera ged over ten grams of bod y tissue . Th e guidel ines i ncorp orate a su bstant ial marg in of saf ety to gi ve addit ional p rotec tion for the publ ic and to acco unt for any v ariati ons in m easur ements. SA R value s may vary dependi ng on nationa l re porting requi rement s and the ne twork band. For SAR informa tion in other reg ions look under product informa tion at www.no kia.com.